Volume 2 Part 1 Civil & Architectural Specifications

PROJECT: 11-583
PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI,

UAE
FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH
TENDER DOCUMENTS
VOLUME 2 PART 1 OF 3
CIVIL AND ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS
Engineer:
Employer: Design Center
Mr. Fadi Ahmad Mohammad Odeh Architects & Engineers Consultants
Dubai, UAE P.O. Box: 80623, Dubai, UAE
PROJECT: 11-583
PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL

SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
MASTER INDEX
Volume 1 : Tender and Contract Conditions
Volume 2 : Specifications
Part 1 of 3 – Civil and Architectural Specifications
Part 2 of 3 – Mechanical and Plumbing Installation Specifications
Part 3 of 3 – Electrical Installation Specifications
Volume 3 : Bill of Quantities
Volume 4 : Soil Investigation Report
Volume 5 : Drawings
Part 1 of 3 – Architectural Drawings
Part 2 of 3 – Structural Drawings
Part 3 of 3 – Plumbing, Mechanical and Electrical Drawings
Design Center
P583– PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI, UAE
VOLUME 2 PART 1 OF 3
CIVIL AND ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS
Design Center 1/1

ARCHITECTURAL AND CIVIL WORK SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS
ITEM PARTICULARS PAGE

Division 1 General Requirements
01100 Summary 1-3
01300 Administrative Requirements 4-15
01500 Temporary Facilities and Controls 16-18
01600 Product Requirements 19-21
Division 2 Site Construction
02240 Dewatering 22-23
02250 Shoring and Underpinning 24-25
02300 Earthwork 26-31
02360 Soil Treatment 32-33
02450 Pile Foundation 34-38
02780 Unit Pavers 39
Division 3 Concrete
03200 Concrete Reinforcement 40-44
03300 Cast in place Concrete 45-57
Division 4 Masonry
04800 Masonry Assemblies 58-61
Division 5 Metals
05050 Basic Metal Materials and Methods 62-67
Division 6 Wood and Plastics
06200 Finish Carpentry 68-69
Division 7 Thermal and Moisture Protection
07100 Waterproofing and Insulation 70-72
07115 Bituminous Damproofing 73-74
07130 Thermoplastic Sheet Waterproofing 75-82
07840 Firestopping 83-84
Division 8 Doors and Windows
08110 Steel Doors 85-87
08120 Aluminum Doors and Frames 88-93
08200 Wooden Doors 94-98
08520 Aluminum Windows 99-104
08710 Door Hardware 105-111
08800 Glass and Glazing 112-117
Division 9 Finishes
09200 Cement Plastering 118-124
09300 Tile 125-136
09505 Gypsum Board Suspended Ceiling 137-140
09600 Stone Paving and Flooring 141-144
09900 Painting 145-157
Division 10 Specialties
10100 Signages 158-160
10260 Wall and Corner Guards 161-162
10670 Kitchen Cabinet 163-164
Design Center 1/2
10800 Toilet and Bath Accessories 165-166

10900 Wardrobe and Closet Specialties 167-168
List of Manufacturers 169-171

Green Building Regulations 172
Design Center 2/2

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 01100
SUMMARY
PART 1 – GENERAL
SPECIFICATIONS
1. Division 1, General Requirements, of the Specification generally specifies work and coordination that
relates to the Works as a whole and shall not be interpreted to define absolutely the limits of
responsibility that must be established between the Contractor and his Sub-contractors by their
separate agreements.
2. Where particular requirements specified in the other Sections of the Specification are in conflict with
Division 1, the former shall take precedence.
3. Ensure that Sub-contractors understand that the General and Special Conditions, General Provisions,
General Requirements, apply to Sections of the Specification governing their work.
4. Work in the Specification is divided into descriptive Groups and Sections which are not intended to
identify absolute contractual limits between Sub-contractors, nor between the Contractor and his Sub-
contractors. The Contractor shall examine all Sections, other documents and Drawings in order to
organize division of labour and supply of materials essential to complete the Works in all its parts.
DEFINITIONS
1. Wherever in the Specification the works “approval”, “approved”, “direction”, “directed”, “selection”,
“selected”, “request”, “requested”, “report”, and similar words are used, and the Engineer shall give
such approvals, directions, selections, request and reports unless specifically stated otherwise.
2. Wherever in the Specification the word ”provide” is used in any form, it shall mean that the permanent
Works and Temporary Works concerned shall include both supply and installation of the products
required for completion of specified work to which reference is made.
3. Wherever in the Specification the work “include” is used in any form, the items of work listed following
shall not be interpreted to be restricted to only those items that are listed.
4. Wherever in the Specification the words “indicated” or “shown” are used they shall apply as meaning
“indicated in the Tender Documents” or shown in the Tender Document”, unless the context
expresses another meaning.
5. Wherever in the Specification it is required that work shall proceed or shall meet direction, selection
or request of jurisdictional authorities or others, such direction, selection or request shall be in writing.
6. Wherever in the Specification it is specified that work shall be required to be made good or replaced,
it shall be performed without any additional cost to the Employer.
7. Wherever in the Specification the term “exposed to view” is used it shall refer to surfaces that are
within the line of vision of persons from any normally accessible viewpoint, both within and beyond
the building. Where any part of a surface is exposed to view, all other portion of that surface shall
also be considered as exposed to view.
8. Wherever in the Specification the term “Contract” is used it shall mean this contract.
9. Wherever in the Specification the term “Sub-contractor” is used it shall mean a specialist firm in that
trade and does not necessarily imply a contractual relationship unless the term “independent” is used
in conjunction with the term “Sub-contractor” or “firm”. This definition is applicable only in the
Specification.
10. The terms "Supervising Officer", "Supervising Officer's Representative" and "Engineer" shall be
regarded as synonymous with the Engineer and Engineer's Representative as referred to in Clause
1.1(a) (v) of the Conditions of Contract.
Design Center 1 / 172 Civil & Architectural Specifications

INTENT AND MEANING

The Contractor shall execute the work in accordance with the intent and meaning of the Drawings and
Specifications taken together and supply all accessories and other items essential for the proper
execution of the Works and shall execute all works which may be inferred whether or not specifically
shown or described.
DISCREPANCIES, ERRORS OR OMISSIONS

The Contractor shall be responsible for and shall be liable to pay the extra costs, if any, occasioned by
any discrepancies, errors or omissions in the drawings, whether the drawings are approved by the
Engineer or not. This shall not apply to errors, omissions or inaccurate information supplied to the
Contractor by the Engineer or his appointed representative in writing. Any omissions or discrepancies in
the Tender Documents shall be clarified during tendering stage itself.
CONTRACT DURATION
The construction of the project shall be completed within 15 months including mobilization from the date
of demarcation certificate and/or agreed Commencement Date. The Defects Liability Period shall be 365
days from the issuance of Taking-Over Certificate.
MOCK-UP
The Contractor shall prepare a mock-up with all finishing materials and complete furnishings as required.
CONTRACT DRAWINGS
The Contract Drawings is referred to the list included in the drawings.
GENERAL PRICE
The Contractor shall satisfy himself as to the Scope of the Work shown on the drawings and described in
these Tender Documents and his lump sum price shall be deemed to cover all his obligations under the
Contract and all matters and things necessary for the proper construction, completion and maintenance of
the Works. The price shall include for all material, labour and plant - whether mechanical of non-
mechanical - required for the completion of the Project in accordance with the Contract Drawings and
Specifications, and removing at completion and making good any surfaces distributed and if not included
in any prices inserted against the Conditions of Contract clauses above, for the insurances and bonds
required; for the costs of preparing a tender; for the work in connection with measurements and the final
account; for profit; and for all other establishment charges and on costs of whatever nature. No claim for
additional payment will be allowed for any error or misunderstanding by the Contractor in these respects.
SEPARATE CONTRACTS
A. The Employer reserves the right to allow other separate contracts in connection with this work under
similar conditions. The Contractor shall afford other Contractors reasonable opportunity for the
introduction and storage of their materials and the execution of their work, and shall properly connect
and coordinate his work with theirs.
B. If any part of the Contractor's work depends for proper execution or results upon the work of another
Contractor, the Contractor shall inspect and promptly report to the Engineer any defects in such work
that render it unsuitable for such proper execution and results. His failure to inspect and report shall
constitute an acceptance of the other Contractor's work after the execution of his work.
C. To ensure the proper execution of his subsequent work the Contractor shall measure work already in
place and shall at once report to the Engineer any discrepancy between executed work and the
drawings.

STANDARDS
A. In various places throughout this Specification and the Bills of Quantities, reference is made to the
Standards, Specifications and Bylaws issued by the British Standards Institution and other similar
organizations. These references shall in every case be deemed to include the latest edition of issue
of such Standards, Specifications and Bylaws including all revisions, amendments and addenda
subsequently issued. Where materials are not specified to be British Standard and standard exists in
respect of such materials, and then the material shall in all respects comply with the relevant and
current British Standard. In such cases where British Standards do exist, the materials used shall be
of the best type available and shall generally be to the Engineer's satisfaction.
B. Wherever in the Specification tests on materials, test on completed work and construction control
tests are called for or implied, they shall be carried out according to, and the materials shall comply
with the requirements of the specifications (latest edition) issued by:
a) The British Standard (B.S.) Institution and/or;
b) The American Association of the State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) and/or;
c) The American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM);
d) Others as stated in this specification.
C. Priority of selection of latest standard methods for specifications and testing shall be as follows:
 United Arab Emirates, Dubai Municipality Standards;
 International Standards such as International Organization for Standardization (ISO);
 National Standards such as British Standard Institution (BSI) & German Institute for
Standardization (DIN);
 Others as stated in the specifications such as ASTM, AASHTO, etc.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 01300
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
1. Fire Precautions
The Contractor shall conform to the regulations of authority in force at the Site of the Works with respect
to the precautions to be taken against fire hazards. Safety Precautions to be as per Dubai Municipality
Local Order 61/1991.
2. Statutory Approvals, Charges and Connections

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all approvals necessary for the Municipality,
Government Departments, the Police, local Service Authorities (i.e. Dubai Electricity & Water
Authority, Etisalat, Civil Defense, Dubai Municipality, etc.) as required in the performances of this
Contract, and for coordinating all main Service Connections and arranging timely connection to allow
completion of the Works within the Contract Period.
B. The charges for obtaining the building permit shall be borne by the Contractor. But the charges for
obtaining the permanent Service connections, i.e. Dubai Electricity & Water Authority, Dubai Drainage
Department, Du, etc. shall be paid by the Employer. However, all charges and deposits towards the
temporary Service Connections required for construction purposes shall be paid by the Contractor.
3. Information
The Contractor is to give reasonable advance notice minimum 21 days before the start of any respective
work, to the Engineer of all instructions, drawings, details or levels required by him.
4. Plant
Allow for providing and transporting of all plant, tools, ladders, machinery, tackle, consumable and
vehicles necessary for the proper execution of the contract works.
5. Construction Safety Health and Welfare

A. The Contractor is to comply with all current Construction Safety, Health and Welfare Regulations
including providing First Aid facilities on site to the approval of the Engineer.
B. The Contractor is to provide a copy of his company safety policy, together with certificates of
competence of operatives, training and certificates of worthiness for all plat machinery and small
tools.
C. The Contractor is to comply with all current Construction Safety, Health and Welfare Regulations
including providing First Aid facilities on site to the approval of the Engineer.
D. The Contractor is to provide a copy of his company safety policy, together with certificates of
competence of operatives, training and certificates of worthiness for all plat machinery and small
tools.
E. The Contractor shall follow all safety procedures and regulations as laid down by Dubai Municipality
for building construction.
F. The Contractor is to provide all equipment or temporary measures, including method statements, as
necessary to provide for safe working conditions.
6. Disbursements
Allow for all disbursements arising from the employment of labor.
7. Transport
Allow for the cost of transport for work people engaged upon the works.

8. Making Good
A. Allow for making good or paying the Local Authority and or Federal Government’s charge for any
damage beyond fair wear and tear to the public approach roads, footpaths, kerbs, grassed and
planted areas, etc. caused by reason of the contract works. The Contractor shall make his
arrangements with the Engineer before any work commences to ensure the extent of his own
responsibility.
B. Allow for making good any damage to the site including all or any features contained therein whether
temporary or permanent, caused by reason of the Contract Works.
C. Allow for making good any damage to existing buildings and adjoining property caused by reason of
the Contract Works.
D. Allow for making good any damage to existing telephone cables, sewers and drains including main
services in the course of installation caused by reason of the Contract Works. Any existing services,
sewers or drains uncovered during excavations are to be immediately reported to the Engineer. The
Contractor is to allow here for any additional costs in excavating around all services, sewers and
drains etc., met with.
E. Allow for necessary protection of the Contract Works and existing building and adjoining property and
for making good any damage.
9. Traffic and Police Regulations

Allow for any additional costs incurred in ascertaining and complying with any police regulations or
restrictions imposed on the Contractor’s access to the site and for clearing away from time to time or as
directed any dirt deposited on the public approach roads, public footpaths and in road gullies by reason of
vehicular traffic in connection with the contract. Allow for and pay all charges in connection with the
above.
10. Control of Noise and Pollution

The Contractor is to take particular care to reduce to a minimum disturbance to the public and adjoining
occupiers from noise and/or dust.
The Contractor shall take all reasonable precautions to prevent pollution of any kind arising out of the
execution of the contract work.
11. Provision of Maintenance Manuals

A. The Contractor shall arrange for, assemble, and provide to the Engineer at handover of the project,
two sets maintenance manual each manual comprising a ring binder, A4 size, having a rigid plastic
cover, containing relevant manufacturers printed brochures and a set of “as installed” drawings on
durable materials covering all maintenance matters in connection with the Contract Works.
B. The manual shall also contain names and addresses of installation Contractors, including emergency
call out numbers, together with all required guarantees and details of service departments and where
spare parts may be obtained.
C. The manual shall be of approved design and format and the Contractor is required to agree all details
with the Engineer prior to its assembly.
12. Final Payment

Final payment will not be released if all required items in 45.2 are not submitted to the Engineer’s
approval.
13. Site Management
A. The Contractor shall allow for all site management. He shall maintain adequate site organization
under the control of the qualified and experienced staff who are capable of assuming complete
responsibility for a Contract of this nature.
B. All submittals including the inspection/approval requests should be forwarded to the Engineer after
approval by the Contractor’s QA/QC team.
C. The Contractor should submit the CVs of the above mentioned personnel to the Engineer for
approval. All the above personnel should have minimum seven year experience in similar size
projects in U.A.E.
D. The Contractor will be responsible for his own setting out including setting levels and lines to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
14. Water for the Works

The Contractor will provide clean water for the Works including arranging connections and providing and
maintaining all necessary temporary plumbing and storage. The Contractor shall also provide cold
drinking water for his own and all Subcontractors’ operatives.
15. Electricity for the Works

Allow for providing electric power for his own and the subcontractors as well as nominated subcontractors
works at various locations around the site as and when required for the execution of the works. The
Contractor is to produce a temporary works drawing showing electrical distribution on the site, which must
be approved by the Engineer. The Contractor will not be permitted to use any part of the electrical
installations or fittings, installed under this Contract for the purposes of temporary lighting and power.
16. Watching and Lighting

Allow for watching, lighting and other protection necessary for the protection of the public generally
resulting from the carrying out of the Contract Works.
17. Artificial Lighting

The Contractor will provide artificial access and tasks lighting for his own and all Subcontractor purposes,
complete with all necessary temporary meters, wiring, poles and fittings, and afterwards remove and
make good.
18. Access to Site

Allow for forming any temporary access to the site and providing and maintaining any additional
temporary roads, hard standings, tracks and ramps required for the proper execution of the Contract
Works and for making good to the approval of the Engineer and damage to the site and general means of
access caused by reason of the Contract Works.
19. Notice Boards and Signboards

1. Notice boards shall be provided on the site to display information to the work force including
safety rules and regulations.
2. The Contractor shall provide and maintain two (2) sign boards (or required numbers of signboards
by Authority) for the Site consisting of GI pipe frame as detailed in the drawings and to be fixed to
the ground as likewise shown in the drawings.
The boards shall be lettered by a skilled sign writer in English and in Arabic to include:
a) The Project Name
b) The Employer's Name
c) The Consultant’s Name
d) The Contractor's Name.
e) Subcontractors’ Name
Large scale layouts are to be submitted for approval before manufacture. No advertising material
other than the above will be permitted.
3. Refer below requirements of Dubai Development Authority’s Building Department for

Standardization of Signboard and Hoarding at Site Signboard:
Signboards:
1. Steel pipes structure must be installed with proper concrete bases and angles to maintain
stability.
2. Background including main structure to be in white.
3. Foundation must be above Ground level.
4. Information must be clear and precise.
5. Length: x (Minimum of 2x4), and height to be 2x (Maximum of 6x12). (To be proportional in size,
as shown in the drawing).
6. The contractor has the freedom to choose one of the two shapes of the sign board (as per the
figure below).
7. The mandatory information on the signboard are: Main Consultant- Main Contractor – Plot
number – Permit number – DDA emergency number – Contractor emergency number.
8. Perspective (if applicable).
Hoarding:
1. To be in a corrugated steel material, painted in white color of minimum height of 2.8 meters. The
Contractor shall increase the height to fully cover (with high quality art works) the construction
activity during the event (for 3 months).
2. To be within or maximum 3.0 meter Out of plot limit from all sides subject to approvals from
relevant authorities.
3. Any additional area to be permitted through temporary permit to utilize the plot request form.
20. Setting of Offices, etc.

The setting of all Contractors’ offices sheds and stacks of materials are to be agreed with the Engineer at
the commencement of the Contract including temporary office for the Engineer in compliance to Section
01500 of this specifications.
21. Rates
The Contractor is to allow for paying all charges imposed by the Local Authority or Federal Government
on his own site establishment.
22. Temporary Fences and Hoarding

Allow for providing, erecting and maintaining all necessary temporary fencing, hoarding, fans, Planked
footways, guard-rails, gantries and the like as may be necessary for protecting the public and for
maintaining the security of the site to permit the proper execution of the contract works and for meeting
the requirements of the Local Authority.
23. Scaffolding
Allow for all temporary external and internal scaffolding, including any temporary platforms, etc. required
for the Contract Works. The Contractor should allow for the use of his external scaffolding by his
Subcontractors as required. The Contractor shall be responsible for all safety precautions in connection
with scaffolding.
24. Protection
Allow for casing up and protecting as required or as directed all work liable to damage during the
progress of the contract from whatever cause including protecting same from damage by inclement
weather and for reinstating any work so damaged at the Contractor’s expense.
25. Builder’s Work in connection

The Contractor is to include for all sundry builder’s work in connection with Nominated Subcontractors,
such as cutting holes for pipes and cables, drilling the structure, making good the structure, fire stopping,
pipe sleeves and other similar sundry items. Any such work not satisfactorily carried out will be carried out
by others and the cost deducted from the Contractor’s payments.
26. Cart away rubbish

Allow for removal from site and disposal at an approved Municipal dump of all rubbish and debris
resulting from the Contract Works and for leaving the site and work clean and tidy on completion. Rubbish
is not allowed to accumulate and all rubbish, debris and surplus materials are to be removed from the
works daily. Nothing whatever must be buried in the ground. All surplus materials and that resulting from
defective contract work are to be removed at the Contractor’s expense.
27. Offloading and Moving Materials

The Contractor is to make all allowances as required, including carnage, for off-loading his own and
Subcontractors’ materials and equipment, transporting to storage area and loading out to the appropriate
working areas. All packaging, pallets and containers provided by the Contractor or his suppliers are to be
removed or returned at the Contractor’s expense.
28. Cleaning
Allow for cleaning by a professional cleaning company and leave all areas perfect after the completion of
the Contract Works to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
29. Setting Out

The Contractor shall be responsible for his own setting out and for providing basic setting out points and
datum levels on the site for use by others.
30. Welfare Facilities

The Contractor shall provide all welfare facilities required for use by his own operatives together with
general facilities for use by Subcontractors.
31. Compliance and Regulations

The Contractor shall comply with current Construction Safety Health and Welfare Regulations, and also
the statutory Regulations for prevention of fire on construction sites.
32. Boycott of Israel

The Contractor shall observe the requirements of all laws, by-laws and orders relating to the Arab Boycott
of Israel.
33. Bribery
Any commission, advantage, gift, gratuity, reward or bribe given, promised or offered by or on behalf of
the Contractor or his agent or servant or any other person on his or their behalf to any officer, servant
representative, or agent of the Employer (if any) or the Engineer or to any person on their behalf or on
behalf of any of them in relation to the obtaining or to the execution of this or of any other Contract with
the Employer shall, in addition to any criminal liability which may be thereby incurred, subject the
Contractor to the cancellation of this and of all other Contracts with the Employer and also the payment of
any loss or damage resulting from such cancellation.
34. English Language

The Employer’s Engineer shall be English speaking and the Contractor will be required to ensure that his
own Site Supervisor (Project Manager), who shall be present at all times during the course of Contract
Works, shall be English speaking, such that no misunderstanding can arise from this cause.
35. Special Conditions relating to Securing ‘No Objection Certificate’

The successful Contractor will be required to accept the penalties for damages to cables / property as per
the current penalty regulations issued by the relevant authorities in Dubai Municipality.
36. Latest Regulation

The Contractor shall follow the latest regulations issued by all Local Authorities such as Dubai
Municipality, Dubai Electricity and Water Authority (DEWA), etc.
37. Site Survey

Within one week of taking possession of the Site, the Contractor shall produce a site layout plan showing
boundaries, existing levels to a 5M grid and exact position of main features within the site, and shall hand
over the same to the Engineer. The Contractor can refer to the copy of the survey levels carried out by
the Engineer’s surveyor.
38. Contractor to Verify Site Measurements

The Contractor shall check and verify all site measurements wherever requested by other Specialist
Contractors or by nominated or other Sub-Contractors to enable them to prepare their own shop
drawings, and pass on the information with sufficient promptness as will not in any way delay the Works.
A copy of all such information passed on shall be given to the Engineer.
39. Cutting and Patching

The Contractor shall be responsible for all cutting, patching and making good for all trades for all works
and his prices will be deemed to include for all such cutting and patching and making good.
40. Subcontractors
A. All proposed sub-contractors shall be to the approval of the Engineer. Only Subcontractors who are
registered, licensed and based in Dubai Emirates will be approved, however, suitable and equal Sub-
contractors will be considered. This condition is applicable to all Subcontractors in all sections of the
works.
B. Nominated Subcontractors and suppliers shall be bound by all main contract conditions and
provisions (back to back with main contract including their performance) as per main contractor’s
program of works.
C. In the event that any of the proposed Subcontractors do not meet the Engineer’s requirement and
approval, the Contractor shall re-submit the name or names of alternative Subcontractors until such
time a complete list of Subcontractors approved by the Engineer has been achieved.
D. Approved Subcontractor from the list provided will be considered as nominated Subcontractor for
payments only.
E. The Engineer shall have the right to demand copy of contracts between Contractor and Subcontractor
or Suppliers for references and records at any time.
F. The Contractor shall allow, when pricing items of works given after Provisional Sums for nominated
Subcontractors for the following:
a) The cost of placing and processing orders as directed by the Engineer.
b) The provision of power, light and water points adjacent to the Works as required by the
nominated Subcontractor and the free use thereof.
c) The provision, erection, maintenance, dismantling and clearing away of all external and internal
required scaffoldings.
d) The provision of all plant for receiving, off-loading, storing and subsequent handling and hoisting
of materials and equipment to their final position.
e) The provision and free use of mess-rooms, latrines, first-aid facilities, etc.
f) All other facilities necessary for the proper execution of the Works.
g) Coordinating the nominated Subcontractor’s work with all other works and arranging the
nominated subcontractor’s work to coincide with the main construction program.

h) Coordinating the nominated subcontractor’s drawings with all other drawings to ensure the proper
integration of all the work on site and to avoid any resultant delays.
i) Obtaining and providing all measurements and details necessary for the proper execution of the
nominated subcontractor’s work.
j) Provisional Sums for goods supplied by nominated Subcontractors supplying materials shall
include placing and processing of orders as directed by the Engineer, checking or ascertaining
the correct quantities to be listed in the order and where appropriate providing the nominated
Subcontractor supplying materials with correct site dimensions, dealing with port clearance
formalities and unloading from transport on to shore and paying all charges in connection
herewith, onshore loading and transporting to site, getting into store, protecting, unpacking and
checking if required, initiating and processing insurance claims and returning packing cases
carriage paid if required.
k) Attendance to Subcontractors and provision of reasonable site offices and facilities to the
nominated Subcontractors depending on the nature and volume of their works, site
accommodation (except fitting out of accommodation), scaffolding, power, water, and the like with
complete required furniture and equipment, other temporary buildings and sufficient storage
sheds for storing their equipment to be positioned and work to be performed., etc. Telephone and
facsimile connection for the Subcontractors including all connection and running charges (for
local use only) for the entire duration of the work are part of the Main Contractor’s responsibility.
l) Subsequent removal of the temporary offices provided to the Subcontractor.
m) Responsibilities for the Nominated Subcontractors and domestic subcontractors.
41. Drawings
The Contractor will receive from the Engineer the drawings together with any further drawings issued
under Clause 6.1 of the Conditions of Contract.
The Contractor shall be solely responsible for providing all Sub-contractors, whether nominated or
otherwise, with sufficient copies of all relevant drawings in order that they can complete their work within
the approved construction programme under Clause 14.1 of the Conditions of Contract.
41.1 Workshop Drawings

The Contractor and all Sub-contractors, whether nominated or otherwise, shall prepare the
following drawings and information based upon the drawings issued by the Engineer:
a) The Contractor shall prepare Bar Bending Schedules for all reinforcement in a format to be
agreed by the Engineer.
b) The Contractor shall prepare all workshop drawings for Mechanical, Electrical and Plumbing
installation and all other services involved in the project.
c) The Contractor and Sub-contractors, whether nominated or otherwise, shall provide
workshop drawings for their own trades, where applicable, or when requested by the
Engineer. The workshop drawing shall clearly show all dimensions, details, specifications,
connections or joints to other trades, incorporation of the work of other trades, etc.
d) Builder’s Work Drawings
e) Sub-contractors, whether nominated or otherwise, shall provide drawings showing the exact
dimension and location of all holes, ducts, recesses, access points, etc. These drawings shall
also specify all necessary Builders’ work in connection with movement precaution, sound and
thermal protection, etc.
f) Manufacturer’s Drawings
The Contractor and sub-contractors, whether nominated or otherwise, shall provide
manufacturer’s drawings for their own trades, where applicable, or when requested by the
Engineer. The manufacturer’s drawings shall clearly show all dimensions, details,

specifications, connections or joints to other trades, incorporation of the work of other trades,
etc.
Before submitting shop drawings by specialist sub-contractors, for the approval of the Engineer,
the Contractor shall verify all dimensions, field conditions and check and coordinate the shop
drawings of one trade or section with the requirements of other trades and sections related
thereto, as required for the proper and complete installation of the Works.
41.2 As-Built Drawings

The Contractor shall keep accurate records of the Works executed throughout the course of the
Contract and shall submit two sets of accurate, fully dimensioned "As Built" drawings and other
information showing the full extent of the work actually executed to the Engineer within 30 (thirty)
days of the issue of the Engineer Certificate of Practical Completion:
i) 2 Nos. copies of 1:200 plan detailing all drainage, incoming service mains and external
electrical cabling, where reasonably possible.
ii) 2 Nos. copies of 1:50 plan detailing all plumbing, mechanical and electrical installations in the
development.
iii) 2 Nos. copies of architectural and structural and all other drawings used in the construction
process.
iv) 2 Nos. copies of SMATV & Satellite System, Intercom System, CCTV & Telephone System.
v) All Manufacturers’ warranties and operating instruction booklets for passing on to occupants
in addition to the maintenance manuals referred to item 52 of herein Administrative
Requirements.
vi) 1 No. complete set of Reproducible Drawings.
vii) Original Completion Certificate from Dubai Municipality.
42. Contractor’s Responsibilities
1. Coordination
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating all drawings including those produced by
Sub-contractors whether nominated or otherwise and all Authorities or others employed direct in
connection with the Works so that the work of each may be installed in such a manner as to
ensure proper performance and adequate fixing to the structure and to avoid conflicts in the
positioning of various ducts, pipes, cables, other items of service installation and other like items.
B. The Contractor shall employ a competent person experience in the coordination of engineering
and other installations to perform this duty. He shall arrange for his Sub-contractors, including
nominated Sub-contractors, any/all authorities, or others employed direct to attend necessary
coordination meetings.
C. Any amendments to the Drawings consequent upon the coordination of the various installations
shall be made by the Sub-contractors or others concerned prior to such drawings being submitted
to the Engineer for approval.
2. Approval of Drawings
A. All Drawings prepared by the Contractor, his Sub-contractors whether nominated or otherwise,
and/all Authorities or others employed direct in connection with the Works shall be submitted at
the appropriate time to the Engineer by the Contractor and this will be only accepted and
contractual method. The Engineer shall check and approve these drawings in a reasonable time
and issue them to the Contractor as “Approved for Construction”. Such approval shall not relieve
the aforementioned parties of responsibility for any discrepancies, errors or omissions in their
submittal.

B. If the Engineer shall instruct the re-drawings, alteration or amending of any of the submitted
drawings which, in his sole opinion, do not properly interpret the intent of the Contract or for any
reason do not comply with good building practice then the Contractor shall ensure the carrying
out of the Engineer’s instructions and no claim for extra payment shall be allowed for any reason
in this respect.
C. Should the Engineer instruct the alteration or amending of any drawing prepared by any of the
parties above, then the Contractor shall ensure that this is done immediately in order to avoid any
delay to construction programme and no claim for extra payment or extension of time for
completion of the Works shall be allowed for any reason in this respect.
D. The Contractor shall prepare a detailed programme for the production of the Drawings and
information required immediately upon receipt of the Engineer’s order to commence the Works.
The programme, which will be subject to the scrutiny of the Engineer who may alter or amend it
as he sees fit, shall be compatible with the programme for the construction works.
43. Programme of Work

A. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval within fourteen (14) days after the date
of the Letter of Acceptance a Programme of Works with detailed CPM Program accompanied by
a complete critical path analysis for the execution and completion of the Works. The CPM
Program shall be presented on a weekly time scale and shall be prepared by using Primavera
Project Planner Software System of version 6 or as per Engineer’s request. The CPM Program
shall be presented on a weekly time scale and shall be prepared by using Primavera Project
Planner Software System (Version 2 or above).
B. The Program shall clearly indicate the Contractor’s proposals for meeting the Contract
Requirements and shall be interlinked to show the inter-relationships between activities and
interfaces between the various work packages of nominated and other subcontractors. Activities
of off-site and on site mobilization, material and shop drawing submittals, procurement, design
where required; construction and any other requirements shall be incorporated within the
schedule.
C. The Program shall include for each main item of the Works, the order and timing of the various
phases of work from Commencement date of the Contract to its final completion.
D. Milestone dates given in the Contractor’s Tender Program (or any update to these dates as may
be instructed by the Engineer) shall be strictly adhered to and shall be clearly identified on this
program. Early/ Late start and Early/ Late Finish dates shall be also shown to identify Free and
Total Float of each activity.
E. The Program shall be broken down to sections and packages as per the Contractor’s Tender
Program and in such detail as in the opinion of the Engineer, necessary for the accurate
assessment of the Contractor’s intent and the subsequent progress monitoring of the Works. The
Engineer shall determine the form and number of Hard and Soft Copies to be supplied.
F. The CPM Program of Work shall upon the consent by the Engineer, become the Construction
Program, utilized for assessment of Work Progress.
G. Upon introduction of each of the nominated subcontractors for work packages, the Original
Construction program shall be updated to incorporate further details as may be necessary for
construction activities of each Work Package with interactions to other Work Packages works,
including the updated breakdown of Lump sum items and cost loading to cover the Provisional
Sum.
H. Based on the above Construction Program, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer consent
the following supporting documents, in such details and forms as the Engineer may require and
subject to his approval:

a) Production Rates
b) Manpower Histograms
c) Equipment Histograms
d) Breakdown of Lump Sum Items and Cost Loading: The Cost Loading of each activity
associated with the preparation, production, updating and submission of Construction
Program shall be included based on the applicable unit prices or Lump-Sum prices contained
in the priced B.O.Q. The sum of the monetary values of all activities shall total the Contract
Amount. This Cost loading to be used and associated with updated schedules in order to
define the interim monthly payments amount based on updated work progress.
e) Work Progress S-Curves
f) Detailed Shop Drawings Submittal Schedule including Composite Shop Drawings allowing 15
days for Engineer’s review and approval for each submittal
g) Detailed Material Submittal Schedule allowing 15 days for Engineer’s review and approval for
each submittal
I. The Construction Program shall be updated by the Contractor to reflect the actual progress status
compared to the original Program as Target Base. It should be submitted to the Engineer within
three days after the end of each month.
J. Similarly the Contractor shall submit incorporating updated schedules with three copies of a
narrative report to be named the Contractor’s Monthly Report, no later than 7 days after the end
of each month. This Report to include the following:
1. Activity Report, to show status of works completed, in-progress and future activities.
2. Schedule Report, to show Early/ Late Target Dates, Actual Dates and Total Float for all
activities.
3. One Month Ahead detailed Schedule.
4. Summary Report by Early Start showing all Sections and Packages summaries.
5. Daily number of actual Manpower on Site compared to Target with histograms and
tables.
6. Daily number of actual equipment on site compared to Target with histograms and
tables.
7. Record of actual material delivery
8. Status of material and shop drawings submittals
9. Variation Orders Status
10. Contractor’s claims status
11. Interim Payments Certificate Status
12. Site Progress Photographs
13. Health and Safety Reports
14. Quality Issues and RFI Log and NCR log.
15. Extension of Time Claims status.
K. The Said Monthly report is indicative to the Engineer’s consideration and is not binding to the
Engineer or to the Employer.
L. The Contractor shall also provide as required by the Engineer further reports of the Works to
record specific events.
43.1 Updated Programme

A. If at any time it should appear to the Engineer that the current construction program cannot
be adhered to, the Engineer may request the Contractor to submit an updated construction
program.

B. If at any time it should appear to the Engineer that the actual progress of the Works is less
than that estimated in the original or updated program for reasons that do not entitle the
Contractor to any extension of Time for Completion, the Engineer may request the
Contractor to accelerate the progress of the Works without cost borne by the Employer. If
such delay exists for more than one month, the Employer reserves the right to treat such
delay as default justifying the termination of the Contract pursuant to Clause 63 of Contract
Conditions.
44. Reports
A. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the first week in every month, a ‘Progress Report’ for
the previous month in a form approved by the Engineer. Such report shall include the following
information but not limited to:
i) Works report covering progress on each main part of the works including dates and principal
operations, together with sub-contract work and outputs of main production centers.
ii) General report, including weather records, summaries of staff, labour and constructional plant
employed on site with dates of arrival and departure and summaries of principal materials
and manufactured items placed on order and delivered to site.
iii) Updated revisions of the Works Programme to show progress during the month and
cumulative progress to date.
B. The Contractor shall provide 10cm x 15cm glossy colour prints of photographs mounted on linen
board or equivalent standard photographic mounting board with 2.54cm wide hinge and binding
band at left.
45. Progress Meetings

A. Allow for attending progress meetings, which shall be held at regular intervals. The organization
of these meetings, including notifying all interested parties will be the responsibility of the
Engineer.
B. Minutes will be taken and circulated by the Engineer who will normally chair these meetings. The
meetings will be attended by the Employer or his Representative who must be given sufficient
advance notice.
C. The Contractor shall provide record progress photographs taken as and when directed by the
Engineer and in any case at intervals of not more than one month. The photographs shall be
sufficient in number and location to record the exact progress of the Works. Two copies of each
not less than postcard size shall be provided plus additional copies on request. The Contractor
shall supply approved albums to accommodate the photographs, which shall become the
property of the Engineer.
46. Progress Photographs

The Contractor shall provide to the Engineer each month six photographs showing work in progress on
the Site from viewpoints selected by the Engineer's Representative. Two copies of each photograph
(postcard size) shall be provided with a description of the view pointed and the date of the taking written
or stamped in ink on the back.
47. Monthly Valuations

The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer at the end of each calendar month, or as otherwise agreed,
an approximate valuation of the total work done with all items set out in full, in accordance with Clause 60
of the Conditions of Contract.
48. Completion Certificates

The Contractor shall not be granted a Completion Certificate or Partial Completion Certificate until such
time as he has obtained approval in writing from the service authorities for the applicable portion of the

installation. Duplicate copies of the approvals issued by the various Authorities should be passed to the
Engineer for his records.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 015000
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
1. USE AND PROTECTION OF SITE PLOT

A. The Contractor shall take such measures and exercise such care to protect the Site Plot as shown on
the Site Plans (hereinafter called 'The Plot') during the course of the works as directed by and to the
entire satisfaction of the Engineer.
B. The Contractor shall be deemed to have included in his price for all working around existing services.
C. The Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of all existing services within the site and shall
make good for any damage to existing services resulting from his carrying out the Works to the
satisfaction of the Engineer and the relevant authority. The Contractor shall take all measures
reasonably required by any public authority for the support and protection of all main power and
communication cables and other networks affected by the Works, all to the satisfaction of the relevant
authority.
D. The Contractor shall be responsible for giving notice to the relevant authority where temporary or
permanent re-routing of existing services is found to be necessary and shall provide attendance upon
any contractor employed to carry out such re-routing. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to
make due allowance in his program of Works for concurrent working by others for the diversions of
existing services.
E. All damages to any cable, pipe duct, building, etc. or changes which may be claimed for loss of
electricity, water, etc. by reason of or owing to any excavating operations, excavations, subsidence or
work before or after filling or any other case shall be the responsibility of the Contractor who shall be
liable for all costs and charges in connection with the necessary remedial work or other actions and
claims.
F. The Contractor shall, at all reasonable times, during the progress of the Works afford facilities to all
accredited agents of any Public Authority for access to their affected apparatus to facilitate
inspections, maintenance, renewal, removal or alteration of such networks in connection with the
construction of the works or any other purpose whatsoever.
G. The cost of locating or verifying the location of existing services, liaison with the various authorities
and complying with the above requirements shall be borne by the Contractor unless provided for
elsewhere in the Contract.
H. The Contractor shall confine his apparatus, the storage of materials and the operations of his
workmen to the limits indicated by law, ordinances, permits or directions of the Engineer and shall not
unreasonably encumber the premises with his materials.
2. DIVERSION OF TRAFFIC AND TEMPORARY ROADS

The Contractor shall construct temporary diversion ways wherever the construction of the works will
interrupt existing public or private roads or rights of way.
3. SANITARY CONVENIENCES
A. Sanitary conveniences for the use of persons employed on the Works shall be provided and
maintained by the Contractor to the extent and in such manner and at such places shall be approved
by the Engineer and the authority concerned and all persons connected with the Works shall be
obliged to use them.
B. The Contractor shall make all temporary arrangements for the proper discharge of sewage, drainage,
storm and rainwater from or in connection with the works and shall maintain same to the satisfaction
of the Engineer and the authority concerned for as long as they are required.
C. Under no circumstances will the Contractor’s workmen be permitted to use sanitary fittings installed in
the buildings under erection or those in any existing buildings.

4. SITE OFFICE FOR CONTRACTOR

The Contractor shall provide and maintain an office on the Site for accommodation of his Agent and site
staff and such office shall be open at all reasonable hours to receive instructions, notices or other
communications and shall provide adequate first-aid facilities and the erection of site latrines, their
maintenance, and demolition and deodorizing on completion.
5. OFFICE FACILITIES FOR THE ENGINEER

A. The Contractor shall provide sound, waterproof, fireproof, and well insulated office and maintain
proper office facilities on Site complete with office furniture and equipment for the sole use of the
Engineer or Employer which include but not limited to the following:
Office: As per layout plan

2 Nos. Offices
1 Sample Room
1 Pantry
2 Toilets
Furniture: 3 Desk complete with lockable drawers and adjustable chairs
1 Drawing/laying out tables (A0)
2 Sample cupboards
2 Four drawer filing cabinets complete with suspension system
1 Conference table complete with 14 chairs
6 Visitor chairs
1 Plan chest or stick file (A0)
1 Drawing board (A0) and stool
3 Store cupboard for survey equipment
Pin-up boards and shelving to all offices
Supplies/ 2 Waste paper baskets in each room

Equipment: 1 Filing Tray
1 Stapler
2 Hole Punchers
Consumables: paper, pens, etc. as required
1 No. Seagate 1TB Backup Plus USB 3.0 Slim Portable Hard Drive
1 No. A3 size HP LaserJet Enterprise 700 Color MFP m775dn
1 No. minimum 20 MP Digital camera (Canon / Nikon / Sony)
2 Nos. Computer laptops with either of the below specifications or higher with
Microsoft Office Version 13 / 16 and latest version of AutoCAD and Primavera
software:
a) HP Omen Intel Core i7-8750HQ, 16GB, 1TB+256GB, DVDRW, 6GB
VGA -NVIDIA® GeForce® GTX 1060 Ti, 15.6"FHD,
Windows 10
b) Asus Intel Core i7 8750HQ, 16GB, 1TB+256GB SSD, DVDRW,
4GB NVIDIA GeForce GTX 1050 Ti, 15.6", Windows 10
1 No. telephone with 2 lines and 3 extensions and a fax machine to the
Engineer’s office. All installation and rental charges and the cost of telephone
calls shall be charged to the Contractor.
High speed internet wireless connection and network (100mbps or as per
Employer / Engineer’s requirement).
Site surveying instruments for the proper execution of the Works. The
instruments shall all be in proper adjustment and always kept in perfect working
order and they shall be immediately available for use by the Engineer whenever
required, together with all necessary assistance.

Covered parking bay for minimum 4 cars
Attendance: Full cleaning facilities and supply of refreshments
B. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer or his representative with cleaning attendance,
maintenance of the offices, their fixtures and fittings. In the event of failure or malfunction of any item
of equipment in the office, the Contractor shall provide a substitute item equivalent to the defective
item without undue delay for the full period. This item is required to the approval of the Engineer. The
office shall be cleared away on completion.
C. The Contractor shall provide telephone and fax with different lines and internet connection to each
office and shall pay all installation and rental charges and the cost of telephone calls and also he shall
provide all consumables, paper, pens and other basic office stationary.
D. The Contractor shall provide and keep on site surveying instruments for the proper execution of the
Works. The instruments shall all be in proper adjustment and always kept in perfect working order
and they shall be immediately available for use by the Engineer whenever required, together with all
necessary assistance.
E. As soon as the Contractor has been given instructions to proceed with the Works, he shall present to
the Engineer his layout plan of office facilities as shown in the drawings for approval and arrange for
completion by not later than one month.
6. TEMPORARY WORKS
A. The Contractor is entirely responsible for the design, construction, maintenance and removal of all
temporary works employed in carrying out the Contract. The Contractor shall submit the design and
layout of all temporary works to the Engineer for approval prior to commencement of work and the
Engineer’s approval will in no way relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for the safety of the
works, operatives, adjoining property, structures or services and compliance with appropriate
regulations and Codes of Practice. Temporary works supporting adjoining buildings, property and
public utilities and roads including temporary shifting of all existing facilities in the site working area,
shall also be submitted to the appropriate authority or agent for their approval if requested.
B. The temporary works shall be designed and constructed in such manner as to enable the permanent
structures to be built around them without detriment to their effectiveness and due allowances will be
deemed to have been made for all necessary adjustments there to enable the work to proceed.
C. Shoring, boards, struts or similar items shall not be left in position upon completion of the works
without the written consent of the Engineer.
D. All services or utilities on or adjoining the Site which are required to be maintained operational shall
be protected from movement, subsidence or damage from any cause whatsoever by adequate
temporary props, struts, shores and protective screens to the approval of the Engineer and agent of
the service or utility.
E. All temporary buildings and work areas such as site offices, workshops, stores, buildings, yards,
mess-rooms and etc. shall be constructed inside the site boundary, or on adjacent land in positions
approved by the Engineer and/or Authority. The Contractor shall confine his apparatus, the storage of
materials and the operations of his workmen to limits indicated by law, ordinances, permits or
direction of the Engineer and shall not unreasonably encumber the premises with his materials.
F. The Contractor is to allow in his rates for any temporary screens and fencing as required by the
Engineer or by the relevant authority. On completion of the Contract, the Site and any adjacent areas
affected by the building operations shall be properly cleaned of all temporary work, debris and other
rubbish and all disturbed works and ground shall be repaired to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 01600
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
1. MATERIAL QUALITY
A. The Contractor shall comply with all requirements to the latest British Standards and Local Orders
issued by Dubai Municipality from time to time pertaining to the quality of the materials.
B. Within 14 days of being awarded the Contract and before any orders are placed, the Contractor
shall submit for the approval of the Engineer, Materials Approval Schedule (MAS) which includes
list of names and addresses of manufacturers, the trademarks and type of all materials, approval
date required, etc. he proposes together with all specifications and descriptions that may be
required to use according to the Contract.
C. He shall also submit Drawing Approval Schedule (DAS) detailing the schedule of drawings for
each trade with date of approval required, etc. Samples of materials shall be provided as required
by the Engineer. The Engineer requires maximum three weeks for the approval of material/shop
drawings from the date of submission.
D. All the materials and manufactured goods are to be the best of their respective kinds and as
described in the Specifications and Bills of Quantities. If any of the manufacturers, materials, etc.
has been rejected by the Engineer, then the Contractor must propose acceptable alternatives
with technical data and detailed report to the Engineer within one week of such rejection. The
Engineer’s decision shall be final and binding on the Contractor.
E. All materials and equipment specified in the Tender Documents which are to be incorporated into
the Works must be obtained from or through a Dubai Emirate Supplier and or Manufacturer who
must be registered and licensed by the Dubai Municipality. If such specified material or
equipment is not available from the Dubai Emirate or United Arab Emirates, then any source shall
be submitted for Engineer’s approval.
F. Where a particular proprietary product, Supplier or Supplier's catalogue is referred to in the Bills
of Quantities, the material specified may be obtained from another source provided it is similar,
equal and approved by the Engineer.
2. MATERIAL SUBSTITUTION
A. If during the course of the Contract, certain materials required for use in the Works should be
unobtainable despite of the best efforts of the Contractor, then the Contractor may offer for the
approval of the Engineer for substitution of materials.
B. These substitute materials, although not complying fully with the Specifications, must
nevertheless be suitable and appropriate for use in the Works. Acceptance or refusal of such
substitute materials shall be at the sole discretion of the Engineer. In the event of acceptance of
the substitute materials, a suitable price reduction shall be made in respect of decrease in quality
or value but no price addition shall be made in respect of increase in quality or value. In event of
rejection of the substitute materials, the Contractor shall not be relieved of any of his obligations
under the Contract and shall be solely liable for any delay or loss occasioned by his failure to
provide materials as specified.
C. A price deduction shall be made in respect of decrease in quality or value but no price addition
shall be made in respect of any increase in quality or value of the accepted substitute materials.
D. If the substitute materials are not accepted the Contractor shall not be relieved of any of his
obligations under the contract and shall be solely liable for any delay or loss accessioned by his
failure to provide materials as specified.

E. For any variations, Employer and Engineer’s instructions in writing are necessary. If the variation
item found to be in Schedule of Rates, then rates will be as per Contract, otherwise rates will be
considered as per the prevailing market rates.
3. IMPORTED MATERIALS
The Contractor will be held entirely responsible for ensuring that all materials to be imported
arrived on Site in sufficient time to maintain the programme.
4. ORDERING OF MATERIALS
The Bills of Quantities shall not be used as a basis for ordering materials and the Contractor is
entirely responsible for assessing the quantities of materials to be ordered and no claim will be
entertained in respect of the quantities contained in the Bills of Quantities being approximate.
5. SAMPLES
A. The Contractor shall furnish for approval, with reasonable promptness all samples of materials
and workmanship required by the Engineer. The Engineer shall check and approve such
samples with reasonable promptness only for conformance with the design concept of the Works
and for compliance with the information given in the Tender Documents. The work shall be in
accordance with approved samples.
a. All material samples shall be delivered to the Engineer's office with all charges in connection
therewith paid by the Contractor.
b. Duplicate final approved samples, in addition to any required for the Contractor's use shall be
furnished to the Engineer, one for office use and one for the Site.
c. Samples shall be furnished so as not to delay fabrication, allowing the Engineer reasonable
time for consideration of the sample submitted.
d. Each sample shall be properly labeled with the name and quality of the material,
manufacturer's name, name of project, the Contractor's name and the date of submission, the
specification article number to which the sample refers.
B. Sample shall be obtained in accordance with the standard sampling method for that material
contained in the appropriate BS, ASTM or other relevant standards. If no method is specified,
then a sampling method shall be prepared and approved by the Engineer. All methods shall be
approved in writing prior to sampling. All sampling shall be carried out in the presence of the
Engineer or Engineer’s representative.
6. DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS

A. The Contractor must inquire and satisfy himself as to the sources of supply, the sufficiency and
the means of obtaining and transporting all materials, labour, fuel, water, electrical current for light
and power and all other items required for, or in connection with the works and must consider all
other matters and possible contingencies which will affect the execution, completion and
maintenance of the works.
B. The Contractor shall provide such labour, materials and transport as the Engineer's
Representative may require to assist him in carrying out tests and checks on materials and
workmanship and setting out and measurement of the Works.
C. All materials or manufactured items that are liable to damage shall be delivered in the original
package, containers, etc. bearing the name of the manufacturer and the brand.
D. Material or manufactured items shall be carefully loaded, transported, unloaded and stored in an
approved manner, protected from damage and exposure to weather or dampness during transit
and after delivery to the Site. Damage materials during and after fixing in position shall be
removed, repaired or replaced by and at the Contractor’s expense.

E. The contractor shall erect and maintain ample temporary and weatherproof sheds for proper
storage and protection of his own and for sub-contractor’s materials. Cement and other
perishable materials shall have floors raised 150mm off the ground. The Contractor shall clear
away at completion and repair all work disturbed.
7. MATERIAL TESTING
Laboratory testing of all materials and testing of completed works shall be carried out in
accordance to the succeeding instructions and specifications.
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 2 – SITE CONSTRUCTION
SECTION 02240
DEWATERING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.0 DESCRIPTION
All necessary permissions for dewatering and disposal of the water should be taken as necessary
from the Drainage Department of the relevant authority. The Contractor shall be responsible for
obtaining any such permission from the Municipality and shall bear all costs for the same
The work included in this Section covers the complete dewatering of the Site as required during
the excavation and construction of the building, including the provision of temporary piezometer.
2.0 DEWATERING SYSTEM(S) DESIGN

2.1 The Contractor shall design, install, maintain and operate the dewatering system and shall
submit for approval his proposed design and detailed layout for the dewatering system or
systems he intends to install. The proposed system(s) shall be designed to ensure the
following:
a. The lowering of the water table over the site to allow excavation to proceed and maintaining
the water level below the base of excavation as it proceeds (drawdown period).
b. The reduction of piezometric levels in the underlying strata sufficiently during the drawdown
stage to ensure stability of the excavation.
c. Once excavation is complete the water level in the ground must be maintained, during the
construction period, at least 1.00 metre below the deepest excavation level until the Engineer
decides dewatering may be stopped. Restoring the water level to its initial position shall be
made after the space between the face of the excavation and the basement wall is backfilled
and once the weight of the structure exceeds the hydrostatic uplift and the roof slab of the
basement is completed and formwork stripped. In any event, the decision as to when
dewatering operations shall cease or be reduced shall be exclusively that of the Engineer.
d. That "heave" of the excavation base due to upward ground water pressure does not occur.
e. The System(s) must run twenty-four (24) hours a day and the design shall include sufficient
standby pumps connected in the system(s) so as to operate automatically in case of pumps
failure.
3.0 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
Perform dewatering work in accordance with applicable rules, regulations, codes and ordinances
of local authorities, and in accordance with the requirements of the public utility Owners having
jurisdiction over the work. Obtain and pay for all necessary permits, licenses and certificates and
give all notices as required during the performance of the dewatering work.
4.0 DEWATERING EQUIPMENT AND MONITORING PIEZOMETERS
4.1 Provide and maintain complete dewatering equipment necessary for lowering and maintaining
the water table at the required levels.
4.2 Provide all necessary perimeter trenches, pipes, sumps, pumps, etc., as required for the
purpose of collecting and disposing of all excess water inflow into the bottom of excavations.
4.3 Provide and maintain minimum two (2) temporary piezometers for monitoring the water table
levels on site on a daily basis during the drawdown and construction phases. The location is to
be decided by the Engineer.

4.4 Failure of equipment or system(s) installed by the Contractor shall not entitle the Contractor to
additional payment or extra time for completion in respect of any additional measures
necessarily employed by him in order to provide and maintain dry working conditions.
5.0 SUBMITTALS
5.1 Before commencing any work under this Section submit the following for approval by the
Engineer:
a. Detailed shop drawings indicating system(s) layout, pumps, standby pumps, generators,
access, temporary piezometers, etc., and complete design criteria and calculations.
b. A dewatering programme showing commencement and completion dates for the various
stages of the dewatering works and indicating the methods and sequence of operations
involved, with full details of the necessary attendant labour to be provided on a full time
round-the-clock basis.
5.2 The Engineer's approval to the above referred submittals shall not relieve the Contractor from
his obligations and liabilities under the Contract and the Contractor shall be responsible for
selecting, operating and maintaining an efficient dewatering system(s) such as will ensure dry
working conditions through the drawdown and construction periods.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
1.0 MATERIALS
1.1 Provide suitable dewatering materials which are necessary for keeping the excavation dry.
Materials shall be as selected by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. Such approval
shall not absolve the Contractor from his responsibility to provide adequate dewatering system
in accordance with the requirements of the contract.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Install and maintain complete dewatering system(s) and temporary piezometers in accordance
with the approved shop drawing and dewatering programme.
1.2 All pumps and other equipment shall have proper safety guards and locations of all equipment
shall be properly lit and supervised at all times.
1.3 Provide and maintain easy and safe access to all pumps and valves in the dewatering
system(s).
1.4 Maintain the area between the shoring line and the structure and keep free of any oil, fuel,
rubbish, etc., arising from the operation and maintenance of the dewatering system.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 02250
SHORING AND UNDERPINNING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.0 DESCRIPTION
1.1 General
A. Provide shoring in accordance with the requirements of the Tender Documents/Municipality.
The extent of shoring work shall include, but not limited to the following:
- Shoring necessary to protect existing buildings, streets, walkways and utilities and
excavation against loss of ground or caving embankments and excessive lateral or
vertical movement.
- Maintenance of shoring.
- Extract and removing all shoring materials installed outside the property line.
- Cutting off top of shoring system where not being removed.
1.2 Type of shoring system include, but is not limited to the following:
a) Soldier 'H' piles.
b) Ground anchors.
c) Timber lagging/concrete panels.
d) Concrete encasing to piles below Excavation level.
e) Any other requirement as directed by the Engineer.
1.3 Building excavation is specified under Section "Earthwork".
2.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE

2.1 Supervision
Assign supervision of shoring work to a qualified engineer experienced in this field and
approved by the Engineer.
2.2 Regulations
Comply with local codes and ordinances of governing authorities having jurisdiction.
3.0 SUBMITTALS
3.1 Submit design drawings for the shoring system together with construction techniques and all
relevant structural design calculations to the Engineer for review and approval.
Final levels shall be as calculated by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer.
4.0 SITE CONDITIONS
4.1 Before starting work, check and verify governing dimensions and elevations. In company with
the Engineer, jointly survey condition of adjoining properties. Take photographs, as directed by
the Engineer, recording any prior settlement or cracking of structures and pavement. Prepare a
list of such damages, verified by dated photographs, and signed by the Contractor, the
Engineer and others conducting the investigation.

4.2 Survey adjacent structures, establishing exact elevations at fixed points to act as bench marks.
Clearly identify bench marks and record existing elevations. Locate datum level used to
establish bench mark elevations sufficiently distant so as not to be affected by movement
resulting from excavation operations.
4.3 During excavation under this Contract, resurvey bench marks weekly. Maintain accurate log of
surveyed elevations for comparison with original elevations. Promptly notify the Engineer if
changes in elevations occur or if cracks, sags or other damage is evident. Propose remedial
work and execute as approved by the Engineer.
5.0 EXISTING UTILITIES
5.1 Protect existing active sewer, water, gas, electricity, telephone and other utility services and
structures.
6.0 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS TO BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR
6.1 The Contractor is required to provide a complete shoring system.
6.2 The responsibility for the design of the shoring shall rest entirely with the Contractor. This work
shall be sublet to an approved specialist Sub-Contractor. Qualifications and experience
records of the Sub-Contractor's staff shall also be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
7.0 MATERIALS
7.1 General
Provide suitable shoring materials which will support loads imposed. Materials shall be as
selected by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. Such approval shall not absolve the
Contractor from his responsibility to provide adequate shoring in accordance with the
requirements of the Contract.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 General
Protect the site from caving and unacceptable soil movement and install shoring as required.
3.2 Shoring system shall be adequately anchored to resist earth and hydrostatic pressures.
3.3 Bore holes to their final levels, erect soldier or 'H' piles in the bored holes, align to true line and
level, and encase bottom portion of the piles below Excavation level with concrete. Where
shoring is to be later removed (i.e. where outside the property line) wrap the end of the 'H' piles
in a suitable approved material to facilitate their withdrawal.
3.4 The shoring within the boundaries of the property line may remain in place following the
completion of the works included in this Contract but the Contractor will be required to cut off
the top of the shoring (minimum one (1) metre below finished ground or paving level), and
make openings for service and utility connections, as and when required by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 02300
EARTHWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.0 DESCRIPTION
1.1 General
Perform earthwork in accordance with the requirement of the Tender Documents.
2.0 Nature of the Ground

2.1 Examine the Site, record of test borings, and the subsurface exploration reports to determine all
conditions under which the Work will be performed.
2.2 A Geotechnical Study has been carried out on behalf of the Employer; copy of the report is
included in the Tender Documents. This report is provided "for information only" and the Tenderer
must make his own full inquiries as to the nature of the ground and the sub-soil conditions and
take all necessary steps to deal with the soil conditions and allow for all factors in his Tender
price.
2.3 Obstructions, old construction, etc., of which no records are available, may be encountered.
Make inquiries as to the nature of the ground and sub-soil conditions and formulate conclusions
as to the extent of any such obstructions, old construction, etc. and remove all materials of any
nature to the designed sub-grades indicated or specified.
3.0 Submittals
3.1 Submit information and full details regarding the procedures proposed for excavating over the
area of the site, for the review and approval of the Engineer.
3.2 Submit shop drawings detailing temporary works relating to excavation including barriers, access,
lighting, etc.
4.0 Safety and Avoidance of Nuisance

4.1 Perform all work in such a manner as to ensure the safety of the works, the public and adjoining
sites so as to cause as little inconvenience as possible to the public and adjoining Owners, and
allow in the Tender for all necessary Precautions to that end.
4.2 Provide a temporary and strong barrier around the edge of the basement excavation as a safety
measure.
4.3 Provide proper temporary lighting and access to the basement excavation.
4.4 Keep stores and material away from the edge of the basement excavation so as to allow free
movement of labourers and staff around the excavations.
4.5 Use sturdy steel or timber stairs to climb up and down the pit. Do not use ladders.
4.6 All electrical panels and installation shall be properly protected.
5.0 Protection of Adjoining Employer’s Property

5.1 Execute earthwork and shoring activities (and Site work generally) in such a manner as to ensure
no damage shall occur to adjoining Employer's property.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
1.0 Materials
1.1 Structural Fill
a. Sound, clean, durable, granular materials free from deleterious matter and in accordance with
the following gradations:
ASTM Sieve Size Total % Passing by Weight
51 mm 100
38 mm 70-100
25 mm 55-85
19 mm 50-80
9 mm 40-70
No. 4 30-60
No. 10 20-50
No. 40 10-30
No. 200 5-15
b. Gradations in the table above represent the limits which shall determine suitability of aggregate
for use from the sources of supply.
c. Structural fill may be classified as well-graded granular soils - group 1 (non-plastic soils with a
uniformity coefficient exceeding 10).
d. Use structural fill under mat concrete slabs, sidewalks, paving, under utility pipes, and at other
soil bearing situations for fill within 300 mm measured horizontally of foundation walls, retaining
walls, edges of footings and other below-grade vertical surfaces as approved by the Engineer,
except where drainage fill is indicated or specified.
e. If sufficient structural fill material is not available from excavation under this Contract, then
additional fill, suitable for use, shall be brought to the Site from other sources. Both excavated
material from the Site for use as structural fill, and material brought to the Site for use as
structural fill, shall meet the above requirements.
1.2 Ordinary Fill

a. Ordinary fill shall be natural soil, well-graded and free from all organic, weak, compressible and
expansive materials, (such as high plastic clays) and also free of materials subject to decay or
decomposition, and shall contain no stone larger than 150 mm in maximum dimension.
b. Ordinary fill may be classified as uniformly graded material-Group 2 (non-plastic soils with a
uniformity coefficient of 10 or less).
c. Use ordinary fill for general grading and backfilling except in areas where structural or drainage
fill is required.
d. If sufficient ordinary fill material is not available from excavations under this Contract, then
additional fill, suitable for use, shall be brought to the Site from other sources. Both excavated
material from the Site for use as ordinary fill, and material brought to the Site for use as
ordinary fill, shall meet the above requirements.
1.3 Drainage Fill

a. Drainage fill shall be fine aggregate, clean, well-graded, free-draining sand, complying with
ASTM C 33.
b. Drainage fill material shall be placed where called for in the Specifications or Drawings, (e.g.
under pipe and utility trenches).

PART 3 – EXECUTION
A. EXCAVATION
General
Clear the site of trees, shrubs and other vegetation, site improvements (above and below grade) and
all disused services and obstructions to construction.
Excavate in any material (including loose sand, rock and old foundations) to the lines and elevations
as required or as recommended in the soil investigation report. Make excavations sufficiently large to
permit placing and removal of forms, installation of waterproofing, utilities and other work below grade
and for inspection thereof.
1. Unauthorized Excavation
Excavations performed below the elevations shown or specified without the Engineer's prior
written approval shall, at the Engineer's discretion and without additional cost be backfilled with
mass concrete of approved strength or with approved structural fill, unless instructed otherwise by
the Engineer.
2. Authorized Additional Excavation

In case unsuitable bearing soil is encountered at subgrade elevations shown, the Engineer may
require the removal of unsuitable soil and extension of raft foundation, blinding concrete and
slabs on grade. Payment for such authorized additional work shall be made in accordance with
the terms of the Contract Documents.
3. Excavation for Raft Foundations
a. Sub-grades
A. Excavate 250 mm below the blinding bottom level or as recommended in the soil report and fill
with structural fill (or Road base), if required. Compact the structural fill with heavy roller to
compaction as specified in the specifications. Sub-grades below blinding concrete for foundations
and subgrades below slabs on grade shall be approved by the Engineer before proceeding with
the construction. Bottoms of blinding concrete below the foundation and slabs on grade shall be
founded on firm soil or well compacted structural fill at elevations indicated on the drawings and
as approved by the Engineer. Sub-grades to receive raft / footing foundations and slabs on grade
shall be level and free of loose rock, debris and standing water prior to acceptance for placing
blinding concrete.
4. Excavation for Paved Areas and Kerbs
a. Sub-grades
Sub-grades shall be approved by the Engineer before proceeding with construction of pavements
and kerbs.
i. The top 300 mm of subgrade resulting from excavation shall be free of unsuitable material
and be equal to the following percentages of maximum density at optimum moisture when
tested in accordance with ASTM D1557:
Under paved areas and kerbs: 95%
ii. If the subgrade does not meet the above requirements after proof-rolling, compact the
subgrade by rolling with suitable compaction equipment to obtain the density specified.

5. Trench Excavations
Trenches for piping and utilities shall be not less than 400 mm and neither more than 600 mm
wider than the outside diameter of the pipe to be laid therein. Bottoms of trenches shall be
accurately graded with bell holes scooped out to provide uniform bearing and support of pipe and
utilities on undisturbed soil throughout their length, except where other means of supporting pipe
are indicated. Rock materials shall be excavated to 150 mm below pipe invert and bed backfilled
with drainage fill, well tamped in place.
B. DISPOSAL
a) The Contractor shall obtain prior written approval from the Engineer and from the appropriate
authorities having jurisdiction for the disposal of surplus excavated materials from site.
b) Material resulting from clearing and grubbing operations must not be burnt on the site. Dispose of
all such material legally off the Employer's property.
C. FILLING
1. Materials
Materials for fill and backfill shall be as here-in-before specified, obtained from the required
excavation on Site, if acceptable, or from borrow sources.
2. Utilization of Excavated Materials

Suitable excavated materials for fill and backfill as defined in Paragraph "Materials” shall be
approved by the Engineer prior to use. Material which is suitable for use as fill under exterior
slabs and pavings and for backfill shall be separated from material which is only suitable for
general grading.
3. Borrow
Provide additional material, if required, at no additional cost to the Employer. Acceptable borrow
shall consist of suitable material as here-in-before specified. Representative samples of each
type of borrow material considered suitable shall be delivered to the Engineer for approval.
4. Placing
Place fill materials in horizontal loose layers in such manner as to produce a uniform thickness of
material. Placement shall start in the deepest area and progress approximately parallel to the
finished grade. Thickness of layers after compacting shall not exceed 200 mm.
No fill material shall be placed on areas where free water is standing or on surfaces which have
not been approved by the Engineer.
5. Compaction
Compact each layer of fill with equipment to achieve the following percentages of maximum
density at optimum moisture when tested in accordance with ASTM D1557:
Location % Max. Density

Under Raft Foundations 98
Under Paved Areas and Kerbs 95
Under Slabs on Grade 95
General Grading 90
a. Do not compact soil when the moisture content varies more than 3% from the optimum moisture
content. Maintain moisture content by wetting or drying manipulation. Suspend compacting
operations when satisfactory results cannot be obtained because of rain or other unsatisfactory
conditions.

b. In lieu of drying by manipulation, hydrated lime, monohydrated lime or similar beneficial

ingredients may be used to reduce the moisture content, reduce the plasticity index or improve
workability. Apply such ingredients in a manner and quantity as recommended by the
manufacturer or as required by the Soil Testing Laboratory and approved by the Engineer.
6. Backfilling against Foundation Walls

a. After completion of foundation walls and removal of forms, clean the excavation of all rubbish and
debris before application of waterproofing and placement of backfill. Backfill as here-in-before
specified for fill operations. Maintain symmetrical backfill loading and compact each layer by
hand tampers or other suitable equipment.
b. Do not backfill against foundation or basement walls until completion of supporting floor
construction to top of backfill unless approved by the Engineer. In placing backfill, take special
care to prevent wedge action, eccentric loading or overloading of the structure by equipment used
in compacting backfill material, and to prevent damage to waterproofing on walls.
D. QUALITY CONTROL
1. Employ and pay all charges for a Soil Testing Laboratory acceptable to the Engineer, to perform
all tests and submit reports specified in this Section.
2. The Soil Testing Laboratory shall be responsible for conducting and interpreting the tests, shall
state in each whether or not the test specimens comply with all requirements of the Tender
Contract Documents and shall specifically note any deviations there from.
3. Testing of Materials
The Soil Testing Laboratory shall perform all tests herein specified and any additional tests as
may be required and submit test reports to the Engineer, including the following:
a. One optimum moisture - maximum density curve for each type of soil encountered in sub-
grades and fills under raft foundation and slabs on grade and paved areas. Determine
maximum densities in accordance with ASTM D1557.
b. Each type of borrow material shall receive:
i. Mechanical Analysis - ASTM D422/AASHTO T88.

ii. Moisture-Density Curve Determination - ASTM D424/AASHTO T91.
iii. Moisture-Density Curve Determination - ASTM D1557.
iv. Four CBR test as a measure for bearing capacity under raft foundation.
4. Testing of Sub-grade and Fill Layers
Sub-grades and fill layers shall be approved by the Soil Testing Laboratory and the Engineer before
construction of any further work thereon. Tests of sub-grades and fill layers shall be taken as follows:
a. The top 300 mm of sub-grade resulting from excavation shall have the maximum density at
optimum moisture as here-in-before specified. In fill areas, each layer of fill shall meet the
required density as here-in-before specified. Make at least one (1) field density test of the sub-
grade for every two hundred square metres (200 m 2) of raft foundation (footings), paved area or
slabs on grade, but in no case less than three (3) tests. In each compacted fill layer, make one
(1) field density test for every overlaying two hundred square metres (200 m 2) of raft foundation
(footings), paved area or slabs on grade, but in no case less than three (3) tests. Perform field
density tests in accordance with ASTM D1556 or ASTM D2167.
b. At foundation wall backfill take at least eight (8) field density tests (ASTM D1556 or ASTM D2167)
at locations and elevations as directed by the Engineer.
 Cooperate with the Soil Testing Laboratory in every respect in the performance of the required
tests.

 If, based on reports of the Soil Testing Laboratory and inspection, the sub-grade or backfills
are found to be below the specified density, the Engineer may require additional compaction
and testing and all this shall be carried out at the expense of the Contractor.
E. SOIL IMPROVEMENT
The Contractor is responsible for any soil improvement to the satisfaction of the Engineer and as per the
Soil Investigation Report.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 02360
SOIL TREATMENT
TERMITE CONTROL
1.0 SCOPE:
This section covers soil treatment for termite control below grade and at interior and exterior
foundation perimeter.
2.0 COORDINATION:
Prior to mixing or application of any chemical treatment, the Contractor shall have a meeting with
the representative of the product manufacturer and/or supplier along with his proposed applicator
for the project. Purpose of this meeting will ensure that the applicator applying the materials is
knowledgeable in mixing and application procedures as set out in these specifications. The Owner
shall be notified 48 hours prior to beginning of treatment in order to witness the mixing and
application.
3.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
Applicator's Qualifications: Work under this section shall be done by a qualified applicator,
approved by the product manufacturer's authorized representative who has a minimum of five years
documented experience.
Technical Field Service: The manufacturer and/or supplier of the chemical treatment products
shall provide the service of full-time trained employee to supervise the mixing and application of the
chemical treatment products.
4.0 SUBMITTALS:
Submit the following in accordance with the requirements set forth at the Conditions of Contract:
Data: Specifications and data covering physical properties, manufacturer’s recommended

application rate, mixing, application and safety procedures.
Test Reports: Independent testing laboratory report on the chemical to be used along with
regulatory agency approval reports shall be submitted.
pH Report: Report of soil pH test.
5.0 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:

All chemical materials shall be delivered in the original unopened packages bearing the name of the
manufacturer and the brand. Chemical materials shall be kept in a cool dry area until ready to be
used; they shall be kept off the ground and under cover.
6.0 PROJECT CONDITIONS:

Environmental Requirements: No application shall be made when the temperature is 4ºC or
below or expected to drop below 4ºC within 24 hours after application. The material shall not be
applied when heavy rains are in the forecast or where conditions may cause runoff creating an
environmental hazard.
7.0 WARRANTY:
Treatment Performance: The Contractor shall be responsible for performance of the chemical
treatment against termites for a period of twenty years after Preliminary Acceptance. The warranty
shall provide for retreatment of all treated areas, in the case of any occurrence of infestation or
reinfestation by subterranean termites within the warranty period; and shall repair damage to any
element of the structure caused by the failure of the chemical treatment.
8.0 MAINTENANCE:
Annual Inspection: The Contractor or his supplier shall inspect the facilities treated in the building,
and give a written report to the Employer.
9.0 MATERIALS: The termiticides chemical treatment material shall be from a pyrothroid compound
series with permethrin as the primary active ingredient. The material shall have duly approval from
local authority including Dubai Health Authority.
10.0 MIXES: The base chemical shall be mixed with potable water to achieve a final concentration
between 0.5 to 1.0 percent of active ingredient as recommended by the manufacturer. Final
concentration shall be determined by the soil pH test of the area to be treated.
11.0 PREPARATION:
Site Examination: A soil pH test shall be performed on the facility site prior to mixing and
application of toxic chemicals.
Prior to application, compaction and final grading shall be complete and areas shall be sufficiently
dry to absorb toxic chemicals, and ready to receive treatment.
Equipment: The Contractor shall have all equipment necessary for application on site prior to
mixing, and such equipment shall be types recommended by manufacturer of termiticide.
12.0 APPLICATION:
The application shall be as per the method prescribed by the applicator in strict accordance.
Chemical treatment shall be applied prior to construction of foundation footings, grade beams, and
on soil under floor slabs on grade at a rate indicated on the approved submittals. Soil or fill material
disturbed after treatment shall be retreated before concrete placement. Treatments shall be applied
prior to placement of a vapor barrier or waterproof membrane and at least 12 hours prior to
concrete placement. Where treated soil or fill material is not to be covered with a vapor barrier or
waterproof membrane, adequate precautions shall be taken to prevent its disturbance.
Additional treatment shall be applied to all structural penetration of utilities (e.g. plumbing drain
pipes, electrical conduits, grounding rods, and etc.,) at points of entry to the structures.
13.0 CLEANUP:
Decontamination: The Contractor shall decontaminate any chemical spills associated with
termiticides mixing and application especially in the area of potable water supply. Decontamination
shall follow the recommendation (both materially and method) of the chemical manufacturer and/or
supplier.
14.0 PROTECTION:
Areas receiving chemical treatment shall be protected with an impermeable vapor barrier,
especially when concrete pours will be delayed.
15.0 SCHEDULES:
Application Schedules: The following locations will receive termiticide treatment.

1. under slabs on grade.
2. under foundation.
3. Soil within 3 meters of building perimeter.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 02450
PILE FOUNDATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
The specification covers the technical requirements for piling work, general description of work, quality
and workmanship. In every case, work shall be carried out to the satisfaction of the Engineer in
accordance with the Technical Specifications and conform to location, lines, grades and cross sections
shown on the construction drawing or as directed by the Engineer. The specifications are not, however,
intended to cover all the minute details and the work shall be executed according to the specified
International and local applicable codes. In the absence of the International codes, work shall be
executed according to the best prevailing local Authority regulations or to the recommendations of the
relevant International Standards or to the instructions of the Engineer.
The work shall include mobilization of all necessary equipment, providing necessary engineering
supervision through qualified and technical personnel, skilled and unskilled labour, etc. as required
to carry out the complete piling work.
A Related Documents:
1) Drawings and general provisions of the Subcontract apply to this Section.
2) Review these documents for coordination with additional requirements and information that apply
to work under this Section.
B Section Includes:
1) Machine drilled shaft, including temporary casing if required.
2) Placing concrete, structural steel shapes and/or reinforcing steel.
C Related Sections:
1) Division 01 Section "General Requirements."
2) Division 01 Section "Special Procedures."
3) Division 31 Section "Excavation" for excavation to working level.
4) [Division 03 Section "Concrete"] [Division 03 Section "Cast-In-Place Concrete"] for
requirements for concrete.
5) [Division 03 Section "Concrete Reinforcement:" for requirements for reinforcing steel.]
6) Division 05 Section "Structural Steel Framing".
1.2 REFERENCES
A. General:
1. The following documents form part of the Specifications to the extent stated. Where
differences exist between codes and standards, the one affording the greatest protection
shall apply.
2. Unless otherwise noted, the referenced standard edition is the current one at the time of
commencement of the Work.
3. Refer to Division 01 Section "General Requirements" for the list of applicable regulatory
requirements.
B. American Concrete Institute:

1. ACI 301 Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings
ACI 336.3 R Design & Construction of Drilled Piers
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Division 01 Section "General Requirements."

B. Test reports, certificates, and concrete mix designs in accordance with applicable requirements
of [Division 03 Section "Concrete"] Division 03 Section "Cast-In-Place Concrete"], [Division 03
Section "Concrete Reinforcement"] and Division 05 Section "Structural Steel Framing".
A. Installer Qualifications: Installer shall have a minimum of 10 year experience in performing the
work of this Section. Submit written verification of two projects on which the installer drilled piles
of similar dimensions into bedrock in the past 5 years for review prior to Subcontract award.
B. Reference Standards: Installation of reinforcement and placement of concrete shall conform to

requirements of ACI 301 as a minimum standard.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Become familiar with site and subsurface conditions.

1. Geotechnical report is available to the Subcontractor is available in accordance with
"Instructions To Tenderers".
A. Verify that field measurements and survey benchmarks are as indicated on Drawings.
B. The following tests shall be conducted as per international standards and local authority regulation:
1. Sonic Coring Test – 10% of the total piles
2. Dynamic Load Test - 5% of the total piles
3. Static Load Test - 1% of the total piles
4. Integrity tests - 100% of the total piles
1.6 WARRANTY
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Concrete Materials and Mix: Specified in [Division 03 Section "Concrete"] Division 03 Section
"Cast-In-Place Concrete"].
B. Reinforcement: Specified in [Division 03 Section "Concrete"] [Division 03 Section "Concrete

Reinforcement:"].
C. Equipment:
1. Suitable material for temporary casing of drilled shafts shall be available on site.
2. Suitable equipment for dewatering of drilled shafts shall be available on site.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify site conditions under provisions of Division 01 Section "General Requirements.

B. Obtain "Permit to Penetrate Surfaces" from local authorities in accordance with Division 01
Section "Special Procedures".
Identify known underground, above ground, and aerial utilities. Stake and flag locations.
C. Subcontractor shall verify the location of all utilities and protect them from damage to maintain
their use. If utility lines or piping are encountered during drilling, notify the Engineer. During
drilling operations provide care to recognize presence of utilities through abnormal resistance to
drilling or foreign material pulled from the hole.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Use placement method which will not cause damage to nearby structures.
B. Protect structures near the work, from damage.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A Installation of piles shall be carried out as per pile layout drawings, installation criteria,
technical specifications and the directions of the Engineer.
B The equipment and accessories for installation of bored cast-in-situ piles shall be selected
giving due consideration to the sub soil conditions, ground water conditions and the method
of casting, etc. These shall be of standard type and shall have the approval of the Engineer.
C The capacity of the rig shall be adequate so as to reach the specified founding level.
D Provision shall be kept for chiseling within the pile bore, as specified in this specification.
Chiseling shall be carried out only with the approval of Engineer. The contractor must have the
provision of equipment/accessories which can bore in the hard rock strata if required, without any
additional cost implication to the Employer.
E The Contractor while boring the pile bores, shall constantly collect the bore spoils and
these shall be compared with the layer wise soil classifications reported in the bore-log details of
the location, reported in the soil investigation report. Should there be any variation between the
two soil classification, these shall be immediately reported to the Engineer.
F Whenever the rock strata is encountered in the pile bore, the Contractor shall immediately report
the matter to the Engineer and shall take up the work of rock chiseling or any other suitable
method only after the certification/approval of the Engineer. Since the piles are required to be
terminated in the firm/hard strata and as stipulated in the construction drawing the Contractor
shall demonstrate such founding strata and seek approval of the Engineer before terminating the
piles.
G The pile should be socketed and founded in good rock only. Whenever rock strata is
encountered at any pile bore and the level of good rock (i.e. rock strata is not highly fractured
and weathered and core recovery is not less than 80% with RQD 70%) is different than that is
given in the Geotechnical Investigation report, in that case to establish the level of good
rock, core drilling is necessary to be carried out at least up to 5m depth in rock strata
encountered by the Contractor without any additional cost implication to t h e Em pl o ye r and
no time extension will be permitted on this account.
H In order to verify the terminating depth, where rock strata is met with, the rock samples obtained
from the bore spoils of pile shall also be tested for point load strength index and these shall then
be compared/correlated to the values of uniaxial compression strength test shown in the soil
investigation report. Accordingly, the termination of piles in the socketing zone shall be done with
prior approval of the Engineer.

I CONCRETING:
a) Concreting shall not be done until the Engineer is satisfied that the bearing strata (soil/rock)
met with the termination level of pile, satisfied the installation criteria/approved founding
depth.
b) The time between the completion of boring and placing of concrete shall not exceed 6
hrs. In case the time interval exceed 6 hrs. the pile bore shall be abandoned. However, the
Engineer may allow concreting, provided the Contractor extends the pile bore by 0.5 m
beyond the proposed depth, and clean the pile bore properly. The entire cost of all
operation and materials for this extra length shall be borne by the Contractor.
c) Pile bore bottom shall be thoroughly cleaned to make it free from sludge or any foreign
matter before and after placing the reinforcement cage.
d) Proper placement of the reinforcement cage to its full length shall be ensured before
concerting.
e) Concreting operations shall not proceed if the contaminated drilling mud at the bottom of the
pile bore posses density more than 1.25 T/m3 or sand content more than 7%. The drilling
mud sample shall be collected from the bottom of pile bore. This shall be checked at
regular intervals, as decided by the Engineer thereafter.
f) Consistency of the drilling mud suspension shall be controlled throughout concreting
operations in order to keep the bore stablised as well as to prevent concrete getting
mixed up with the thicker suspension of the mud.
g) It shall be ensured that volume of concrete poured is at least equal to the theoretically
computed volume of pile shaft being cast.
h) The temporary guide casing shall be entirely withdrawn cautiously, after concreting is done
up to the required level. While withdrawing the casing concrete shall not be disturbed.
i) Tests on concrete cubes shall be carried out as specified in this section of the
Specifications.
J. CUT-OFF-LEVEL (COL)
a) Cut-off-level of piles shall be as indicated in approved construction drawings or as directed
by the Engineer-in-Charge.
b) The top of concrete in pile shall be brought above the COL to remove all laitance and weak
concrete and to ensure good concrete at COL for proper embedment into pile cap.
c) When the pile cut off level is less than 1.0 meter below the working level, concrete shall be
cast up to the piling platform level to permit overflow of concrete for visual inspection. In
case COL of pile is more than 1.0 meter below working level then concrete shall be cast to
minimum of one meter above COL.
d) In the circumstances where COL is below ground water level, the need to maintain a
pressure on the unset concrete equal to or greater than water pressure shall be observed
and accordingly length of extra concrete above COL shall be determined by the Contractor
with prior approval of Engineer.
K. SEQUENCE OF PILING
a) Each pile shall be identified with a reference number and date wise proper record of
construction shall be maintained by the Contractor.
b) The convenience of installation may be taken into account while scheduling the
sequence of piling in a group. This scheduling shall avoid piles being bored close to other
recently constructed piles.

L. BUILDING UP OF PILES
a) If any pile, already cast as per construction drawing, requires any extra casting due to any
change in cut off level or the cast pile top level is less than the specified level or for any
other reason, then the pile shall be built up by using M-20 grade of concrete with
minimum cement content
b) 500kg/cm2 or as per approved design requirement ensuring proper continuity with the existing
concrete and to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Necessary reinforcement as per design
requirement and suitable shuttering shall be provided before casting the concrete.
Surrounding soil shall also be built up to the required level by proper compaction to
ensure lateral capacity of the pile.
M. BREAKING OFF OF PILES

a) If any pile already cast requires breaking due to lowering in cut off level or for any other
reason, then the same shall be carried out, (not before seven days of casting of concrete in
the piles) without affecting the quality of existing pile such as loosening, cracking etc.
to the satisfaction of the Engineer. No extra payment shall be made on this account.
N. PREPARATION OF PILE HEAD

a) The soil surrounding the piles shall be excavated up to the bottom of the lean concrete
below the pile cap with provision for working space sufficient enough to place shuttering,
reinforcement, concreting and any other related operations.
b) The exposed part of concrete above the COL, shall be removed/chipped off and made
square at COL not before seven days of casting of pile.
c) The projected reinforcement above COL shall be properly cleaned and bent to the
required shape and level to be anchored into the pile cap as shown in the drawing.
d) The pile top shall be embedded into the pile cap by minimum 50mm or clear cover to
reinforcement, whichever is higher.
e) All loose material on the top of pile head after chipping to the desired level shall be
removed and disposed off up to a lead of 2km or as directed by the Engineer.
f) Rejection and Replacement of Defective Piles
g) The Engineer reserve the right to reject any pile which in his opinion is defective
with reference to technical specification & construction drawings on account of load
capacity, structural integrity, position, alignment, concrete quality etc. Piles that are
judged defective shall be pulled out or left in place as decided by the Engineer without
affecting the performance of adjacent piles. The Contractor shall install additional piles to
substitute the defective piles as per the directions of the Engineer at no extra cost to
the Employer.
h) During execution of pile foundation work, if the bore holes need to be abandoned
due to any reason and pile position to be shifted or realigned, other than for any design
requirement by the E m p lo ye r , fresh bore holes are to be executed at a suitable new
position, which may vary from 2D to 3D (where, D is diameter of pile) as decided by
the Engi neer / E m p l o ye r , which may demand for resizing of pile cap
including possible increase in reinforcement quantity due to resizing of pile cap. In
all such cases the abandoned bore holes are to be filled up with plain cement
concrete M15 so that no cavity remain in the bore hole of the abandoned pile. Any
extra claim whatsoever from the Contractor on account of abandoned bore hole, filling up
of abandoned bore hole with concrete and any extra cost due to resizing of pile cap
including increase in reinforcement quantity shall not be entertained by the Employer &
the same have to be borne by the Contractor.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 02780
UNIT PAVERS
PART 1 – GENERAL
A. This work shall consist of covering areas such as footpaths, parking areas, etc. with paving blocks in
accordance with the Specifications, the Drawings and the Engineer's instructions.
PART 2 – MATERIALS
A. Paving blocks shall be concrete blocks from Dubai Municipality approved suppliers, coloured where
specified, laid on a sand laying course. Their thickness shall be 6 cm on sidewalks and 8 cm on
parking areas unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or instructed by the Engineer.
B. Sand used in this work shall be obtained from approved sources and shall comply with the
requirements of BS 882 Zone 2. It shall be obtained by crushing natural limestone or shall be
washed natural Wadi Sand.
A. The paving blocks shall be laid on 50mm black sand under laid by 250mm road base compacted to
95% maximum dry density underlaid on compacted soil. On completion, all joints are to be filled with
sand.
B. The Contractor shall fix kerbstone from precast concrete in the edges and parts along with the
walkway, considering the entrance and exit of cars.
C. The paving blocks shall cover areas in road/sikka side as required by the road Department of Dubai
Municipality.
D. The paving shall be laid to slope for rainwater drainage. The space between tiles shall be filled with
white clean sand.
E. It is the Contractor's responsibility to obtain the necessary permissions from the concerned
authorities to carry out the pavement outside the plot limit.
F. The interlock tiles shall be approved before supplying and fixing.
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE
SECTION 03200
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Comply with B.S. 4449; B.S. 4461; B.S. 4482; B.S. 4483 OR ACI 301, Chapter 5, Paragraph 5.1, and
ASTM A775-81.
B. High tensile steel complying with BS standards and duly approved by Dubai Central Laboratory
(DCL).
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
1 Fixing
A. Comply with BS 8110, Section 7, Para 7.3 OR ACI standard 301, Chapter 5, Para 5.5 Reinforcement
shall be secured against displacement outside the specified limits unless specified otherwise:
a) The actual concrete cover shall be not less than the required nominal cover minus 5 mm.
b) Where reinforcement is located in relation to only one face of a member (e.g. a straight bar in a
slab) the actual concrete cover shall not be more than the required nominal cover plus:
i) 5mm on bars up to an including 12mm size

ii) 10mm on bars over 12mm up to and including 25mm size
Iii) 15mm on bars over 25mm size
A. Spacer chairs or other supports detailed on Drawings, together with such other supports as may be
necessary shall be used to maintain the reinforcement in its correct position. In a member where the
nominal cover is dimensioned to the links, spacers between the links and formwork shall be of the
same dimension as the nominal cover.
B. Non-structural connections for the positioning of reinforcement shall be made with steel wire, tying
devices or by welding. Care should be taken to ensure that the projection ends of ties or clips do not
encroach into the concrete cover.
D. The position of reinforcement shall be checked before and during concreting, particular attention
being paid to the position of top reinforcement in cantilever sections. Where there is delay in
depositing concrete after the placement of the reinforcement the Engineer may require the Contractor
to restore the reinforcement to a satisfactory condition and may require protection of same from
further corrosion.
E. Surface Condition of Reinforcement
Reinforcement shall not be surrounded by concrete unless it if free from mud, oil, paint, retarders,
loose rust, loose mill scale, grease or any other substance which may adversely affect the steel or
concrete chemically or reduce the bond. Badly rusted or pitted reinforcement will be rejected.
Mechanical brushes shall be used in cleaning steel bars.
F. All reinforcement will be properly stored under cover to avoid contact with the ground, moisture, dust
and salts and to avoid distortion once bent to shape. Improper storage will be sufficient cause for
rejection of reinforcement.
G. Laps and Joints of Reinforcement

Laps and joints shall only be made by methods specified and at the positions shown on the Drawings
or as agreed by the Engineer.

H. The splice lengths of all reinforcing bars which have to be spliced shall, unless otherwise shown on
the drawings, be in conformity with the following:
a) Deformed bars (50 diameter).
b) Fabric (175 mm minimum, but overlap measured between outermost wires of each sheet not less
than pitch of secondary reinforcement wires).
c) Spliced bars are to be securely held in position.
J. Splices to be staggered to the approval of the Engineer, and the fabric are to be securely tied layer to
layer.
K. All reinforcement shall be placed accurately in position and securely fastened in place to prevent
displacement during the placing of the concrete. Particular care shall be taken to ensure that the
protective cover to reinforcement specified on the drawings is obtained by the use of approved plastic
tipped steel chairs for lower reinforcement and chairs for upper reinforcement. All bars shall be
securely tied together at every alternative intersection, or as approved by the engineer.
L. Ends of bars which are left projecting for any period exceeding 4 weeks shall be painted with a heavy
coat of neat cement grout which shall be removed prior to continuation of concreting.
M. Concrete cover to reinforcement shall be as shown on the drawings and the allowable tolerances
shall be in accordance with BS 8110: PART 1: 1985.
N. Tie wire shall be annealed iron wire not less than No.16 gauge or approved fasteners, unless shown
otherwise on the drawings.
P. Reinforcement that has in any way been previously used shall not be reused in the work.
Q. Welding of Reinforcement
Welding on site shall be avoided if possible, but where suitable safeguards and techniques are
employed and provided that the types of steel (including high yield steel to B.S. 4449 and B.S. 4461)
have the required welding proportions, it may be undertaken. Generally, however, all welding shall
be carried out under controlled conditions in a factory or workshop. The competence of the operators
shall be demonstrated prior to and periodically during the welding operations.
R. Cutting and Bending Reinforcement
Reinforcement shall be cut and/or bent in accordance with B.S. 4466. Bends in reinforcement shall
have a substantially constant curvature. Where it is necessary to bend reinforcement projecting from
concrete, care should be taken to ensure that the radius of bend is not less than that specified in B.S.
4466. The Engineer's written approval shall be obtained before cutting or heating any reinforcement
detailed on the drawings. All reinforcement bars, shall be bent cold unless otherwise approved by the
Engineer. Where it is necessary to reshape steel previously bent, this shall only be done with the
Engineers' approval and each bar shall be inspected for signs of fracture.
S. Reinforcement (particularly grade 410/425) should not be subjected to mechanical damage or shock
loading prior to embedment. It is permissible to bend grade 250 reinforcement from concrete
provided that care is taken to ensure that the radius of bend is not less than that specified in BS 4466.
Grade 410/425 bars should not be re-bent or straightened without the Engineer's approval.
PART 3 EXECUTION AND PROTECTION
3.1 CUTTING AND BENDING
A. The Contractor shall cut reinforcement to length and bend it to the shape shown on the schedules
within the dimensional tolerances given in BS 8666. Bars shall be bent cold by the application of slow
steady pressure. Hooks or right angle bends shall be formed where called for by the schedules and to
the dimensions and tolerances specified in BS 8666. In the unlikely event of temperatures below 5°C,

in certain locations during the winter months, the rate of bending shall be reduced if necessary to
prevent fracture of the steel.
B. High tensile bars shall not be bent after placing in the works, unless shown otherwise on the drawings
or specifically approved in writing by the Engineer.
C. After bending, bars shall be securely tied together in bundles or groups and legibly labeled as set out
in BS 8666.
3.2 PLACING REINFORCEMENT
A. Place reinforcing steel, as indicated on reviewed approved placing drawings, and in accordance with
specified standards.
B. Use plain round bars as slip dowels in concrete. Paint portion of dowel intended to move within
hardened concrete with one coat of asphalt paint. When paint is dry, apply a thick even film of mineral
lubricating grease.
C. Prior to placing concrete, obtain the Engineer’s approval of reinforcing material and placement.
D. Ensure cover to reinforcement is maintained during concrete pour.
E. Protect coated portions of bars with covering during transportation and handling.
3.3 FIELD TOUCH-UP

A. Not used
3.4 CLEANING
A. All reinforcement shall be cleaned to ensure it is free of all oil, dust and deleterious material. Concrete
shall be subsequently placed within 24 hours. Cleaning shall be by wire brushing or grit or sand
blasting to the Engineer's satisfaction. If blasting is required the blasting medium shall be clean and
salt free. If at any time the Engineer is not satisfied with the result of mechanical cleaning he may
require the Contractor to adopt an alternative method.
B. Water cleaning of reinforcement to remove chloride contamination shall be carried out at the
Engineer’s discretion prior to pouring of concrete. Cleaning water shall comply with specification
03300.
3.5 FIXING
A. Reinforcement shall be securely fixed in position within a dimensional tolerance stated in clause 3.12
of this specification.
B. Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, all intersecting bars shall either be tied together with
1.6mm diameter black annealed mild steel tying wire and the ends of the wire clipped short or turned
into the body of the concrete, or shall be secured with a wire clip of a type agreed by the Engineer.
C. Spacer blocks shall be used for ensuring that the correct cover is maintained to the reinforcement.
Blocks shall be as small as practicable and of a shape agreed by the Engineer. Wires cast into the
block for tying to the reinforcement shall be1.6mm diameter annealed mild steel. Special provisions
shall be made where special finishes are required and exposed spacer blocks are not permitted.
D. Reinforcement shall be rigidly fixed so that no movement can occur during concrete placing. Any
fixings made to the formwork shall not be within the space to be occupied by the concrete being
currently placed.
3.6 SPLICES
A. No splices shall be made in the reinforcement except where shown on the Drawings or agreed by the
Engineer. Splice lengths shall be as shown on the Drawings or as otherwise directed by the Engineer.
1. Mechanical splices shall not be used unless the Engineer agrees otherwise in writing.
3.7 MESH FABRIC

A. Sheets of steel mesh fabric reinforcement shall overlap each other by at least twice the wire spacing
in the direction of the lap or as shown on the Drawings and shall be securely fastened at the ends or
edges.
3.8 WELDING
A. Reinforcement shall not be welded except where required by the Contract or agreed by the Engineer. If
welding is employed, the procedures shall be as set out in BS2640 for gas welding or BS 7123 for
metal arc welding. Full strength butt welds shall only be used for steel complying with BS 4449. If high
yield deformed bars are to be welded they shall have a carbon equivalent of the steel less than
0.51%, and a nitrogen content less than 0.007%
3.9 PROTECTION HANDLING AND STORAGE

A. The CONTRACTOR shall ensure that reinforcement left exposed in the Permanent Works shall not
suffer distortion, displacement or other damage. When it is necessary to bend protruding mild steel
reinforcement temporarily, the radius of the bend shall not be less than four times the bar diameter.
Such bends shall be carefully straightened before concrete placing continues, without leaving residual
kinks or damaging the concrete round them.
B. Reinforcement shall be stored on site in racks within a building enclosure at a minimum of 150mm
above the ground and shall be protected from wind-blown dust, sand and sea salts.
C. Reinforcement shall also be protected from the weather. Any reinforcement which has become
corroded or pitted to an extent which in the opinion of the Engineer will substantially affect its
properties or its long term durability shall be removed from site.
3.10 CONTACT BETWEEN DISSIMILAR METALS

A. Where concrete members contain galvanized or stainless steel reinforcement, or embedded items as
well as ordinary uncoated mild or high-yield steel reinforcement, then contact between dissimilar
metals shall be prevented, if necessary by inserting electrically insulating material between them.
3.11 STARTER BARS

A. Starter bars shall be protected from wind-blown dust, sand and sea salts by wrapping with approved
means.
3.12 COVER
A. The required cover specified on the Drawings is the nominal cover. Nominal cover is the design depth
of concrete cover to all steel reinforcement, including links (stirrups). The sizes of spacers and the
dimensions of all reinforcement shall be based on this nominal cover. The fixing of reinforcement and
formwork shall also be such as to maintain the nominal cover.
B. The actual concrete cover to all steel reinforcement shall not be less than the required nominal
minimum cover minus 5mm.
1. Where reinforcement is located in relation to only one face of a member (e.g. a straight bar in a
slab) the actual concrete cover shall be not more than the required nominal cover plus:
5mm on bars up to and including 12mm size.
10mm on bars over 12mm up to and including 25mm size,
15mm on bars over 25mm size.
Cover shall be maintained to all embedded fixings, conduits, etc., and at all chases and pockets.
C. Spacers, and chairs, together with such other supports as may be necessary, shall be used to
maintain the reinforcement in its correct position. In a member where the nominal cover is
dimensioned to the links, spacers between the link and the formwork shall be the same dimension as
the nominal cover.
D. The position of reinforcement shall be checked before and during concreting, particular attention
being paid to the position of top reinforcement in cantilever sections.
3.13 EMBEDDED ITEMS

A. All embedded items shown on the drawings shall be fixed in the positions shown within the specified
tolerances.
B. Where this necessitates the modification or displacement of the reinforcement the Contractor's
proposals for such work shall be approved by the Engineer.
C. Embedded items shall not be supported by welding to reinforcement.
3.14 DOWEL BARS

A. Unless specified otherwise, dowel bars shall be straight round smooth mild steel bars complying with
BS 4449. The free end shall be sawn and free from burrs or other irregularities.
B. Where shown on the Drawings, dowel bars shall be debonded with an approved debonding
compound or proprietary dowel bar sleeve. The Engineer may require the Contractor to demonstrate
the efficiency of the method of debonding by carrying out the test described below.
1. The average bond stress on debonded bars cast into concrete specimen and subjected to pull out
tests at 7 days shall not exceed 1.4MN/sq.m and the total movement of the dowel bar relative to
the concrete shall be not less than0.25mm at the stress. The concrete specimens shall be
150mm x 150mm in section and 450 mm long and made with the same mix proportions as used
in the Works. The number of tests will be at the Engineer's discretion.
C. Compressible Caps
1. Caps shall be securely fixed and shall permit free movement of one end of the bar.
D. Workmanship
1. Dowel bars shall be rigidly supported so that they are correctly aligned.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 03300

CAST-IN PLACE CONCRETE
PART I - GENERAL
Provide cast-in-place concrete in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
SCHEDULE 1 - STANDARDS
a. Except as modified by governing codes and by the Contract Documents, comply with the applicable
provisions and recommendations of the following (latest editions):
Dubai Municipality Regulations

BS 12 "Portland Cement"
BS 410 "Test Sieves"
BS 882 "Aggregates from Natural Sources"
BS 1305 "Batch Type Concrete Mixers"
BS 1881 "Methods of Testing Concrete"
BS 3148 "Tests for Water for Making Concrete"
BS 4027 "Sulphate-Resisting Portland Cement"
BS 4251 "Truck Type Concrete Mixers"
BS 4449 "Hot Rolled Steel Bars for the Reinforcement of Concrete"
BS 4466 "Bending Dimensions and Scheduling of Reinforcement for Concrete"
BS 5328 "Methods of specifying concrete, including ready-mixed Concrete"
BS 4483 "Steel Fabric for Reinforcement of Concrete"
BS 4550 "Methods of Testing Cement"
BS 5075 "Concrete Admixtures"
BS 5337 "Code of Practice for the Structural Use of Concrete for Retaining Aqueous Liquids"
ACI 211.1 "Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete"
ACI 301 "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings"
ACI 304 "Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and placing Concrete".
ACI 305 "Hot Weather Concreting".
ACI 309 "Consolidation of Concrete".
ACI 315 "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures".
ACI 347 "Recommended Practice for Concrete Forwork".
AWS D1.4 "Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel".
CRSI "Placing Reinforcing Bars".
ASTM A615 "Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement".
ASTM C31 "Methods of Making and Curing Concrete Test Speciments in the Field".
ASTM C33 "Concrete Aggregates".
ASTM C94 "Ready-Mixed Concrete".
ASTM C150 "Portland Cement".
a. This Specification Section shall govern all cast-in-place concrete work for the complete
project except where more stringent or specialized requirements are indicated. All work shall be
performed to secure for the entire project homogeneous concrete having the required strength,
surface finish, materials, durability, and weathering resistance, without planes of weakness or
other structural defects, and free of honeycombs, air pockets, voids, projections, offsets of plane
and other defacements of concrete. The Contractor will be fully responsible for any defects or
damage in the building arising from faulty materials or workmanship and the costs of remedial
measures in order to ensure that the completed work complies with the Contract Documents.
b. Base construction methodology on the construction indicated in the Contract Documents. No

alterations or substitutions of the structural systems shown on the Drawings will be permitted
unless otherwise specified.
c. Supervise and coordinate all phases of the concrete construction process and be responsible
for the complete manufacturing process for all concrete work. All methods of manufacture and

practices of handling raw materials and manufactured concrete shall be reviewed by the Engineer
prior to execution of the concrete work.
d. Only materials of known quality shall be incorporated in the work. All materials shall be
properly selected, reviewed with the Engineer before use, and maintained during shipment,
storage and use. Construction systems and techniques shall be properly selected, reviewed with
the Engineer before use, and maintained throughout the complete concrete construction phase.
Adequate spare equipment parts, additional components and repair facilities shall be available for
all tools and equipment.
e. Regardless of reviews and approvals by the Engineer, be responsible for all materials,
methods and the work, and if any work does not satisfy the Contract Documents, implement
removal, replacement or remedial work and revise procedures or materials to prevent recurrence
of unacceptable work at no additional cost to the Employer.
SCHEDULE 2 - SUBMITTALS
a. Shop Drawings
Submit detail fabrication and placement drawings for all formwork and reinforcing steel which are
correlated with forming and concrete placement techniques and requirements.
a. Reinforcing shall be detailed based on construction joint locations which shall have been shown
on shop drawings reviewed and approved by the Engineer.
b. The drawings shall be in such details as to assure that difficulties in execution of the work in the
field are minimized.
c. The drawings shall consist of sections, plans and details clearly showing locations, sizes and
spacing of all reinforcing steel, supporting bars and accessories. Include on the shop drawings,
schedules and diagrams to indicate bends, sizes and lengths of all reinforcing steel bars.
d. A separate set of shop drawings, which shows the construction joint locations, shall show all floor
openings, wall openings and edges of concrete. Floor, wall openings and sleeves for all
mechanical, plumbing and electrical work shall be coordinated with the respective trades and
shown on these shop drawings in accordance with the criteria indicated on the Contract
Drawings and contained in the various applicable Sections of the Specification.
e. No work shall be fabricated until all shop drawings have been reviewed and approved by the
Engineer (with corrections and resubmittals as required by the Contract Documents). After
review and approval by the Engineer, furnish all copies needed for fabrication and erection, and
for use of other trades.
f. Be fully responsible for furnishings and installing all materials called for or required by the
Contract Documents even though these materials may have been omitted from the reviewed
shop drawings.
g. Submit shop drawings for all formwork showing locations of joints, tie bolts, cones, dummy cones,
openings, chamfers, inserts, fittings and accessories for the approval of the Engineer before
fabrication of formwork.
h. Submit design calculations in accordance with ACI Standard 301, Chapter 4, Para 4.2, wherever
required for the supporting system of the formwork along with the shop drawings for the
supporting system, for approval of the Engineer.
ii. Samples
a. Provide cut lengths of reinforcing as requested by the Engineer for testing or evaluation by the
Laboratory as required by the Engineer. The Contractor shall not fabricate any reinforcing bars
prior to the approval of the Engineer.

b. Provide samples of all materials and concrete accessories of every type proposed for use
including component parts of prefabricated formwork systems and manufacturer's technical
literature relating thereto. Prepare mock-ups and carry out such tests on the proposed
prefabricated formwork systems as may be required by the Engineer in order that he may be
satisfied as to the system's suitability.
c. Furnish reinforcement and accessories for sample panels and mocked-up

portions of the structure as required using all materials and techniques as they will be used in
actual construction.
iii. Mill Tests

Furnish the Engineer with certified mill test reports for cement, steel reinforcement and welded wire
fabric.
iv. Certifications for Admixtures

As specified under admixtures.
v. Test Reports
Submit preliminary test results for the Engineer's approval at least three weeks prior to the beginning of
the work. In addition to the test reports specified under "Quality Control", submit the following directly to
the Engineer:
a. Preliminary Design Mix Reports (BS 8110 Section 6)
b. Aggregate Soundness Test Reports (ASTM C88)
c. Aggregate Staining Test Reports (ASTM C641)
d. Air Entrainment Test Reports (ASTM C260)
1.3 PRODUCT HANDLING

- Comply with BS 8110, Section 6.
1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

- Hot Weather Concreting
- Refer to Clause 1.02 "STANDARDS".
1.5 QUALITY CONTROL

Sampling, curing and testing shall be performed using the relevant procedures in BS1881-108,
BS1881-111, BS1881-116 and BS5328-4:
1) Samples for production concrete cubes shall be taken at the point of placement at the
average rate of one per 25 cu.m. of concrete placed, with a minimum of one sample taken
every day that the mix is used. A sample shall consist of four 150mmx150mm x 150mm
cubes molded and stored for laboratory-cured rest specimens except when field-cured test
specimens are required. One cube is for testing at 7 days after casting, two for testing at 28
days after casting, and one reserved for later testing if required.
2) If frequency of testing provides fewer than 5 strength tests for a given class concrete, conduct
testing from at least 5 randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than 5 are used.
3) When total quantity of a given class of concrete is less than 25 cu.m. the Engineer may waive
strength testing of adequate evidence of satisfactory strength is provided.
4) When strength of filed-cured cubes is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured
cubes, evaluate current operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and
curing the in-place concrete.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.0 MATERIALS
2.1 Manufacturers
The products and manufacturers specified herein after are specified for the purpose of establishing
minimum quality standards. Products equal in quality to, or better than those specified, will be considered
acceptable. The decision of acceptability will rest with the Engineer.
2.2 Cement
The cement shall be complying the Ground Granular Blastfurnace Slag (GGBS) or fly ash
requirement of Dubai Municipality under DM Circular No. 202:2014 and the Contractor shall obtain
DCL approval.
a. Sulphate Resisting Cement to BS 4027 or an ASTM Type II cement shall be used to substructure
concrete in accordance with recommendation in Soil Investigation Report and to local authority
regulations.
b. Alkali Content for All Types of Cement

Maximum 0.6% equivalent of Sodium Oxide (Na2O) (ASTM C227)
c. Ordinary Portland Cement to superstructure concrete.

B.S.12 or ASTM C150, Type I non-standing.
d. Cement shall originate from sources and manufacturers acceptable to the Engineer and shall be
delivered in sealed bags. Only one brand of cement shall be used for each type of cement. When
received at the batch plant, all bags shall be intact and cement shall be completely dry. Cement
exposed to moisture or wetting of any kind during shipment or storage shall not be used on the
job.
e. Stale cement or cement with cakes or lumps shall not be used.
f. All cement stored on site shall be kept thoroughly dry and shall be stored in water tight sheds on
a floor raised at least 200mm above ground. Cement stacks shall have labels indicating dates of
manufacture and arrival at the storage site. A maximum of fifteen bags shall be stacked if the
storage period is not more than four weeks and eight bags if the storage period is over four
weeks but not more than three months. Any cement stored for more than three months shall not
be used without the explicit written permission of the Engineer.
g. When tests performed on field samples, subsequent to the original approval tests, show that the
cement does not comply with the Specifications, the entire consignment from which the sample
was taken shall be rejected. Rejected cement shall not be permitted in storage areas or on the
Site and shall be removed within twenty four hours.
h. Cement shall be protected from direct exposure to sun. Cement temperature shall not exceed 50º
C.
i. All Type V Cement shall have tri-calcium aluminate content not exceeding five percent (5%).
2.3 Aggregate
A. In general, aggregate shall comply with B.S. 882, Concrete Aggregates from Natural Sources" or
ASTM C33, and shall be graded in accordance with these requirements, irrespective of whether
concrete is mixed on site or elsewhere. The Contractor shall nominate the source of supply and shall
provide grading curves of aggregate for approval.

B. Aggregate shall consist of fine sand or stone aggregates and crushed stone, crushed rock or gravel.
Separate stockpiles of fine aggregate and each size of coarse aggregate gradation shall be used.
Each aggregate type shall be from a single consistent source.
C. Storage piles of aggregates shall be placed on concrete hardstand which has good drainage.
Stockpiles shall have walls separating adjacent materials and shall be covered to preclude
segregation or instruction of foreign materials and to preserve the gradation. Sufficient storage shall
be maintained to assure placement of concrete at the necessary rate. Use properly constructed
sheds to protect aggregates from direct sun radiation and from blowing sands.
D. Aggregates shall be hard, durable, clean and free from adherent coating and dust and when directed
by the Engineer, shall be washed and sieved to remove deleterious substances.
E. Aggregates shall not contain harmful materials, such as salts, iron pyrites, coal, mica, shale or
similar particles which may reduce the strength or durability of the concrete. Aggregates shall not
contain any material that may be chemically active with reinforcement or that may react to cause
efflorescence or that may be alkali reactive.
F. Alkali reactive limestone aggregates such as "Dolomitic" shall not be used.
G. The grading of each size of aggregate from each pit, quarry or other sources of supply shall be
determined at least once weekly. The results of such tests shall be reported to the Engineer and
shall be used to check whether the gradings are similar to those of the samples used in the
establishment of batch weight used.
H. Supplier's certificate shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval of the source of aggregate.
I. Aggregate for exposed unpainted concrete shall be specially selected for colour as approved by the
Engineer and shall come from a single source.
J. All aggregates shall be screened and washed and shall have less than the following maximum salt
contents as acid soluble chlorides and sulphates. The table also shows the maximum salt content
allowed in the mixed concrete. Aggregates for coloured concrete must be approved by the Engineer
prior to use.
Chlorides Sulphate
Percent of weight of fine aggregate 0.06 0.4

Percent of weight of course aggregate 0.03 0.4
Total percent in concrete as percent by weight of cement0.1 (OPC) 0.2 (SRPC) 4.0
K. Fine aggregates shall consist of natural sand or crushed gravel sand and shall comply with BS 882
"Concrete Aggregates from Natural Sources" having hard and durable particles or other inert
materials having similar characteristics conforming to the following requirements:
a) Fineness Modulus: 2.4 to 3.0 ASTM C125
b) Fineness modulus shall not vary more than 0.20 from value used in establishing mix proportions.
If greater deviation, the use of such aggregates shall be discontinued until suitable adjustments in
mix proportions can be made and reviewed.
c) Magnesium Sulfate Soundness: Max. 5% loss, ASTM C88, 5 cycles
d) Potential Reactivity: Not reactive C289.
e) Content of Clay Lumps: Max. 1% by weight ASTM C142
f) Gradation requirements as follows:
Size of Sieve Opening Percentage by Weight

(Square openings) (Passing-ASTM C33, C117)
3/8 inch (9.5 mm) 100

No. 4 (4.75 mm) 95-100
No. 8 (2.36 mm) 80-100
No. 16 (1.18 mm) 50-85

No. 30 (0.60 mm) 25-60

No. 50 (0.30 mm) 15-30
No. 100 (0.15 mm) 3-10
No. 200 (0.075 mm) 0-5
Other gradations not meeting the above requirements may be permitted upon submission of
relevant data and review by the Engineer.
g) Fine aggregates shall be free of organic materials (ASTM C40) and other foreign matter.
L. Coarse aggregates for concrete shall consist of crushed gravel or crushed stone. The crushing shall
be regulated so that the material retained on the No.8 (2.36 mm) sieve, at least 90 percent by weight
shall consist of pieces with at least one fractured face and at least 75 percent by weight shall consist
of material with at least two fractured faces. In addition, the coarse aggregates shall meet the
following requirements:
a) Magnesium Sulfate Soundness: Max. 5% loss, ASTM C88, 5 cycles.

b) Potential Reactivity: Not Reactive ASTM C289.
c) Abrasion: Max. 10% loss ASTM C131, 100 C131, 100 revolutions.
d) Flat and Elongated Particles: 3:1 max. ASTM C125 5:1 max. 10%.
e) Content of Clay Lumps: Max. 0.5% by weight ASTM C142.
f) Shale: Max. 2% by weight.
g) Bulk Saturated Surface Dry Specific Gravity: Min. 2.58 ASTM C125.
a) Gradation requirements:
Other gradations not meeting the above requirements may be permitted upon submission of
relevant data and review by the Engineer.
b) The maximum size of aggregates shall be 1 inch (25.4 mm) for columns, walls and basement
slabs, and 3/4 inch (19.0mm) for slabs and beams. In addition, the maximum aggregate size
shall not exceed 20 percent of the narrowest member that is being concreted, nor shall it exceed
75 percent of the clear spacing between adjacent steel reinforcement or between reinforcement
and adjacent formwork.
2.4. Water
a. Water for washing aggregates and for mixing of concrete shall be clean, fresh and free of harmful
matter such as oil, salts, acids, alkali, sewage, deleterious minerals or organic matter. Water shall
be filtered to remove any colour or residues present due to contamination from water piping or
transportation or storage methods.
b. Water shall comply with the requirements of BS 5328.
c. Water shall be tested in accordance with BS 3148.
2.5. Admixtures
A. Suitable admixtures of the following approved types may be incorporated in the concrete only with
the prior written approval of the Engineer.
a) Water reducing set retarders.

b) Set retarders.
c) Water reducing agents.
d) Air entraining admixtures for lightweight concrete.
B. The Engineer shall be advised in advance of the following data:-
a) The typical dosage and detrimental effects of under-dosage and over-dosage.

b) Chemical name(s) of the main active ingredient(s) in the admixture.

c) Whether or not the admixture leads to the entrainment of air when used at manufacturer's
recommended dosage.
d) Admixtures containing chlorides in excess of 0.03% by mass of the cement, nitrates, calcium
chloride, sulphides and sulphates shall not be used.
e) Admixtures submitted for Engineer's approval shall be certified in writing by the manufacturer
to be in compliance with B.S. 5075 OR ASTM C494.
f) Air entraining admixtures for lightweight concrete shall comply with ASTM C260 or BS 5075:
PART (2).
g) The type of admixture selected in accordance with the above mentioned standards must be to
the approval of the Engineer. All admixtures must be mutually compatible.
h) Admixture used in the work shall be obtained from reliable manufacturers whose products
have previously been used successfully in UAE or on other international projects in countries
having similar climate to UAE.
i) Admixtures shall be used in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and
recommendations and shall be certified by the manufacturer to be suitable for use during hot
weather extremes. Admixtures shall be stored safe from adverse temperatures in accordance
with manufacturer's printed instructions or recommendations.
j) The suitability and effectiveness of any admixture approved by the Engineer, shall be verified
by trial mixes with the cements, aggregates and other materials to be used in the works before
final approval is given.
k) Not withstanding what has been stated above, the Contractor must allow in his Tender for
testing the type of admixture he proposes to use.
l) Admixtures where approved may be added only by using the manufacturer's recommended
dispensers-no adding of admixture by hand is allowed.
m) The entire amount of materials used for concrete shall have controlled sources of individual
components such that the total mix meets the requirements of the Contract Documents.
Unless specified otherwise, the total Chloride (C1) ion content in the entire mix shall not
exceed 0.20 percent of the weight of cement when SRPC is used and 0.1 percent when OPC
is used. The total water-soluble Sulfate (SO3) content in the entire mix shall not exceed 4
percent of the weight of cement in the mix. The total Calcium Chloride (Ca Cl2) content in the
total mix shall not exceed 0.01 percent of the weight of cement.
n) The total alkali content of the concrete mix of Na2O equivalent shall not exceed 3 Kg/m3. All
sources of alkali shall be taken into account for calculating the total alkali content. In particular
the contribution of Sodium Chloride whether from aggregate or from mixing water must be
included.
2.6 Reinforcement
A. Bar reinforcement shall be deformed bars complying with BS 4449 type 2 deformation having a
characteristic strength (fy) not less than 4600 Kg/cm2 (460 N/mm2).
B. Mesh reinforcement shall conform to B.S. 4483 OR to ASTM A185.

C. No welding of reinforcement should be carried out without the Engineer's approval.
D. Bundle and tag reinforcement with suitable identification to facilitate sorting, transporting, storing and
placing at the Site.
E. All reinforcement bars shall be cut and bent to shape as per the approved bar bending schedule. All
bars shall be tagged showing the corresponding bar number as shown on the relevant Bar Bending
Schedule.
2.7. Bar Supports

A. Spacer blocks with cast in tie wire may be used with written agreement of the Engineer for support of
the bottom layer of reinforcing in the raft foundation slab only. The blocks shall be of minimum size
and made from cement sand small aggregate mix to match surrounding concrete strength,
appearance and durability.
B. Other support devices and spacers shall be of such materials and of adequate strength and approved
design as to be durable and so as prevent displacement and corrosion of reinforcing steel and
prevent discoloration and spalling of concrete cover. The type of spacers acceptable shall be one of
the following:
a) High density plastic.
b) Hot-dipped galvanized bar supports with plastic feet.
c) Stainless steel.
C. Individual and continuous slab bolsters and chairs shall be of a type to suit the various conditions
encountered and must be capable of supporting a 140 Kg (1.37 KN) concentrated load without
measurable permanent deformation of the reinforcement or indentation of the supporting surface.
2.8. Testing of Reinforcement Steel
A. Tests will be required by the Engineer on steel reinforcement and they shall be carried out in strict
accordance with the provisions of the above British Standards.
B. Tensile tests providing information on elastic limit, ultimate strength, and stress-strain curve will be
required from each delivery of reinforcement and measurements will also be required of cross
sections area and deformation/bond characteristics of deformed bars
C. The Contractor is to allow for four tensile and four bond tests, at his own cost, for each size of bar to
be used in the concrete construction.
D. One set of test results for each bar size shall be submitted to the Engineer three (3) weeks before
concrete work commences on Site. Remaining tests will be carried out at the discretion of the
Engineer.
E. Further tests may be called for when the source of supply of reinforcement changes in which case
the cost of such extra testing will be borne by the Contractor. When any test results do not conform
to the above standard the reinforcement steel shall be removed from the Site and the cost of
subsequent testing and any remedial work shall be borne by the Contractor.
2.9. Vapour Barrier
Polyethylene sheeting minimum 0.25 mm thick of approved manufacturer tested in accordance with
ASTM E96 and E154.
2.10. Curing Materials
A. Liquid Membrane Compound
AASHTO M148 OR ASTM C309, Type 1-D with fugitive dye 2; formulated to disintegrate after 28 days,
and guaranteed not to affect the bond of applied finishes. Methods for determining the efficiency of
curing compounds shall be in accordance with ASTM C156.
B. Polyethylene Film: ASTM C171, 0.10mm thick, opaque black.
C. Water B.S. 5328 and B.S. 3148.
D. Notwithstanding what has been stated above, the Contractor must allow in his Tender for testing the
type curing compound he proposes to use.
2.11 Moist Cure, Hardener and Sealer

A. Hardeners

B. Sealers
2.12 Waterstops
Extruded shapes formed of virgin polyvinylchloride, tensile strength 134 Kg/cm2, minimum elongation
200%. The type and size of the waterstop shall be suitable to its particular application as recommended
by the manufacturer and be subject to the approval of the Engineer. Use prefabricated joints.
2.13 Sealants
Refer to "Sealants" for joint sealants.
2.14 Formwork
A. For unexposed surfaces and rough work, use Exterior Type Douglas Fir, Grade B-B (concrete form)
plywood, conforming to NBS ps-1, minimum 19 mm thick. Before reusing forms, withdraw nails and
thoroughly clean surfaces to be in contact with concrete.
B. For exposed surfaces not otherwise specified use special exterior Type Douglas Fir, Grade A-B plywood,
conforming to NBS ps-1 minimum 19 mm thick OR high density (60-60) overlay plyform, Class 1 EXT-
DFPA, sanded grade having a hard semi-opaque resin-fibre overlay on both sides, minimum 19mm thick
and constructed so that finished concrete will be straight, smooth, dense, free from honeycombs, bulges,
or depressions. Keep joints between plywood sections to a minimum and make tight and strongly backed
so that adjoining edges remain flush and true. Unsightly joint marks will not be permitted. Cover joints on
exposed surfaces with smooth-faced fibre reinforced tape.
C. Location of joints must be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
D. Prefabricated formwork systems may be used for all classes of concrete provided the manufacturer's
printed instructions and recommendations are followed and the system has been approved by the
Engineer. Joints between sections of prefabricated forms shall be taped unless otherwise recommended
by the manufacturer and provided always, in the case of such recommendation, the forms are water and
mortar-tight to the Engineer's satisfaction.
2.15 Form Coating
B.P. CCM3 (British Petroleum) OR B.P. CM3 ® (British Petroleum) OR Calform (Caltex) OR Form wax of
a type which does not impart any stain to concrete nor interfere with the adhesion of any finish, sealant,
waterproofing material applied to any concrete surface and must be approved by the Engineer.
2.16 Form Ties
For securing forms where surfaces will be exposed in the finished work, use tie screws with removable
plastic cones, removable bolts, special removable ties, tie wires or Series 300 stainless steel snap ties.
For all other forms, either bolts or wires may be used. Use ties of such type that when forms are
removed, no metal is closer than 40 mm from the finished concrete surface.
2.17 Grout
A. Non-Metallic
Refer to Manufacturers and vendors’ list.
3. MIXES
3.1 Proportioning of Concrete
A. Concrete Mix Design to comply with the latest D.M. Circular for Green Concrete in terms of the W/C
ratio and the combination of the GGBS, fly ash and cement, etc. and obtain D.C.L. approval.

B. Comply with ACI Standard 211.1, OR BS 8110-85, Section 6, Para 6.2.4. Assume full responsibility
for the strength, consistency, water/cement ratio, and handling of concrete. Cement, fine aggregate
and the various sizes of coarse aggregate shall be measured by weight.
C. Water/Cement Ratio
Comply with BS 8100-85, Section 6, Para 6.2.4, OR ACI 301, Chapter 3, Para 3.8, Method 1 or 2.
The water/cement ratio of a batch of concrete shall not exceed the specified maximum value by
more than 5% of that value. If a maximum water/cement ratio has been determined the ability to
comply with that requirement at a suitable level of workability, shall be determined by trial mixes.
Maximum water/cement ratio may be judged from workability tests and approved by the Engineer.
D. Cement Content
The cement content of any batch of concrete shall not be less than the specified minimum value
minus 5% of that value, nor more than the specified maximum value plue 5% of that value. The
cement content may be determined from samples representative of any batch of concrete provided
suitable test is used to measure the cement content of fresh concrete to accuracy +/-5% of the actual
value with a confidence of 95% and approved by the Engineer. Table 6.1 of BS 8110: Part 1: 1985
gives the minimum cement required when using a particular size of aggregate in a Portland cement
concrete, to provide acceptable durability under appropriate conditions of exposure. The reduced
minimum cement contents shall only be used when trial mixes have verified that concrete with a
maximum free water/cement ratio not greater than that given for a particular condition can be
consistently produced and it is suitable for the conditions of placing and compacting. The Engineer
shall determine the degree of exposure to be adopted for mix design.
E. Requirements for Fresh Concrete
Workability of concrete shall be such that the concrete is suitable for the conditions and placing so
that after compaction it surrounds all reinforcement and completely fills the formwork. Workability
shall be assessed by means of the slump test or compacting factor test. An acceptable value for the
mean slump for each concrete mix shall be agreed with the Engineer and a value 65 mm can be
taken as a guide. Following are the limits of workability of concrete for these tests:
Slump +/- 25mm or CF +/- .03 where required value is 0.9 or more.
+/- .04 where the required value is less than 0.9 but more than 0.8.
+/- .05 where required value is 0.8 or less.
The amount of water shall be measured by volume or by weight. The batch weights of aggregates
shall be adjusted to allow for moisture content typical of the aggregate being used. The accuracy of
the measuring equipment shall be within +/- 3% of the quantity of cement, water or total aggregates
being measured and within +/- 5% of the quantity of any admixture being used. All measuring
equipment shall be maintained in a clean, serviceable condition. The mixer shall comply with the
requirements of B.S. 1305 or B.S 4251 where applicable. The mixing time shall be not less than that
used by the manufacturer in assessing the mixer performance.
F. Adjustment to Mix Proportions
During production adjustments of mix proportions will be made in order to minimize the variability of
strength and to approach more closely the target mean strength as approved by the Engineer. Such
adjustments are regarded as part of the proper control of production by the specified limits of
minimum cement content and maximum water/cement ratio shall be maintained. Such adjustments
to mix proportions shall not be taken to imply any change to the current margin.
3.2 Classes of Concrete

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Characteristic Cube Type and Use Grade Strength (28 Days)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
20 N/mm2 BLINDING CONCRETE

70 N/mm2 COLUMNS, CORE WALLS & RC WALLS
50 N/mm2 RAFT, RETAINING WALL & WT WALL
55 N/mm2 ALL OTHER CONCRETE STRUCTURES
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
When a sudden change in weather conditions occurs or is imminent during continuous casting
operations such as will, in the Engineer's opinion, affect the quality of the concrete, the specified
characteristic cube strength for cast-in-place reinforced concrete shall be increased by 50 Kg/cm 2.
Concrete blinding below raft shall be 100mm thick.
4. FORMWORK
4.1 General
A. The responsibility for the safety and adequacy of the whole of the formwork shall rest entirely with
the Contractor. Coordinate the work of all other trades affecting or affected by work of this
Section.
B. Except when they are varied by the requirements of these Specifications, the requirements of the
British Standard Specification and/or Codes of Practice shall form a binding part of these
Specifications.
C. Give 24 hours minimum notice to the Engineer as to when formwork will be ready for inspection
and allow sufficient time for inspection and adjustment.
D. Any work showing signs of damage through premature loading shall be demolished and
reconstructed at the Contractor's expense.
4.2 Workmanship
A. Reference shall be made to BS 5975 and appendix "C" of the Concrete Society Technical Report
No. 13, 'Formwork and the CIRIA Data Sheet' "Concrete pressure on Formwork".
B. Except for few areas having suspended false ceiling within the project, most of the structure is
either exposed or receiving applied finish. Therefore, tolerances specified under this part are
more stringent than those specified in ACI 301.
C. Provide structural cambers as specified on drawings. Unless otherwise specified for spans
greater than 6M provide L/600 mm camber. The shuttering for suspended slabs of more than 6m
span shall be generally laid to an upward camber of L/1000 mm span plus the specified structural
camber.
D. All formwork shall be constructed plumb, true, water and mortar tight, sufficiently rigid and strong
to prevent sagging between supports and to maintain true position and shape during and after
placing of concrete without bowing and distortion.
E. Exceptional care shall be taken to minimize fins, ridges, offsets, leaking of fins and other defects.
F. Only workmen experienced in formwork shall be used for this work.
G.Supports shall be designed to withstand the worst combination of self-weight and other loads
including formwork, reinforcement, wet concrete, construction and wind loads together with all
incidental dynamic effects caused by placing vibrating and compacting of concrete.
H. Deflection
The maximum permissible deflection under all loads shall not exceed 2 mm or 1/600 of the free
span, whichever is less.

J. Forms for beams and girders shall be designed to permit removal of at least one side without
shock to the partially set concrete and without disturbing the bottom portion of the forms or its
supports.
K. Prefabricated formwork shall be used in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions
and approved shop drawings.
L. Provide 15 x 15 mm wrought hardwood fillet or other suitable material in the angles of the
formwork as shown on drawings or as required by the Engineer to provide chamfers in columns
beams and walls. All shuttering works shall be done with 18mm black marine plywood of good
quality.
M. Anchor bolts, plates, sleeves, pipes, inserts, fixtures, electrical boxes, reinforcing steel, duct
openings, conduits, etc. shall be installed as per Drawings. Ample time shall be allowed for the
proper installation of such items. All steel items (other than reinforcement embedded in concrete
shall be hot-dipped galvanized.
N. Form Cleaning
All forms shall be thoroughly cleaned before placement of concrete and suitable temporary
openings provided to permit removal of undesirable materials from the interior without disturbing
the whole formwork. All surfaces in contact with concrete shall be wetted or treated with an
approved form releasing agent before placing of reinforcement. All formwork shall be thoroughly
cleaned of any old concrete or any other deposit before re-use.
P. Ensure that during concreting, formwork and supports are inspected by experienced workmen
and that any portion which shows signs of sagging or displacement is straightened.
Q. All formwork shall be inspected and approved by the Engineer. This approval, however does not
relieve the Contractor of any of his liabilities and responsibilities under the Contract.
R. Notwithstanding what has been stated above, the Contractor must allow in his Tender for testing
the type of form releasing agent he proposes to use.
4.3 STRIKING OF FORMWORK

A. Comply with BS 8110:85, Section 6, Para. 6.9.3 OR ACI 301, Chapter 4, Para. 4.5.
B. Do not remove forms or supports until the concrete has thoroughly hardened and has attained
sufficient strength to support its own weight and construction live loads to be placed thereon,
without damage to the structure. In general, do not disturb forms or supports until the concrete
has attained at least 40% of design strength for side forms and 80% of design strength for bottom
forms. Be responsible for proper form removal and replace any work damaged due to inadequate
maintenance or improper or premature form removal.
C. The following shall be the minimum periods before striking formwork, unless otherwise directed
by the Engineer, at normal temperatures:
A. Vertical formwork to columns, walls and large beams - 24 Hours

B. Beam sides - 24 Hours
C. Beam soffits formwork - 15 Days
D. Props to beams - 21 Days
E. Soffit formwork to slab - 15 Days
F. Props to slab - 21 Days
D. The removal time may be decreased with the Engineer's approval where surface temperature of
concrete is 16 deg C and above; refer to Table 6.6, Section 6 of BS 8110, and Part 1:1985.

E. Care shall be exercised in form removal to prevent chipping of corners and other damage.
Experienced foremen shall supervise form removal.
F. Removal of bottom form linings between props prior to the removal of supports may be permitted
provided the formwork has been designed to allow such removal without disturbing the supports.
G. No new permanent structure shall be erected on any part of the already erected structure while
the latter is still supported by formwork unless walls are built above another wall carried on a
properly supported base. This requirement does not prohibit the use of props to take the load of
more than one level of framing.
4.4 TOLERANCES
4.4.1 Comply with B.S. 5606 OR ACI Standard 117-81, Part 5, unless noted otherwise.
A. Plumb (allowable variation).

a) In the lines and surfaces of columns, piers, walls, and in arises:
In any 3m 3mm
Maximum for the total height of the structure 15mm
b) For exposed corner columns, control-joint grooves and other conspicuous lines:
In any 6m 3mm
Maximum for the total height of the structure 7.5mm
B. Exposed slab soffits, beam soffits and in arises, measured before removal of supporting
shores:
In any 3m +/- 3mm
In any bay or in any 9.6m +/- 5mm
Maximum for the total of the structure +/- 10mm
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 4 - MASONRY
SECTION 04800
MASONRY ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
All masonry walls shall comply the Dubai Civil Defense fire rating requirements.
1.1 Scope
A. Concrete Masonry Units

B. Reinforcement, Anchorage and Accessories
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
1. PRECAST CONCRETE BLOCKS
The precast concrete blocks are to comply with the requirements of BS 2028, 1364 and with the
following requirements.
2. CEMENTS
A. All cements are to be of British manufacture or approved alternatives and to comply with current
British Standards or other standards as authorized by the Engineer.
B. Special cements shall not be used unless authorized in writing by the Engineer and then only to
his special instructions and strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
C. All cement which has become damages or has deteriorated is to be removed from the site within
24 hours.
D. Aggregate shall be natural aggregate complying with BS 882.
E. Load bearing blocks shall have the following minimum compressive strengths:
2 2
Hollow blocks 7 N/mm (1000 Ibs/in )
2 2
Solid blocks 10.5 N/mm (1500 Ibs/in )
F. Water shall be well water containing not more than 4750 parts per million dissolved solids (of
which not more than 1000 parts per million may be Chlorides) or any vegetable matter, acids,
excessive sulphates or other salts.
G. Additive will not be permitted.
3. MORTARS
A. The cement for mortar shall be as specified for precast concrete blocks.
B. The lime for mortar shall be hydrated semi-hydraulic lime complying with BS 890 Part 2.
C. Fine aggregates shall comply with BS 882 or BS 1200 as required by the Table of Mortar
Classes. Fine aggregates, when tested in accordance with Clause 32 of BS 812 shall achieve
the criteria given in the Note to this clause.
D. The water for mortar shall be as specified under Section 030000 - "Concrete Work".

E. Mortar for load bearing walls shall be a mix measured by volume of 1 part cement, 1 part lime
and 6 parts fine aggregate.
F. Mortar for walls in foundations shall be a mix measured by volume of 1 part cement and 3 parts
fine aggregate using sulphate resisting cement.
G. Plasticisers shall not be used in mortar for load-bearing walls.
H. Mortars for non-load bearing walls shall be a mix measured by volume of 1 part cement, 3 parts
lime and 12 part fine aggregate.
4. SOLID BLOCKS
150mm thick to shoring wall and 200mm thick solid block wall to periphery of water tank and pump
room concrete structures.
5. THERMALLY INSULATED BLOCKS
All block works for external walls shall be 25cm thick of thermally insulated blocks as per local Dubai
Municipality requirements. Otherwise, as indicated in the drawings.
6. CAVITY WALLS
The block work skins of cavity walls shall be tied together with galvanized mild steel butterfly pattern
wall ties to BS 1243 Fig. 2 spaced at the rate of one every 800 mm. vertically, staggered, and every
400 mm. vertically at ends, jambs and quoins.
7. PROTECTION OF CAVITIES
A. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for his approval a method for protecting the cavities
of hollow blocks and cavities of cavity walls against mortar droppings and concrete falling into
these cavities while casting floor slabs and edge beams.
B. The layers of felt between the underside of the concrete edge beam and top of the wall is for the
purpose of separation of these members and they are not designed for protection against
concrete falling into cavities.
8. LOAD-BEARING WALLS
A. Load-bearing walls shall be constructed in accordance with BSCP 111 Part 2.
B. Where a horizontal or vertical joint is not solidly filled or where it is found that the Contractor has
used blocks other than the blocks specified, the whole panel of wall will be considered suspect
and will be removed and rebuilt at the Contractor's expense.
9. NON LOAD-BEARING WALLS
Non load-bearing walls shall not be constructed at the same time as the load-bearing walls but built at
least two weeks after the roof structure is completed. Toothing into load-bearing walls will not be
permitted.
10. SPECIAL BLOCKS

Special blocks for forming feature panels in boundary walls, courtyard walls, etc. shall be to the
details shown on the Engineer's Drawings. Claustra perforated pattern to be approved by the
Engineer. They shall be made in purpose made steel moulds with face finished fair to receive a paint
finish without plastering.

11. FAIR FACED WALLS
External and internal walls where described as "fair face" shall be built with blocks having
unblemished surfaces, with good clean arises to all exposed edges and shall be pointed with a neat
flush joint as the word proceeds.
12. PROTECTION OF FINISHED WALL
A. The Contractor shall ensure that the finished walling is not damaged by subsequent operations.
The Contractor is to protect newly or partially built walling against it being dried out too rapidly by
the sun's heat or from any other adverse climatic effects and is to follow the Engineer's
instructions in this matter.
B. The Contractor shall in all cases cover all newly erected walling with hessian or other materials
approved by the Engineer and shall keep the same wet for at least three days.
13. COMPRESSIBLE JOINT FILLERS
A. "Flexcell" compressible joint filler shall be used where specified at joints on drawings or requested
by the Engineer. The joint filler shall be specified cell 150mm or above.
B. Filler shall be cut to exact widths and shall have all edges neatly trimmed.
C. Fixing of filler shall be strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions.
14. POLYSULPHIDE SEALANT
A. Gun quality sealant shall be used where specified on the drawings or where requested by the
Engineer, including external joinery and metalwork bedded against blockwork or concrete. The
colour shall be submitted to the approval of the Engineer.
B. The primer shall be supplied by the same manufacturer as the sealant. The joints will first be
thoroughly cleaned to the satisfaction of the Engineer and shall be primed before sealing with
sealant.
C. Application of these materials shall be strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's printed
instructions.
15. DAMP PROOF COURSES
Damp-proof courses to walls of 150mm above grade slab shall consist of one layer of tropical
quality bitumen damp-proof courses with fibre base complying with BS 743 Table 1 Ref. B and
weighing not less than 3.3 kg/m 2. The damp-proof course shall be well lapped at intersections and
joints and bedded in cement mortar (1:3).
16. FELT
Two layers of bitumen 3 ply felt with hessian base complying with BS 743 Table 1, Type A and
weighing not less than 3.8 kg/m2 shall be laid on the top of all load-bearing walls supporting a
concrete edge beam. Felt shall be laid carefully over an even bed of mortar well lapped at
intersections and joints. Beams bearing upon the wall and cast upon the felt shall not be cast until
all mortar is hard.
17. STABILITY OF PARTITIONS
The following stabilizing of partitions shall be carried out by the Contractor for partition heights
exceeding 3.0 meters. This provision shall be included for all partitions other than block work.

16.1 Provide steel angle cleats to be fixed at head at 1.5 meters centers (mild steel angles to be
protected against corrosion). When this type of fixing is utilized a partition started in any
one day shall be completed the same evening.
16.2 For a partition taken between or passing in front of a reinforced concrete column provide
two round steel bars laid in the bedding mortar at 1.0 meter centers and fixed to column
using threaded bars locked into cast in "Spit Rock" dowels.
16.3 Provide rebates, toothing and the like at all vertical intersection of walling every meter of
height.
18. REINFORCEMENT
Prefabricated lintels shall comply with the requirements of BS 5977 Part 2. All lintels shall be
bedded on cement and sand mortar and the Contractor shall allow for a minimum bearing at each
end of 200 mm.
1. MIXING OF MORTAR
All mortar shall be properly mixed upon a clean platform and shall be used as mixed. No mortar
which has been allowed to set prior to use shall be remixed or used in the work.
2. LAYING OF BLOCKS
a) All blockwork shall be laid in stretcher bond solidly bedded, jointed and flushed up in mortar. No
cut, damaged or half blocks are to be used.
b) Columns and beam support to block walls shall be referred to drawing S-008.
c) All blocks are to be thoroughly wetted before laying. All walls are to be carried up evenly course
by course. During block laying an open joint not less than 12 mm. wide shall be left between the
ends of all concrete lintels whether precast of cast in-situ, and the blocks adjacent to those ends.
These open joints shall be left as long as possible during construction and not filled in until
plastering or other work renders such filling necessary. All such joints shall be properly filled in
before the completion of the work. A piece of bituminous felt shall be laid on the block work
under the concrete lintel bearing.
d) All wall faces to receive in-situ finishing or cement and sand backings shall be hacked and the
joints raked out as necessary to produce an adequate key.
e) All external and internal wall faces where specified as fair face shall be built with blocks having
unblemished surfaces, with good clean arises to all exposed edges and shall be pointed with a
neat flush joint as the work proceeds.
f) Curing shall take place for blocks and other works.
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 5 – METALS
SECTION 05050
BASIC METAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.0 REFERENCES
The Conditions of Contract governing the whole of the Contract will to be deemed to apply to all
Works within this Section.
The Contractor is responsible for the complete and proper installation of the work indicated on the
Drawings or as specified herein.
The standard and quality of the work shall be to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
2.0 STANDARDS
The specifications of materials used shall comply with the British Standards Institute, the British
Codes of Practice, DIN Standards, American Standards and American Society for Testing and
Materials, or UAE Codes and Codes whichever are the more stringent.
Applicable provision of the following British Standard Institute publications shall apply to works of
this Section as follows:
2.1 Mild Steel
Mild steel shall comply with BS 4360, sections generally shall comply with BS 4 Part 1, hollow
sections with BS 4848 Part 2 and angles with BS 4848 Part 4. Steel plate and sheet shall comply
with BS 1449 Part 1 and tubes to BS 1775.
2.2 Stainless Steel Tubes
Stainless steel tubes shall comply with BS 3014 and stainless steel plate with BS 1449 Part 2.
2.3 Aluminum Alloy Extruded Sections

Bars and round tubes shall comply with BS 1161 or BS 1474 and aluminum alloy drawn tube with
BS 1471. Anodizing process when applicable to comply with BS 3987.
2.4 Brasswork
Brasswork as indicated on the Drawings shall comply with the various appropriate standards.
2.5 Fastenings
Unless otherwise specified shall be on the same metal as the item being fixed with matching
coating or finish. Wood screws shall comply with BS 1210, bolts, screws and nuts to BS 4190,
machine screws and nuts to BS 4138 and self-tapping screws to BS 4174.
2.6 Plugs
Proprietary fibre or plastics or other approved type.
2.7 Bitumen Solution

Bitumen solution for cold application shall comply with BS 3416 Type 1.

3.0 WORKMANSHIP
3.1 Co-ordinate and provide details of the work as necessary to ensure co-ordination with related
building elements and services. Liaise as necessary to help ensure co-ordination of the work with
related building elements and services, provide fabrication / installation drawings and other
information requested, submit sufficient copies of drawings, etc. for approval. Make any
necessary amendments in accordance with any comments of the Engineer and without delay and
resubmit unless it is confirmed that this is not necessary and submit sufficient copies of final
version of drawings, etc. for distribution to al affected parties.
3.2 Drawings must be submitted at least 4 weeks before starting fabrication, showing elevations,
plans and full size sections, proposed methods of fixing, proposed methods of forming joints, any
proposals for fabricating large components in more than one piece.
3.3 Control Sample: After finalization of all details, prepare control samples as requested and obtain
approval of appearance before proceeding with manufacture.
3.4 Fabricate metalwork carefully and accurately to ensure compliance with design and performance
requirements, using types and grades of metal appropriate for the purpose. Finished work must
be free from distortion and cracks. Use proprietary products to manufacturer's recommendations.
3.5 Pre-finished metal may be used if the finish complies with this specification, the methods of
fabrication do not damage or alter appearance at finish and the finish is adequately protected
during fabrication.
3.6 Cold formed work, use brake presses or cold rolling to produce accurate profiles with straight
arises. Unless specified otherwise, mitre junctions of identical section. Remove all burrs and
sharp arises which would be visible after fixing or a hazard to the user. After thermal cutting
stainless steel grind off material which is liable to corrode.
3.7 Moving parts, when assembled all moving parts must move freely and without binding.
3.8 Bonding prepares surfaces of metals to receive adhesives by decreasingly and abrading
mechanically or chemically and form bond under pressure. Use adhesives in accordance with
manufacturer's written recommendations.
3.9 Mechanical joints shall be tight with no visible gaps. Where screw heads will be visible after
component is fixed, or raised crew heads would interfere with any moving part of components,
use countersunk machine screws unless specified otherwise. Mechanical joints of components
which will be located externally shall be bedded in bedding compound, including all mating
surfaces, cleats and other fixings.
3.10 Site dimensions must be taken before manufacture.

3.11 Welding and Brazing
Thoroughly clean surfaces to be welded and ensure accurate fit using clamps and jigs where
practicable. Use tack welds only for temporary attachment unless specified otherwise. Make
joints with parent and filler metal fully bonded throughout with no inclusions, holes, porosity or
cracks. Completely remove all traces of flux residue and slag. Prevent weld spatter falling of
surfaces of materials which will be self-finished and visible in complete work. Butt welds which
will be visible in completed works shall be finished smooth, flush with adjacent surfaces.
3.12 Metal arc welding shall be to BS 5135 or other methods subject to approval. Welding of stainless
steel shall be TIG welding to BS 3019 Part 2, or other methods subject to approval. Use double
level butt welds, backing bards to remove heat, jigging, tack welds and any other measures
necessary to minimize distortion. Remove slight distortion by light hammering, taking care not to
damage surface finish. Welding of aluminum alloys shall be TIG welding to BS 3019 Part 1, or
TIG welding to BD 3571 Part 1, or gas welding to BS 1126, or other methods subject to approval.

Welding of copper alloys shall be fusion welding to BS 1077 for copper, or other methods subject
to approval.
3.13 Apply metal coatings after fabrication is complete and all fixing holes have been drilled unless
otherwise specified. Before applying coating remove all welding slag, weld spatter, anti-spatter
compounds, paints, grease, flux, rust, burrs and sharp arises and make good all defects which
would show after application of coating and finish surfaces smooth.
3.14 Galvanizing shall comply with BS 729, sheradising to BS 4921, zinc spraying of iron and steel
surfaces shall comply with BS 2596 Part 1 and vitreous enameling of steel surfaces with BS
3830. Anodizing of aluminum alloys shall be as specified hereinafter. Obtain certification from
the anodizer that the specification grade has been applied and submit copy to the Engineer.
Surfaces of stainless steel, bronze and brass which will be visible in the completed work shall be
finely polished.
3.15 Protection: Prevent distortion of metalwork during transit, handling storage and fixing and
damage to arises, projecting features, and surfaces which will be exposed in the finished work,
prevent contact with mud, ashes, plaster and cement and provide protective coverings as
necessary and remove on completion. Before fixing apply two coats of bitumen solution, or
mastic impregnated tape, to surfaces of components which will be in contact with cement or
plaster based materials.
3.16 Position metal work accurately, plumb, level and true to line. Fix securely to prevent pulling
away, deflection, or other movement during use. Do not distort when tightening fastenings and
the like.
3.17 Loading: Do not use railings or balustrades as strutting or supports after fixing. Do not weld,
braze or solder on site without approval.
3.18 Fastenings shall be concealed where practicable. Thickness of metal and details of assembly
and supports shall give ample strength and stiffness. Joints exposed to weather shall be formed
to exclude water. Do all cutting, punching, drilling, and tapping required for attachment of
hardware and of work by other trades.
3.19 General metal work shall conform to all Local Authority Bye-Laws, and in lieu of other specific
legal requirements, shall support any live loads which may normally be imposed plus a safety
factor of 2.5. In addition, stairs, gratings, platforms, etc. shall be designed to safely support a
design live load of 100 lbs/ft2.
4.0 SAMPLES
4.1 Submit duplicate samples of all finished materials for approval of the Engineer. The sample will
show the full range of finishes and mechanical properties to be expected in the finished product.
Where physical samples would otherwise be too large, example will be given that can be readily
inspected locally, or the Contractor will provide facilities for the Engineer's inspection at the
Contractor's expense.
4.2 Unless specifically called for, size and form of each sample be as directed by the Engineer.
5.0 INSPECTION AND TESTING

5.1 The Contractor shall provide certified test results from independent testing laboratories for all
materials of the Section.
5.2 Where manufacturer or Supplier of specified items is unable to provide the above mentioned test
results, the Contractor shall make available samples to the Engineer prior to their approval for
use of the project so that he can have them tested to verify compliance with the Specification. Al
samples and tests will be at the Contractor's expense.

6.0 STORAGE AND PROTECTION

6.1 All materials will be stored in protected areas on site and will be fully protected against the effect
of weather.
6.2 All materials shall be carefully handled and stored under cover in manner to prevent deformation
and damage to the materials and to shop finishes, and to prevent rusting and the accumulation of
mud, dirt, or other foreign matter on the metal work. All such damage and accumulation shall be
corrected prior to erection.
7.0 MANUFACTURER'S GUARANTEE

7.1 The Contractor shall furnish to the Employer a written unconditional Manufacturer's Guarantee for
all work on this section against faulty materials or workmanship for a period of ten (10) years from
the date of issue of the Final Certificate.
7.2 The Guarantee shall state that any fault in workmanship or materials which may develop within
the guarantee period shall be made good or replaced and reinstalled promptly, including the
making good or replacement and reinstallation of adjacent work disturbed, without additional cost
to the Employer.
7.3 This Guarantee shall be in addition to and not in lieu of other obligations of the Contractor under
the Contract.
7.4 The text of the guarantee shall be subject to Engineer's approval and will be submitted prior to the
approval of shop drawings or samples of specific items intended for incorporation into the works.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERALLY
a) All materials shall be new stock, free from defects, impairing strength, durability or appearance
and of best commercial quality for each intended purpose.
b) Provide all anchors, bolts, sleeves, spigots and other parts required for securing each item of
work of this section to the construction, including furnishing to concrete workers all required
inserts and sleeves for use in concrete and furnishing to masons of all anchors, bolts, and other
items required to be built-in masonry.
c) All exposed fastenings shall be of the same material finish as the metal to which applied, unless
otherwise noted.
d) Welding rods shall confirm to British Standards and the recommendations of the metal welding
rod manufacturer.
2.2 SHOP PAINTING MATERIALS

a) Shop paint for un-galvanized ferrous surfaces shall be a high quality, lead free, rust-inhibitive
primer, equal in quality and performance to products specified for this use under Painting Section,
as approved by the Engineer.
b) Shop paint for galvanized metal shall be high quality, zinc rich, metal primer especially formulated
for use on galvanized metal, equal in quality and performance to products specified for this use
under Painting Section, as approved by the Engineer.
c) Shop paint for aluminum shall be Dichromate based primer.
2.3 SHOP COATINGS FOR FERROUS AND GALVANIZED SURFACES

A. Galvanizing
a) All ferrous metal under this section for exterior use in addition to any other interior items
specifically so specified shall be hot dip galvanized, including all bolts, nuts, washers and other
related ferrous metal items used therewith.

b) Hot-dip galvanizing process shall comply with BS 729 as applicable. After galvanizing, processed
items shall be straightened free of all warpage and distortion caused by hot dip process.
c) Galvanized surfaces to receive paint coatings shall be given hot phosphate (bonderizing) shop
pre-treatment.
d) Furnish to the Engineer a certified statement that galvanizing and hot-phosphate pre-treatments
comply fully with this Specification.
B. Shop Painting
a) All materials (plain and galvanized) including non-ferrous where specified for paint finish under
this Section shall be given a shop coat of primer as specified, using the appropriate primers
specified previously in this Section.
b) Immediately before painting, remove all rust, loose mill scale, dirt, weld flux, weld spatter and
other foreign material with wire brushes or steel scrapers. Remove all grease and oil by use of
detergent or solvent recommended by paint manufacturer. Sandpaper exposed surfaces as
required to produce smooth, even finishes. Allow surfaces to thoroughly dry before applying
paint.
c) Apply paint by spray process in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions to dry
film thickness recommended. Apply thoroughly and evenly and work well into corners and joints
taking care to avoid sags and runs.
d) Do not paint surfaces to be embedded in concrete or to be welded in the field.
e) After erection, sand smooth and retouch all prisons of the shop coats chipped or damaged during
erection, and coat all field welds and connections with the same paint used for all the shop coat.
f) All aluminum surfaces in contact with cement or concrete surfaces are to be given two coats of
bitumen before being fitted.
A. INSTALLATION
a) Work shall be erected square, plumb and true, accurately fitted, and with tight joints and
intersections. All anchors, inserts and other members to be set in concrete or masonry shall be
furnished loose by this trade to be built into concrete and masonry by those trades as the work
progresses. Later cutting and drilling shall be avoided wherever possible.
b) All metal work shall be rigidly braced and secured to surrounding construction, and shall be free
of rattle, vibration, waviness and noticeable deflection after installed.
c) Where members, other than expansion bolts or inserts, are fastened into concrete, set in carefully
for pipe sleeves in proprietary expanding grout, manufactured specifically for such purpose and
used strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's directions. Holes to receive grouted members
shall be formed with galvanized sheet metal sleeves to provide a uniformly wide, approximately
half inch (13 mm.) from finish surface and fill void with Portland cement grout to match colour and
texture of surrounding concrete surface, slightly beveled to shed moisture.
d) Carefully review all drawings and provide all miscellaneous metal items required by all the various
trades, but not specifically listed above, such as clips, angles, bracketing, steel framing at
suspended ceilings, steel framing to receive marble supports, and all other anchor devices as
indicated on the drawings or reasonably implied as being necessary for the through completion of
the work.
e) The section of work shall include the following in accordance to the drawings and all shop
drawings shall obtain approval from the Engineer prior to manufacture:
i. Stair

Handrails and guardrails of 60x60mm Aluminum Handrail and 75x75mm Aluminum

Baluster in powder coated finish with 10mm thick tempered glass baluster.
ii. Balcony
50x50mm Aluminum top rail in powder coated finish with 10mm thick tempered glass
railing.
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 6 – WOOD AND PLASTICS
SECTION 06200
FINISH CARPENTRY
1.0 GENERAL
All woodworks shall be carried out in accordance with the Drawings and the principles of first class joinery
construction. Unless specifically stated otherwise, sizes shown on Drawings and stated in the Bills of
Quantities are finished sizes and the Contractor must allow for wrot faces.
2.0 TIMBER
a) All softwood for carpentry and joinery work shall be well seasoned, sound, free from shakes,
large loose or dead knots, waney edges, wrap, incipient decay, stained sapwood or other defects
and shall be to the approval of the Engineer and in accordance with BS 1186 Part I.
b) Timber for carpentry work shall be carefully sawn square and shall hold the full dimensions
shown on the Drawings.
c) The hardwood for joinery work shall be to the approval of the Engineer well-seasoned, close
grained and free from all defects. Hardwood for polishing or clear treatment shall be selected and
kept clean.
d) Any preservative treatment shall be approved by the Engineer.
e) Timber for joinery work shall be finished wrought to the exact sizes shown on the Drawings with
pencil rounded exposed arises and no joinery shall be built in until inspected and approved by the
Engineer.
f) The whole of hardwood joinery shall be rubbed down to a smooth surface and left clean and
ready to receive the specified finish. Where screw fixings would show on the surface of
hardwood, the heads shall be countersunk 6 mm. below timber surface and grain matched pellets
not less than 6 mm. thick and tapered and cut from matching timber shall be glued in and finished
off flush with the face. This will apply equally to hardwood which is to be painted.
3.0 MOISTURE CONTENT OF TIMBER
a) The softwood generally shall have a moisture content limit of 12%.
b) The hardwood shall have a moisture content limit of 10% and shall have been skin dried.
c) The whole of the timber for joinery work shall be properly stacked and protected from rain and
ground moisture.
4.0 PLYWOOD
a. The plywood shall be external WBP quality resin bonded equal to BS 1455.
b. Plywood face veneers shall comply with BS 1455, Grade 1.
c. Plywood adhesives shall comply with BS 1203, Grade 1.
5.0 BLOCKBOARD
Blockboard shall be external WBP quality resin bonded equal to BS 3444.

6.0 TIMBER FACE VENEERS

All timber face veneers (Walnut wood) that are exposed shall be selected to the approval of the Engineer
and shall be hard durable and capable of being finished easily to a smooth surface. They shall be free
from knots, worm and beetle holes, splits, glue stains, filling or inlaying of any kind, or defects.
Specimens of each type of face veneer shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
7.0 DECORATIVE LAMINATED PLASTIC SHEET
Decorative laminated plastic sheet (in Walnut wood texture) shall comply with BS 3794, Class 1, 1.55
mm. thick, obtained from an approved manufacturer.
8.0 ADHESIVES
Adhesives for:
a) Exterior use shall be synthetic resin type complying with BS 1204, Part 1, Type WBP.
b) Interior use shall be synthetic resin type complying with BS 1204, Part 1, Type MR.
9.0 PLUGS, NAILS AND SCREWS
a) Proprietary plugs shall be approved by the Engineer.

b) Steel nails shall comply with BS 1202, Part 1.
c) Wood screws for joinery shall be brass complying with BS 1210 with slotted countersunk
heads.
d) Screw cups shall be brass complying with BS 1494, Part 2.
10.0 FIXING AND JOINTING
a) Joinery work shall be carefully assembled and properly jointed in accordance with best practice;
all joints shall be glued and screwed or doweled. Any screws appearing on facework shall
have the heads let in and be pellated. Softwood fixings shall be stout brass screws.
b) Where joinery is required to be put together and fixed with brass cups and screws, the cups for
fixing hardwood joinery shall be cast brass cups with milled edges and shall be neatly let in to
finish flush with the face of the work.
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 7 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
SECTION 07100
WATERPROOFING AND INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 REGULATIONS AND BASIC STANDARDS
A. Materials shall have the characteristics specified by current international regulations and shall
meet the conditions specified by current standards of the local authorities.
B. Acceptable Standards of reference are as follows:
1. BS 8102, 1990 Code of Practice: Protection of Structures against Water from the Ground.
2. UAETC (European Union for Technical Agreement in Construction):
a. Special Directives for the assessment of SBS Elastomer Bitumen, MOAT 31 August, 84.
b. UAETC, c/o BBA, P.O. Box 195, Bucknalls Lane, Watford, WD2 7NG, UK.
3. ASTM (American Society for Testing and Materials).
4. ASTM Standards: Volume 04.04 – Roofing, Waterproofing and Bituminous Materials.
C. Material shall be of the best quality and to the approval of the Engineer all in accordance with the
relevant British Standards and Agreement Board Certificates.
D. Workmanship shall be to the highest standards and codes of practice.
1.2 TESTING
A. The Contractor is to test, to the satisfaction of the Engineer, all areas of roofing, waterproofing,
terraces, bathrooms and the like for water penetration. These tests are to be carried out after the
membrane has been laid.
B. The Contractor is to allow in his rate for such areas to be flooded with water, and left for a
minimum of 48 hours.
C. On completion of roofing works the Contractor is to leave the roof in a sound and watertight
condition, to the approval of the Engineer.
1.3 GUARANTEE
The Contractor is to provide the Employer with a written guarantee to cover improper materials or
faulty workmanship for 25 years for the roof waterproofing and at least ten years for the other
waterproofed areas commencing on the date of issue of the Certificate of Completion of the
maintenance period and the Contractor is to bear the cost of any of the consequential damage as
is provided for in same guarantee.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
ROOF WATERPROOFING
1. Roof waterproofing shall be in accordance to the international standards and to the local authority
requirements.

2. External roof surfaces shall comply the Green Building Regulation having the thermal
transmittance (U value) of the roof shall not exceed 0.045 Btu/hr-ft2-ºF (0.2555W/m2-ºC) as per
green regulation.
3. Roofing System Covering to residential building: “Combo-Roof Waterproofing System” or

otherwise as shown in the drawings. Manufacturer: Refer to manufacturers’ List.
a) Polyfoam (Spray applied polyurethane foam)- 45 to 50 kg/m3, thickness as per U value

c) Polytex RBE (Brush applied liquid elastomeric UV protection coating)- 600 microns in 1
coat
d) Polyfab (120 gsm - Filter membrane)
e) Polyboard (Impregnated filler board)
f) Screed Concrete (Recommended fall 1:150)- 45mm minimum thick, 80mm average
thickness
g) Polyseal 1 PU (Polyurethane sealant)
h) Combo-CRC (Cementitious acrylic top coat having SRI ≥ 78)- 1000 microns in 2 coats
ii. WET AREAS

Manufacturer: Refer to Vendors’ List
Waterproofing of wet areas like kitchens, toilets, baths, balcony and OTS with 300mm skirting
shall be done with a single component liquid applied water based hybrid polyurethane coating.
The coating shall be applied in a minimum of two coats and shall have total Dry Film Thickness
1.4mm. All corners shall be reinforced with a suitable reinforcement fabric as recommended by
the manufacturer/supplier of the coating. The waterproofing material shall comply with the
following technical specification:
Parameter Value Test Standard

Color White/grey -
Density >1.2 g/cc ASTM D1475
Tensile strength >2 N/mm² ASTM D 412
Elongation >500% ASTM D 412
Shore A hardness 50-60 ASTM D 2240
Crack bridging ability >1mm ASTM C 836
Hydrostatic water pressure 2 bar BS 12390
VOC Content <50g/l ASTM D 3960
C. Auxiliary Materials
a) Damp proof course shall be applied to external block walls 150mm above grade slab to
prevent moisture from passing through the walls into interior spaces.
b) Apply waterproofing to the raft, retaining wall and to all concrete structures exposed to water
to Section 07135 below.
c) Apply bituminous damp proofing on the entire area to concrete substructures in accordance
to Section 07115 below.
d) 1000 gauge polythene sheet as covering of water proofing and as protection to blind concrete
of ground floor slab, ramps and steps in contact with soil.
e) PVC waterstop welded to membrane (or equivalent) to create compartmentalization.
f) 4mm thick GRP lining to interior wall of water tank and holding tank

PART 3 - EXECUTION
1.0 PREPARATION OF SURFACES

All surfaces shall be clear of all deleterious matter and dry all in accordance with the
manufacturer's written instructions. Prior to the application of any waterproofing / roofing
materials or primer, the Contractor shall gain the Engineer's written approval that he may
commence the said works, without same all works will be rejected and replaced at the
Contractor's expense.
2.0 PROTECTION
Finished and part finished surfaces shall be suitably protected to ensure no damage by other
trades. Any roofing or water-proofing so damaged due to non-protection shall be removed and
replaced at the Contractor's expense. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer his proposed
methods of protecting the various surfaces and locations prior to their completion or application of
finishing layers, i.e., tiling and the like.
END OF SECTION

SECTION - 07115
BITUMINOUS DAMPROOFING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract and Division 1 Specifications, apply to this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Applied polyurethane bitumen emulsion (moisture curing bitumen modified polyurethane, seamless
elastomeric water proofing 1.3 mm thick.) to faces of the substructure concretes.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM D - 836 Bitumen Polyurethane.

B. National Standard of Canada 37 – 58

A. Applicator: Company specializing in bituminous waterproofing systems with 5 years minimum
experience.
1.5 PRODUCT DATA

A. Submit product data.
B. Indicate properties of primer, bitumen.
C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
D. An up-to-date copy of the manufacturer's literature shall be available on site prior to and during the
period of the application of the work of this Section.
1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Maintain ambient and surface temperatures above 5 degrees C) for 24 hours before application, and
continuously until emulsion has cured.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 DAMPPROOFING MATERIALS
A. General: Provide products recommended by manufacturer for designated application. The
manufacturer must one of those recommended in the Vendor List and approved by the Engineer.
B. Cold applied, one component elastomeric bitumen modified polyurethane.
C. Primer: Polyurethane – Masterseal HLM 5000 of Degussa or equal approved.
2.2 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Submit a written warranty signed by the manufacturer and Installer agreeing to
repair or replace dam proofing that does not meet requirements or that does not remain watertight
during the specified warranty period.
B. The Contractor is to provide the Employer with a written guarantee to cover improper materials or
faulty workmanship for minimum ten years for the other waterproofed areas commencing on the date
of issue of the Certificate of Completion of the maintenance period and the Contractor is to bear the
cost of any of the consequential damage as is provided for in same guarantee.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify surfaces are solid, free of loose particles, cracks, pits, rough projections, and foreign matter
detrimental to adhesion and application of dampproofing.
B. Do not apply dampproofing to damp, dirty, dusty, or surfaces unacceptable to the work of this
Section.
C. Verify items which penetrate surfaces to receive dampproofing are securely installed.
D. Beginning of installation means acceptance of substrate.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean and prepare surfaces to receive dampproofing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Apply materials to seal penetrations, small cracks, and honeycomb in substrate.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Prime surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Permit primer to dry.
B. Apply bitumen polyurethane with either by mop or roller.
C. Apply minimum two coats, continuous and uniform at a minimum rate of 10% above
manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Apply from 100 mm below finish grade elevation to bottom of foundation.
E. Seal watertight items projecting through dampproofing surface with an approved compatible
mastic.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. During application, protect the work of other Sections from the work of this Section.
B. On the completion of the dampproofing application, protect the work from damage by others, and
drain and water from all sources until cured. Do not permit completed application to become wet.
C. Immediately after drying, provide 3mm thick bituminous based protective board (approved by the
Engineer) on the membrane and backfill against the board to protect the membrane from
damage.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 07130
THERMOPLASTIC SHEET WATERPROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide labour, materials, equipment and services and perform operations required for
installation of pre-applied waterproofing membrane system and related work as indicated
on the drawings and specification, all in accordance with the requirements of the contract
documents.
B. Work included but not limited to all concrete surfaces on horizontal and vertical parts of
the sub-structure including pile caps.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1.2.1 Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1.2.1.1 Preparation instructions and recommendations.
1.2.1.2 Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
1.2.1.3 Installation methods.
1.2.2 Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings including details of construction and relationship with
adjacent construction.
1.2.3 Manufacturer's Certification: Submit manufacturer's certification that materials comply with
specified requirements and are suitable for intended application.
1.2.4 Warranty: Submit manufacturer's standard warranty.
1.2.5 Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size
300x300mm representing actual product, color, and patterns.
1.3.1 Installer Qualifications: Experienced in installation of specified material type with working
knowledge of specified products and Project specific application requirements.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
1.4.1 Delivery: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and
packaging, with labels clearly identifying product name and manufacturer.
1.4.2 Storage:
1.4.2.1 Store materials in clean, dry area indoors in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
1.4.2.2 Store and protect from moisture and damage.
1.5.1 Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits
recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under
environmental conditions outside manufacturer's recommended limits.
1.6 WARRANTY
1.6.1 Provide written warranty for product and installation, valid from date of completion of the
works and valid for as per manufacturer standard. The specialist applicator will be
responsible for making good any defects due to workmanship.

1.6.2 Waterproofing Warranty: Provide manufacturer’s standard warranty in which Manufacturer

agrees to replace, all or any part of the applied system which fails or becomes defective in
materials within specified warranty period.
1.6.3 Warranty does not include failure of waterproofing due to failure of substrate prepared and
treated according to requirements or formation of new joints and cracks in substrate.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.1.1 Acceptable Manufacturer: Al Gurg Fosroc or equal approved.
2.2 MATERIALS
2.2.1 Proofex Engage Pre-applied waterproofing membrane for underground basements.
1. The below-ground waterproofing system shall be a 4mm thick pre-applied polyethylene

/polypropylene blended membrane conforming to BS8102:2009 and EN13967:2004.
The membrane shall mechanically bond to freshly place concrete, remaining in place if
ground settlement occurs. It shall have a current BBA independent certificate, be both
waterproof, resistant to sea water and gas proof.
2. Technical Properties:
Water tightness to liquid water EN 1928 No evidence of Pass

Method A water penetration
@ 6 m head
Resistance to static loading EN 12730 - 15kg
method B
Tensile properties EN 12311-2 - Transverse:
(unreinforced membrane): >8.0 N/mm2 / >200%
Tensile strength/ elongation at break/ / >65%
elongation at peak load Longitudinal:
>10.0 N/mm2 /
>300% / >60%
Durability of water tightness against EN 1296 / EN - Pass
ageing 1928
Resistance to impact EN 12691 - 1500 mm
Method A
Resistance to tear (nail shank) EN 12310-1 - 720 N (longitudinal)
Reaction to fire EN ISO 11925- - Pass
2
Tear resistance - > 600 N
Joint strength EN 12317-2 - >220 N (lap)
>150 N (butt)
Water vapour transmission EN 1931 - Water vapour
resistance factor u
= 580000
Equivalent air layer
thickness Sd
= 400 metres
Resistance to alkali EN 1847 / EN Watertight at Pass
1928 2kPa Pass
at 60kPa
Length EN 1848-2 - 30 metres

Width 1.27 metres

Thickness 4 – 5mm
(membrane thickness
Mass 0.8mm)
Straightness 1.54 kg/m2
<75 mm per 10 metre
Visible defects length
Free from visible
defects
Methane permeability BS903 Pt. A30 - 1.33E-17 m2/sec/Pa
CO2 permeability Rilem Report 12 - <5.12 E -
13m2/sec/Pa
2.2.2 SELF-ADHESIVE MEMBRANE
1. Where a self-adhesive waterproof membrane is required in conjunction with the pre-

applied membrane (i.e. top of foundation scarcement), it shall be based on Fosroc
Proofex 3000MR, a 1.2mm thick self-adhesive membrane conforming to BS8102:2009
and EN13707:2004 and EN13969:2004. It shall have a current BBA independent
certificate and possess the following physical properties:
Elongation >300% EN12311-1

Resistance to tear 125N EN12310-1
WVT 3.433x10-9 kg/m2 S EN1931
Adhesion to primed
concrete 4.9N/mm ASTM D1000
Thickness 1.2mm
2.2.3 PROTECTION FOR SELF-ADHESIVE MEMBRANE
Nominal 3mm thick rot-proof Proofex Protection boards suitable for protection for self-
adhesive membrane, as recommended by the membrane manufacturer.
2.2.4 Accessories
1. Corner pieces: 125 mm internal and external corner pieces made from polyethylene
membrane with a 100 mm butyl selvedge.
2. “L” section: This 10 m long x 250 mm wide section of polyethylene has 2 butyl selvedge
strips. It is used by bending at 90o along its length for application between horizontal
and vertical membrane to provide waterproofing continuity and it also connects with
internal and external corner pieces. “L” section is supplied with a butyl “closure” strip at
each end, if the “L” section is cut this strip must be replaced with Detail Strip or Total
Tape.
3. Detail Strip: A reinforced, double-sided waterproof adhesive tape for sealing and jointing
roll ends, cut edges and corner pieces. It consists of a strong synthetic fiber fabric
impregnated and coated both sides with a rubber bitumen adhesive, which is protected
by a removable siliconised paper.
4. Top Hat: Waterproof pipe entry consisting of polyethylene / polypropylene membrane,

which includes an aluminum foil layer.
5. Total Tape: Used to adhere Top Hats to the membrane and as a closure strip to “L”
section.
6. Sealant: Used to seal between Top Hat and penetration pipe

7. Polyurea: Polyurea WCS used to seal between joints around pipe entries, penetrations,
pile caps, vertical to horizontal corners, etc.
2.2.5 PILE TOP CEMENTITIOUS REPROFILING AND VOID FILLER
1. Pile tops shall be re-profile with a high performance and shrinkage compensated
cementitious grout Supercast PC, Supercast PC is supplied as a ready to use blend of
dry powders and selected aggregates, which requires only the addition of clean water
to produce a highly consistent, fluid repair material suitable for void filling.
2. In conditions at or below the water table, use Supercast PC in conjunction with
Supercast EPT and/or Proofex membranes.
3. The physical properties shown below were obtained under laboratory conditions at a
water: powder ratio of 0.12, and may vary in practice:
45N/mm² at 7 days
Compressive strength BS EN 196 P1
75N/mm² at 28 days
Flexural strength > 12 mpa at 28 days BS EN 196-1
Permeability < 10 mm BS EN 12390 P8
Fresh wet density 2380 kg/m3
2.2.6 PILE TOP EPOXY GROUT
1. Pile tops shall be made waterproof with a high strength fast setting epoxy grout
Supercast EPT, with high chemical resistance, excellent bearing strength and bond to
concrete. It shall encapsulate the pile top at 20 mm thickness and seamlessly join to
the waterproofing membrane. The top of pile head surface shall be rough to ensure
excellent bond of epoxy and concrete. Corner and edge of pile head to be re-profiled
by using cementitious grout.
2. The encapsulating resin grout, shall exhibit the following properties:
ASTM C 575 method

Compressive strength 75N/mm² at 7 days
B( 35 °C cure )
Tensile strength 11N/mm² at 7 days ASTM C 307
ASTM C 580 method
Flexural strength 20N/mm² at 7 days
A
Water penetration Nil (after 7 days) DIN 1048 Part 5
Rapid chloride permeability Negligible AASHTO T-277-83
Greater than the tensile strength
Bond Strength
of the concrete
2.2.7 INJECTION WATERSTOPS
1. All construction joints shall incorporate injection hose Supercast Injectoseal.

2. Waterstop system: The hose shall be of a re-injectable nature and shall be capable of re-
injection several times over the life of the structure. Installation shall be seamless and
without cuts and joints when installed.
2.2.8 WATERSTOPS
1. Waterstops Supercast PVC shall be factory extruded from a high-grade polyvinyl chloride
compound (PVC) which shall be produced from virgin PVC base resin and shall not
contain any reclaimed material whatsoever.
2. Waterstops and associated materials shall be by a manufacturer with a minimum of ten

year experience in the field of engineering waterproofing products. The manufacturer
shall operate a Quality System registered to BS EN ISO 9001 or 9002.
3. The top of pile head surface shall be rough to ensure excellent bond of epoxy and
concrete. Corner and edge of pile head to be re-profiled by using cementitious grout.
4. Perform work in accordance with requirements of General Conditions as well as

provisions of all applicable laws, codes, ordinances, rules and regulations. If applicable,
all regulations regarding the transportation, handling storage and removal of hazardous
materials shall be strictly adhered to.
5. Shop Drawings for the waterstop network shall be submitted by the Contractor for the
approval of the Engineer. Drawings of all necessary details concerning the continuity of
the network shall be submitted by the Contractor in accordance with the design
recommendations of the products manufacturer. Samples of the proposed materials
shall be submitted.
6. The waterstop shall be a high performance system as shown on the Contract drawings.
All transitions and intersections shall be factory prefabricated, site jointing is to be limited
to butt joints and shall be performed strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions.
7. The centrally placed waterstop shall be a minimum of 250mm wide unless otherwise
indicated by engineer. The waterstop shall have two ribs on the web either side of the
center bulb/shutter stop. The waterstop shall have reinforced eyelets for positive fixing
located at the edge flanges.
8. The externally placed waterstop shall be a minimum of 250mm wide with two ribs on
either side of the center of the waterstop. The waterstop shall have an outer nailing
flange and a central fin to act as a shutter stop.
9. Waterstops used at expansion joints shall have an expansion bulb in the center to
accommodate the movements.
10. The ribs of the centrally placed waterstop shall line up with the ribs of the externally
placed waterstop. All jointing shall be carried out in strict accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions using purpose made metal jigs and welding equipment.
11. The minimum test performance data for the PVC waterstops shall be as follows:
Tensile Strength 14 Nn/m2

Elongation at break 300%
Hardness Shore `A' 70 - 90
Joint Movement Up to 10mm
Hydrostatic head Up to 100m
Typical figures BS 2782 at 25 °C
12. The materials shall be tested in accordance with BS2571 or BS2782 and CRD-C-572-74
and installed under the guidelines of BS 8102 for water excluding structures and BS8007
for water retaining structures.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION
A. Inspect and prepare substrates using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for
achieving best result for the substrates under project conditions.
B. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. Do not proceed with installation until
substrates have been prepared using the methods recommended by the manufacturer and
deviations from manufacturer's recommended tolerances are corrected. Commencement
of installation constitutes acceptance of conditions.

C. If preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect in writing of

deviations from manufacturer's recommended installation tolerances and conditions.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF HORIZONTAL APPLICATION
A. Roll out the membrane with the grid surface upper most.
B. Carefully align adjacent rolls and overlapping the previous sheet by 75mm along the
adhesive selvedge.
C. There should be a staggered of half a roll length to avoid build-up of end joints in one area.
D. Once the sheets are aligned, remove the release tape and firmly roll all joints to ensure the
bond seals.
E. For optimum performance in hot conditions the membrane can be spot welded along the
selvedge using welding strip or hot air gun.
F. Roll ends or cut edges (head to head), shall be fixed adjacent to each other using detail
strip or L piece on the underside, spot welding can be used to secure the bond whenever
needed.
G. Only ancillary may be used in conjunction with the membrane.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF VERTICAL APPLICATION
A. Where the membrane is applied to removable formwork, it is recommended that a

minimum concrete compressive strength of 10N/mm² is reached before the formwork is
stripped.
B. Fix detail strip patches (100mm x 100mm) on the shutter or shoring every 1m.
C. The membrane can easily be adhered to the pre-fixed Detail strip.
D. Small nails or staples should be used along the outside selvedge line.
3.4 VERTICAL TO HORIZONTAL JOINT APPLICATION
A. Easy to fit using L section
B. Make sure all surfaces to be jointed are clean and free from dirt and moisture.
C. Cut the desired length of L section ensuring a 50mm overlap with the membrane.
D. Tack the membrane L section in place using sealant.
E. Apply the membrane vertical and horizontal.
F. Remove the release tape of the L section and bond to the non-grid side of the membrane
(back side), using a roller ensure that laps are bonded.
G. In order to tightly seal the joints, apply a continuous line of Polyurea along the joint, the
seam is 2mm x 60mm (minimum 20mm either side)
3.5 PILE HEAD TREATMENT USING SUPERCAST PC
A. Pile Re-profiling Method using cementitious grout Surface preparation

1. Mark out affected area, then cut back edge of repair to a minimum depth of 10
mm.
2. Break out the repair area to remove all contaminated or damaged concrete to a

minimum depth of 10 mm, up to the pre-cut edge of the repair.

3. Oil and grease deposits are best removed by steam cleaning, detergent scrubbing
or the use of a proprietary degreaser. The effectiveness of decontamination should
be assessed by a pull-off test.
4. Fully clean the concrete and steel surfaces to remove laitance, the by-products of
corrosion and other contaminants. This is most effectively achieved by proprietary
blast media. The edge of the repair should be „roughened‟ to provide a good
mechanical key at the substrate interface.
B. Substrate priming – water

1. Priming with water should take place after erection of the formwork.
2. Several hours prior to placing the cementitious grout, the prepared concrete
substrates should be saturated, by filling the cementitious grout or work with clean
water. Immediately prior to application of cementitious grout, any excess water
should be removed via the drainage outlet, leaving the substrate “saturated
surface dry”.
C. Formwork
1. Where required, formwork should be constructed such that the unrestrained
surface area of the repair is minimized.
2. The formwork should be rigid and tight to the substrate to prevent grout loss. Use
of silicone sealant, or similar, is also advised around the edge of the formwork.
3. The internal faces of the formwork should be sealed, using release agent, to
ensure that water is not absorbed from the repair material by the formwork.
4. The formwork should include suitable drainage outlets for pre-soaking.
5. There must be suitable access points to pour or pump the mixed material in place.
D. Mixing
1. It is essential that cementitious grout is thoroughly mixed and that powder is
always added to the water.
2. Measure out 3.0 litres of cool, potable water, into the mixing apparatus. (It is
suggested that the temperature of the water should not exceed 20ºC, so that the
temperature of the final mixed material is not greater than 30ºC).
3. With the mixing apparatus in operation add one full 20kg bag of cementitious grout
and mix for 3 to 5 minutes until a smooth, even consistency is obtained
E. Placing
1. Limits of the pour geometry should be in accordance with that laid down in the
„Design criteria‟ section of the current product data sheet.
2. The material should be placed within 30 minutes of mixing, in order to gain the full
benefits of fluidity and expansion, which will fill all the voids.
3. Placement should be a continuous process, to avoid the formation of a „cold
joint‟ .
F. Curing
1. Formwork should be left in place until the cured cementitious grout has reached a
self-supporting, compressive strength of 10 N/mm2, or as otherwise advised by the
Engineer.
2. Immediately after the formwork has been struck, all exposed faces of the repair
should be thoroughly soaked with clean water to remove residual traces of the
shutter release agent. The exposed areas of cementitious grout should then be
continuously cured with wet hessian for 72 hours.
3. At ambient temperatures above 30ºC supplementary curing in the form of
polythene sheeting, taped down at the edges, must be used.
3.6 PILE HEAD ENCAPSULATION USING SUPERCAST EPT
A. Surface Preparation.

1. The substrate surface must be free from oil, grease or any loosely adherent
material.
2. If the concrete surface is defective or has laitance, it must be cut back to a sound
base.
3. Bolt holes or fixing pockets must be blown clean of any dirt or debris.
B. Formwork – General
1. Before fixing any formwork, ensure that the area to be grouted is clean.
2. The formwork itself must be constructed to be leak proof, to prevent any possible
grout loss. This can be achieved by using foam rubber strip or mastic sealant
beneath the formwork, and at any joints in the formwork. The formwork should also
be constructed in such a way as to keep the final, unrestrained surface area of the
grout to a minimum, to avoid problems with cracking at a later stage.
3. It should be fixed in such a way as to allow easy stripping, without causing damage
or distress to the grout. All dirt and debris to be removed from the grout area
before the last piece of formwork is fixed.
C. Mixing
1. The entire contents of the hardener can should be poured into the base container
and mixed until homogeneous.
2. Place the resultant material into a suitable forced action mixer and ensure that the
entire volume is poured in.
3. Add the aggregate and mix for 2-3 minutes or until uniform colour is achieved.
4. Under no circumstances should part packs be used, as this will change the resin:
powder ratio, adversely affecting material performance and automatically
invalidating standard product guarantee.
D. Placing
1. Prior to placement, ensure that all surfaces are dry.
2. The mixed grout should be poured only from one side of the formwork to eliminate
the entrapment of air. The pouring must be maintained at all times so that a
continuous grout front is achieved until the grout reaches the required level.
3. The mixed grout should grip to the terminated membrane all around the pile,
flowing into the Engage (minimum 20mm either side).
4. Apply a 2x 50x50mm seam of Polyurea WCS all around the circumference of the
pile cap and overlapping the Engage.
3.7 PIPE PENETRATION
Penetrations through the membrane i.e. pipe entries, shall be made watertight using Top hats.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 07840
FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Fireproof firestopping and firesafing materials.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Mechanical, Ductwork.
B. Mechanical, Fans and Air Distribution.
C. Mechanical Plumbing.
D. Mechanical, Automatic Sprinkler Systems.
E. Electrical Basic Materials and Methods.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ASTM E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
B. ASTM E119 - Method for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
C. ASTM E814 - Test Method of Fire Tests of Through- Penetration Firestops.
1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Fireproofing Materials: ASTM E119 ASTM E814 to achieve a fire rating as noted on Drawings.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance and limitation criteria.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate preparation and installation instructions.
D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.06 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with minimum years
documented experience, approved by manufacturer.
1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to applicable code for fire resistance ratings and surface burning characteristics.
B. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of
combustibility.
1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Do not apply materials when temperature of substrate material and ambient air is below
60 degrees F.
B. Maintain this minimum temperature before, during, and for 3 days after installation of materials.
C. Provide ventilation in areas to receive solvent cured materials.
1.09 SEQUENCING
A. Sequence Work to permit firestopping materials to be installed after adjacent and surrounding work is
complete.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers
As vendor list
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Primer: Type recommended by firestopping manufacturer for specific substrate surfaces.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Dam Material: Type recommended by firestopping manufacturer for specific location and substrate
surfaces.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 01039.
B. Verify that openings are ready to receive the Work of this Section.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter which may affect
bond of firestopping material.
B. Remove incompatible materials which affect bond.
C. Install backing materials to arrest liquid material leakage.
3.03 APPLICATION
A. Apply primer and materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Apply firestopping material in sufficient thickness to achieve rating and to uniform density and texture.
C. Install material at walls or partition openings which contain penetrating sleeves, piping, ductwork,
conduit and other items requiring firestopping.
D. Dam material to remain.
3.04 SAFING INSULATION

A. Install blanket safing insulation sections folded back unto itself to form a U-shaped insert.
B. Sufficient thickness shall be used to yield a 25% compression on the insert on installation.
C. Fold shall be facing and flush with the side of the wall requiring the fire rating.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Clean Work under provisions of Section 01700.
B. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials.
3.06 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01500.
B. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation.
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 8 – DOORS AND WINDOWS
SECTION 08110
STEEL DOORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes non-rated; fire rated and sounds rated hollow metal steel doors and Frames.
1. Provide door louvers.
1.2 REFERENCES / SPECIFICATIONS

A. ASTM A526, A653 (zinc coated by hot dip process, Commercial quality, Galvanized Steel Sheet),
ASTM A366 (Commercial quality carbon steel, Cold Rolled Steel Sheets). Dimensions and frame
profiles shall conform to the detail drawings.
B. ASTM E413 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation.
C. DHI (Door Hardware Institute) -The Installation of Commercial Steel Doors and Steel Frames,
Insulated Steel Doors in Wood Frames and Builder's Hardware.
D. NFPA 80 (National Fire Protection Association) - Fire Doors and Windows.
E. NFPA 252 (National Fire Protection Association) - Fire Tests for Door Assemblies.
F. SDI-100 (Steel Door Institute) - Standard Steel Doors and Frames.
G. UL 10B (Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.) - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate door elevations, internal reinforcement, closure method, and cut-outs for
glazing, louvers, and finishes.
C. Product Data: Submit door configurations, location of cut-outs for hardware reinforcement.
D. Samples: Submit one corner sample of frame, 12”x 12” (305 x 305mm) in size showing joint of head
and jamb, include hinge reinforcement and plaster guard. Submit one corner sample of door face
metal, 12”x 12” (305 x 305mm) in size illustrating prime finished. Sample submitted shall be of the
production type and shall represent in all respects the minimum quality of work to be furnished by the
manufacturer.
E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special installation instructions.
F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.

A. Conform to requirements of SDI-100.
B. Fire Rated Door: Conform to ASTM E152, NFPA 252, UL 10B, and UBC 7-2 Fire Door Test
standards.
C. Fire Rated Door and Frame shall bear fire labels from an Independent Testing Laboratory and
from Dubai Central Laboratory or Dubai Municipality.
D. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
1.5 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum
ten years documented experience.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.
B. Accept doors on site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage. Minor damages may be
repaired, provided the finish items are equal in all respects to new work and acceptable to Employer.
Otherwise remove and replace damaged items as directed.
C. Store doors on raised platforms, in vertical positions with blocking between units to allow air
circulation. Keep stored materials covered and protected from damage and environmental conditions.
D. Break seal on-site to permit ventilation.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.
B. Coordinate frame installation with size, location, and installation of service utilities.
C. Coordinate work with door opening construction, door frame, and door hardware installation.
D. Sequence installation to ensure door hardware electric wire connections are achieved in an orderly
and expeditious manner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Acceptable Manufacturers”
As per vendor list.
2.2 FIRE RATING / WHEN APPLICABLE AS PER DOOR SCHEDULE & DRAWINGS:
A. Fire rating applied as per door schedule:
1. Fire Doors shall bear fire labels, WHI listed, or equivalent and if door size exceeds
specified values, oversized label & certificate of label construction is required.
2. Fire rating shall be up to and including the time limit specified in door schedule, tested and
certified according to UL 10B (2009) “Fire Tests of Door Assemblies”, UBC 7-2-1997 “Fire Tests
of Door Assemblies”, NFPA 252-2008, ASTM E152 and CAN4-S104-1985.
3. Supplier shall submit a proper certification from an American international testing agency
confirming the above.
2.3 COMPONENTS
A. Door Construction: Provide doors of 45mm (1¼”) thick full flush construction fabricated from 1.5mm
(16 gauge) steel sheet. Provide top and bottom channel of 1.5 mm thick steel welded to door skins on
150mm centers. Top channel is to be flush, bottom channel inverted. All to be in accordance with
SDI-100.
1. Interior Doors: Fabricate from cold rolled steel sheet ASTM A366.
2. Toilets Doors: Fabricate from galvanized steel sheet ASTM 526, ASTM 653.
B. Core Construction: Provide doors with honeycomb core or rockwool core in case acoustic is required.
C. Frame Construction: Provide pressed steel frames constructed of 1.5mm (16 gauge) steel sheet for
doors of 45mm (1¼”) thickness with the details conforming to SDI-111A. Frames to be of knocked
down type with steel corner tabs and corner reinforcing for field assembly. All frames must include the
appropriate anchors to match the wall construction they are to be installed in and the appropriate
hardware reinforcing. The frames shall be fire rated injected and filled with honeycomb / rock wool
core for proper insulation.
1 we have UL , FM , WHI certificate， 90mins , 3hours .
2 material of door leaf is galvanized steel, 0.7mm, 0.9mm, 1.1mm
3 material of frame is 1.45mm galvanized steel (CRS is ok as well)
4 fire rated polystyrene or fire proof honeycomb for core.
5 UL certificate hinge, closer and lock.
6 packing by tray pallets and protection.
1. Interior Frames: Fabricate from cold rolled steel sheet ASTM A366

2. Exterior Frames: Fabricate from galvanized steel sheet ASTM 526, ASTM 653.
D. Frame Jamb Anchors: Provide expansion anchor bolts for concrete walls, T -anchors for
masonry walls, and Z-anchors for dry wall location. Numbers of anchors shall be as per UL 63.
E. Labels: Fire rated doors & frames shall bear the appropriate fire labels. 90 minutes for staircases (fire
exit)
F. Painting: After fabrication, provide doors and frames thoroughly cleaned (to assure proper adhesion)
and coated with rust inhibiting epoxy shop primer in compliance with ANSI A224.1.Finish paint to be
applied at the building site after installation.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Louvers / When applicable:
1. Provide stationary sight proof door louvers where indicated on the drawings or door schedule and
shall be slip-on type Model Series No. Z-100 (Z type blades) or IY-100 (inverted Y-type blades).
Louvers are made out of 18 gauge (1.2mm thick) galvanized / cold rolled steel sheet.
Louvers shall be installed at site by tamper proof screws that fasten the internal louver trim to the
louver blade. Free air flow area is 50%.
B. Vision Panel / When applicable:

Where indicated in the drawings or on the door schedule prepare doors to receive glazing. Door
supplier shall provide the cut-out and steel glazing bead.
1. All non-fire rated doors prepared for lites shall have steel glazing trim kits to frame the opening.
Glazing beads shall be screw-on type.
2. All labeled fire doors prepared for lites shall have the opening framed with fire tested steel trim kits
with screw-on steel bead.
2.5 FABRICATION GENERAL

A. Fabricate hollow metal door units to be rigid, neat in appearance and free from defects, warp or
buckle. Accurately form steel to required sizes and profiles. Whatever practical, fit and
assemble units in fine plan clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled
before shipment, to ensure proper assembly at project site. Comply with ANSI / SDI 100
requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install doors in accordance with SDI-122 installation and troubleshooting guide for standard steel
doors & frames and DHI.
B. Install door louvers, plumb and level.
C. Coordinate installation of glass and glazing.
D. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames.
E. Touch-up factory finished doors.
3.2 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Quality Requirements: Tolerances.
B. Manufacturing tolerances shall conform to SDI-117
C. Maximum Diagonal Distortion 1.5 mm measured with straight edge, corner to corner.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Execution Requirements: Testing, adjusting and balancing.
B. Adjust door for smooth and balanced door movement.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 08120
ALUMINIUM DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. General:
1. Furnish all labour, materials, tools, equipment and services for external aluminum doors, frames,
shop B fronts, louvred panels and screens in accordance with provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish and install all Supplementary or
miscellaneous items, appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure
and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere:

1. Section 04200, Masonry.
2. Section 07920, Sealant Work.
3. Section 08700, Door Hardware.
4. Section 08800, Glass and Glazing.
C. The work described in this Section is for:

Internal aluminum screens, doors and frames.
1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Tolerances:
1. Fabricate work of this Section to a tolerance of 1.5mm for vertical, horizontal and diagonal
dimensions of units under 1800mm, and 3mm for dimensions greater than 1800mm.
2. Erect component parts within following tolerances

a. Variations from plumb and level:
2 mm maximum variation in height or 3mm runs, non-cumulative.
b. Offsets in end-to-end or edge-to-edge alignment of adjoining members:

0.5mm maximum offset in any alignment.
3. Fabricate and install work of this Section where exposed to view to maintain a surface flatness
which ensures that the slope of the surface at any point is no greater than 0.5% from the nominal
plane of the surface when measured at 25mm intervals in any direction on flat planes or on line
normal to longitudinal axis of cylindrical surfaces, under any combination of performance
conditions.
4. Maintain tolerances for glazing as recommended by glass manufacturer.
B. Interface With Adjacent Systems:

Coordinate with other Sections to ensure that provisions are made for, and that connections are
made by this Section, to provide installation and anchorage as specified.

A. General:
Refer to Section 01400 for source quality control requirements.
B. Glazing Requirements:
Conform to recommendations of Flat Glass Marketing Association (FGMA), Glazing Manual

1980 (GM) and Glazing Sealing Systems Manual 1970 (GSSM).

Design / system shall conform the United Arab Emirates Codes and standards.
C. Qualifications:
Provide doors specified in this Section only by a fabricator and erector who has adequate plant,
equipment and skilled tradesmen to perform it expeditiously, and is known to have been
responsible for satisfactory installations similar to that specified during a period of at least the
immediate past five years.
D. Welder Qualifications:
1. Perform welding of structural components to meet specified requirements of BS 5135 for welding
of steel and BS 3571, Part 1, for welding of aluminum; or of AWS D1.1 for steel and AWS D1.2
for aluminum.
2. Test welds in conformance to SSA 39/1977.
E. Mock-up:
1. Deliver to the site as directed a complete full size, operating, finished sample of typical unit with
specified accessories for approval to provide mock-up as specified in Section 01400 for each unit
type.
2. Units incorporated in the works shall equal or exceed standards of materials and workmanship of
approved mock-up.
1.4 REFERENCES
Reference Standards:
A. The following reference standards included in this Section shall apply as specified in Section01420,
Reference Standards.
B. Saudi Arabian Standards Organization:

1. SSA 39/1977, Mechanical Testing of Welded Joints.
2. SSA 79/1977, Aluminum and Aluminum Alloys Products for Architectural Applications. Part 1:
Sheets, Strips, Plates, Bars and Structural Section.
C. Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers Association (U.S.A):

1. AAMA Publication No. 605.2.90, Voluntary Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings on
Architectural Extrusions and Panels.
D. The American Society for Testing and Materials:
1. ASTM B209M-89a, Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate
[Metric].
2. ASTM B221M-89 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
Wire, Shapes and Tubes [Metric].
E. American Welding Society:

1. AWS D1.2-83, Structural Welding Code - Aluminum.
F. British Standard Specifications:

1. BS 1471: 1972, Specification for Wrought Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy for General Engineering
Purposes Drawn Tube.
2. BS 1474: 1987, Specification for Wrought Aluminum and Aluminum Alloys for General
Engineering Purposes Bars, Extruded Round Tubes and Sections.
3. BS 2571: 1963, Specification for Bitumen-Bases Coatings for Cold Application, Suitable for Use
in Contract with Potable Water.
4. BS 3571: MIG Welding.
Part A: 1985, Specification for MIG Welding of Aluminum and Aluminum Alloys.
5. BS 4315: Method of Test for Resistance to Air and Water Penetration.
6. BS 4871: Specification for Approval Testing of Welders Working to Approved Welding
Procedures.
Part 2: 1982 TIG or MIG Welding of Aluminum and its Alloys.

Part 2: 1980 (1986), Water Tightness Test under Static Pressure.
Part 4: 1978 (1985), Form of Test Report.
G. Flat Glass Marketing Association:

Glazing Manual 1980.
Glazing Sealing Systems Manual 1970.
1.5 SUBMITTAL
A. Shop Drawings:
Submit shop drawings showing and describing in detail system assemblies, including: large scale details
of members and materials, of door, frame, face sheet anchorage devices, and of connection and jointing
details; fully dimensioned layout for positioning of anchorage devices to structures; dimensions, gauges,
thicknesses, glazing details, descriptions of materials, including catalogue numbers, products and
manufacturers names, aluminum alloy and temper designations, metal finishing specifications and other
pertinent data and information.
B. Samples:
1. Submit samples of unit frame profiles and glass, 210mm x 300mm size, prior to fabrication of
units. Sample acceptance will be for profile, appearance and glazing detail only. Compliance with
other requirements is the responsibility of the Contractor.
2. Submit samples for specified finishes. Submit samples finished on the proposed alloy on300mm
lengths of extrusions or 300mm square of sheet or plate, showing maximum range or variation in
texture, gloss, colour and shade. Sample submittal and acceptance shall be for colour, texture
and specular gloss.
C. Inspection and Testing Reports:

Submit Contractor's inspection and testing reports specified under field quality control.

A. Deliver work of this Section to site as required for installation, to meet construction schedule, and to
locations as directed.
B. Cross-brace large units. Package or crate units for shipment and storage before installation.
C. Store products clear of grade, protected from damage and as recommended by manufacturer.
D. Protect finish surfaces by sturdy protective wrappings.
E. Provide methods for handling without causing damage.
F. Do not permit foreign materials such as splashing of concrete, mortar, plaster or paint, which could
damage the finish, to remain on the surface of metalwork. All materials of this nature must be
immediately removed. Protect exposed surfaces of metal exposed to abuse by removable vinyl or
other suitable and approved protection throughout the period that Work proceeds on the building.
Remove protective materials carefully on completion of the Works, and in such a manner that no
damage occurs to the metal finish.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 Materials and Acceptable Manufacturers:
2.1.1 Acceptable manufacturers, subject to compliance with specified requirements. Other manufacturers
providing similar and equal product will be given equal consideration:
As per vendor list.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum:

1. Extrusions: To meet specified requirements of SSA 79/1977, of type equivalent to AA6063-T5,

alloy and temper for framing, and otherwise where not exposed to suit specified and fabricator's
requirements.
2. Door face sheets shall be high quality 5005 aluminum sheet 1.6mm.
3. Top, bottom and mid-door rails shall be joined to tubular door stiles by 9.5mm diameter steel tie
rods.
4. Doors shall be reinforced internally to receive surface applied and mortised hardware.
5. Door frame members shall be an extruded box section with integral door stops and reglets for the
insertion of weather and sound stripping.
6. Exposed surfaces of aluminum shall be free of die marks, scratches, blisters, "leave-off" marks,
or other blemishes which are visible.
B. Aluminum Finish:
Electrostatic powder polyester coating and colour shall be to Engineer approval. Alternative
equivalent standards may be prepared for review and approval.
C. Aluminum Finish: (Alternative)

Bronze anodized finish to B.S. 1615 and minimum 20 micron anodic film thickness. Quality shall
comply in addition, with the European Anodisers Association EURAS/EWAA Procedure An 12.
Alternative equivalent standards may be prepared for review and approval.
D. Glass
1. To meet specified requirements of Section 08800, Glass and Glazing.
2. Double glazed shall be reflective, high performance heat strengthened to a thickness
6mm, 12mm, 6mm, 12mm being air gap for all the glasswork in elevation for all the floors
whether fixed or movable. The outside glass shall be reflective and inside one clear glass. All
hardware shall be from stainless steel, grade 316.
E. Sealants and Sealant Materials:

To meet specified requirements of Section 07920, Sealant Work.
F. Fastenings:
Stainless steel, austenitic AISI type 300 series, selected to prevent galvanic action between fasteners
and components fastened. Where exposed in finished surfaces, use oval-head countersunk Philips
head screws with shank diameter one screw size smaller than the diameter of holes in fastened
material and colour to match adjacent surfaces.
G. Anchors:
Austenitic AISI type 300 stainless steel.
H. Bituminous Paint:
Black solvent carried bituminous paint, to meet specified requirements of BS 3416, type 1.
I. Thermal Break:
Poured in place polyurethane self-adhering to adjacent aluminum surfaces to provide a minimum
6mm separation between exterior and interior surfaces of metal frames.
2.1 FABRICATION
A. Basic door sections shall be 50mm overall width with integral reglets to receive snap-in
extruded glazing beads and gaskets.
B. Conceal all fasteners.

C. Ensure that glazing rebate is provided with depth and width to accommodate specified glass in
accordance with glass manufacturer's recommendations. Install glazing gaskets anchored to
aluminum extrusions.
D. Assembly of Units:

1. Join members by welding.

2. Conceal welding where required so as not to produce any bloom effect on finished surface.
3. Test welds to meet specified requirements of SSA 39/1977.
4. Weld with electrodes and by methods recommended by the base metal manufacturer, and in
accordance with specified requirements and to avoid distortion or discoloration of exposed faces.
Make welds continuous unless otherwise indicated. Grind exposed welds flush, to match adjacent
metal.
5. Accurately fabricate and fit all components in the shop where possible.
6. Join members in shop fabricated units to fit flush with hairline joints, splined or otherwise backed
up to reinforce.
E. Dissimilar Materials:
1. Protect material from electrolytic action when dissimilar metals are in contact with one another.
2. Protect aluminum concealed in contact with masonry with a heavy coating of bituminous paint.
F. Anchors:
1. Incorporate anchorage to structure to support work adequately when subjected to loads imposed
by use.
2. Allow for complete adjustment in anchorage for levelling and positioning of work during
installation.
G. Organic Coating:
Prepare surfaces and apply organic coating in accordance with coating manufacturer's
recommendations and to meet specified requirements of AAMA 605.2.90 for fluoropolymer coating.
H. Hardware:
Provide hinges, stays, closers, locking, etc. to match frame members. Provide in accordance with
Section 08700, Door Hardware.
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Take critical site dimensions before final preparation of shop drawings to ensure that adjustments in
fabrication or installation are provided for, that allowance is made for possible deflection of structure,
and that clearances to other construction have been maintained.
B. Ensure that anchors and inserts, installed by others, are adequate to meet specified requirements.
Make adequate adaptations before installation if required.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Install units plumb, level and in accordance with shop drawings, by qualified experienced trades
men and to conform to fabricator's instructions.
2. Do not force units into place, nor superimpose on them loads for which they were not designed.
3. Provide for thermal movement to take place throughout entire specified temperature range
between shop fabricated assemblies and between assemblies and adjacent construction.
4. Secure units by non-corrosive anchorage materials. Use of wood or fibre is not acceptable. Refer
to Division 1 for fastening and anchor requirements.
5. Conceal anchors, clips, blocking and all other attachments.
B. Caulking:
1. Caulk joints between frame members and adjacent construction.
2. Perform caulking incorporated with work of this Section to meet specified requirements of Section
07920 Sealant Work, of the specifications.
C. Glazing:

Install glass in units, as a part of work of this Section and to meet specified requirements of Section
08800, Glass and Glazing, of the specifications.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Refer to Section 01200, Quality Assurance / Quality Control.
B. The Contractor shall maintain an inspection and testing program to verify compliance with this
Section of the specifications on an ongoing basis.
C. Immediately following each inspection and test, submit a copy of inspection and test report to the
Employer.
D. In addition, field quality control will be performed by the Employer to ensure that work of this Section
meets specified requirements. Provide the Employer with access for inspection and material samples
to be tested as directed.
3.4 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING

A. Remove damaged, dented, defaced, defectively finished or tool marked components and replace with
new.
B. Refinish shop applied finishes in field only with approval.

C. Final cleaning as:
Cleaning on completion of installation:
1. Remove deposits which affect appearance of units.
2. Remove protective materials.
3. Clean interior and exterior surfaces of metal and glass after installation by washing with clear
water; or with water and soap or detergent; followed by a clear water rinse.
4. Clean exterior surfaces of glass once every three months during construction.
5. Clean and restore stained metal surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
Replace if cleaning is impossible.
3.5 GUARANTEE
The contractor shall provide a ten (10) year written guarantee on materials, workmanship and
performance of work carried out under this Section.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect pre-finished surfaces of metal work with protective coatings or wrappings to remain in place
until construction completion. Use materials recommended by finishers or manufacturers of metals to
ensure that method is sufficiently protective, easily removed and harmless to finish.
B. Remove protection from metal glazing surfaces before installation of glass.
C. Maintain protection from time of installation to final cleanup.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 08200
WOODEN DOORS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. General:
1. Furnish all labour, materials, tools, equipment and services for wood door sets, in accordance
with provisions of the Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish and install all supplementary or
4. See Volume 2 for General Requirements.
B. Work performed by other Sections and which is related to this Section is specified in:
1. Section 08710: Door Hardware.
2. Section 08800: Glass and Glazing.
3. Section 09900: Painting.

A. Tolerances:
Maintain tolerances for doors specified in BS 4787, Part 1, as tested in accordance with BS 5277 for
flatness and BS 5278 for squareness.

A. Qualifications:
Provide doors and frames specified in this Section only by a fabricator who has adequate plant and
skilled tradesmen to perform it expeditiously, and is known to have produced satisfactory doors
during a period of at least the immediate past ten (10) years.
B. Manufacturing Standards:
Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) Quality Standards, 1984 edition, Section 1300, Premium
Grade.
C. Fitting Tolerances:
1. 3 mm clearance at jambs, heads and meeting stiles.
2. 6 mm clearance at bottom. Note carpet locations.
3. Fit U/L labeled doors to U/L requirements.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. Reference Standards:
The following reference standards included in this Section shall apply as specified in Section01420:
1. AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute Quality Standards and Guide Specifications.
2. British Standard Specifications:
a. BS 3794: Decorative Laminated Sheets Based on Thermosetting Resins. Part 1:
1982Specifications
b. BS 4787: Internal and External Wood Door Sets, Door Leaves and Frames. Part
1:1980(1985) Specification for dimensional requirements.
c. BS 4965: 1983 Specification for Decorative Laminated Plastics Sheet Veneered Board sand
Panels.
d. BS 5277: 1976 Doors. Measurement of defects of general flatness of door leaves.
e. BS 5278: 1976 Doors. Measurement of dimensions and of defects of squareness of door
leaves.
3. NWMA: National Woodwork Manufacturers Association.

I.S.: 1 Hardwood Flush Doors.
Standard Door Guarantee.
4. United Arab Emirates Codes and standards.

5. Civil Defense Regulations
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Certificates of Conformity and Compliance:
Before delivery, submit notarized certificates from the manufacturer attesting that the doors, frames
and accessories meet the requirements specified herein.
B. Descriptive Literature:
Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature with drawings and specifications and instructions for
installation, adjustment, cleaning and maintenance.
C. Samples (1):
1. Submit cutaway door sample of flush doors showing core construction, cross banding and face
veneer of each door type for approval.
2. Submit representative samples of other types of wood doors and samples of all types of hardware
for approval.
3. Submit for an indicating conformance to standards and other information required for complete
description of the work.
D. Samples (Alternative):
1. Samples will be reviewed for colour and texture only. Compliance with other requirements is the
exclusive responsibility of the Contractor.
2. Submit samples for the following:

a. Transparent finished doors:
Submit veneer sheet from each available finish to be used for face veneers. Also submit
three strips of solid wood 25mm x 25mm x 300mm of spaces to be used for exposed edges
and frames.
b. Pre-finished doors:
Submit two samples; 300mm square, showing fully completed shop finish on same veneer
and edge construction which will be used on the pre-finished doors.
c. Site painted doors:

Submit two samples, not less than 300mm x 300mm, showing fully completed shop
constructed door ready for site painting.
d. Hardwood paneled and polished doors:

Submit two samples of a typical stile not less than 600mm long, showing hardwood, finish
and polishing.
E. Guarantee:
The Contractor shall issue a warranty and period of warranty for:
1. A period for not less than ten (10) years.
2. Repair or replace (including cost of re-hanging and refinishing), wood doors exhibiting defects in
materials or workmanship including warp and de-lamination as defined in NWMA "Standard Door
Guarantee" except the NWMA provision for refunding the price received by the door
manufacturer for any defective door shall not apply.
1.06 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver doors and frames in manufacturer's appropriate packing to site only after building has been
enclosed. Store in dry location with adequate ventilation to maintain equilibrium moisture content of
the timber. Storage requirements shall comply in all respects with the door manufacturer's
recommendations.
B. Identify as to type location.

C. Store doors flat at site in piles no higher than doors can be manually handled. The bottom face on pile
bottoms shall be protected from moisture by water-resistant material placed under skids supporting
piles. The top of the piles shall be covered and air circulation provided at sides of piles.
D. On dry area sites, door sets are to be examined on delivery for moisture content not exceeding twelve
percent (12%), if larger, units will be rejected.
1.07 SITE CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Conditions:
1. Adapt techniques approved by the Employer to ensure that storage, handling and execution
methods suit environmental conditions that are encountered at the site and cause no damage to
the products specified in this Section or the performance of these products in use.
2. Follow recommendations of the supplier of the products.
3. Environmental conditions shall include, but shall not be limited to, ambient temperature; humidity;
moisture in the air and on the products and surfaces with which they are in contact.
1.08 GUARANTEE
A. Guarantee doors in writing for life of installation against defects including:
1. Delamination.
2. Warp or twist of 3mm or more.
3. Telegraphing of any part of core through face veneer.
4. Surface variation exceeding 0.4mm or more in 75mm span.
5. Any other defect which may impair or affect performance of door for purpose for which it is
intended.
B. Remove defective doors and provide new acceptable doors including cost of removal of
defective units, re-hanging and refinishing of replacement units.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1.1 Acceptable manufacturers, subject to compliance with specified requirements. Other
manufacturers providing similar and equal product will be given equal consideration:
As per vendor list.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Entrance Doors and Service Room Doors:
Frame : 45mm Solid Beech wood (200mm max. wall jamb) with fire resisting
smoke seal
Architraves : 60 x 15mm solid decorative Beech wood.
Panel : 54mm thick, 60 min. fire rated board, 4 sides solid Beech lipping with
Beech veneer on both sides; or as per Civil Defense regulations.
Paint : Natural wood stain, polished and lacquered.
Certification : According to BS 476: Part 22: 1987-B.M. TRADA / Q MARK-U.K.-
LABEL & UAE Civil Defense; Manufacturer Approval/Certificate
A. Room Door, Kitchen Door Sets:

Frame : 45mm Solid Beech wood (200mm max. wall jamb)
Panel : 44mm thick solid core panel with 6mm MDF, 4 sides solid Beech lipping
with Beech veneer on both sides.
B. Toilet, Bath Doors

Frame : 45mm Solid Beech wood (200mm max. wall jamb)


Panel : 44mm thick solid core panel with 6mm MDF, 4 sides solid Beech lipping
with Beech veneer on both sides; with 0.9mm Vinyl laminate on both
sides and edges.
C. Staircase Doors
Frame : 62mm Solid Beech wood (200mm max. wall jamb) with fire resisting
smoke seal
Panel : 64mm thick, 90 min. fire rated board, 4 sides solid Beech lipping with
Beech veneer on both sides; or as per Civil Defense regulations.
Certification : According to BS 476: Part 22: 1987-B.M. TRADA / Q MARK-U.K.-
LABEL & UAE Civil Defense; Manufacturer Approval/Certificate
D. Frames and Architraves:

1. In Solid hardwood to the sizes and profiles shown on the drawings and schedules fixed with
screws to match the frame; 55 mm thick and entire width of finished wall and finished to match
shutter. All door frames to be coated with wooden preservatives. All door frames must be fixed to
the sub frame by a minimum of 10 nos. of 120 mm x 8mm stainless steel rowal bolts (Expanded
bolts).
2. Pre-drilled at works, screws and pellets supplied with door frame.
3. Sub-frames shall be softwood unsorted quality. 18mm new (un-used) marine plywood sub-frame
shall be provided for all doors for Engineer’s approval.
4. Transom Panels: Wherever wood transom panels are shown in the same framing systems as
wood doors, panels shall match quality and appearance of associated wood doors in all respects.
5. Hardwood shall be beech wood where indicated to be clear finish.
6. During manufacture of the doors the moisture content of the components shall be minimized to a
maximum of twelve percent (12%).
7. Vision Panels: Doors shall have openings for installation of vision panels with hard wood beading
supplied by door manufacturer.
8. Air Transfer Grilles: Provide standard metal prefinished unit to the size indicated on the
schedules.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Prepare doors to receive hardware, hinges supplied and fixed by door manufacturer.
B. All doors shall be manufactured in properly equipped workshops by tradesmen proficient in such work
and all machinery employed shall be efficient to produce accurately finished joinery.
C. Doors described as painted shall be primed with all grain filled ready for site painting.
D. Draught and dust excluders shall be of the profile shown on the drawings manufactured from
chloroprene by an approved manufacturer and fitted loose to a groove in the timber.
E. Work shall be reasonably knot free, if knots occur they shall not be loose or dead nor exceed10mm in
diameter. No work with splay or arris knots will be accepted nor shall the distance on any one face
between knots be less than ten times the width of the face of timber.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Protect wood door sets from damage before, during and after their installation.
B. Provide protective coverings for doors which are factory prefinished and mark with identification
required for proper installation and location in the building.
C. Acclimatize doors to average prevailing humidity in installation area prior to hanging.
D. Install wood doors and frames plumb and square into prepared structural openings formed by the use
of timber or steel templates. When not specified otherwise, frames to be fixed at 600mmmaximum
centers with at least one fixing 150mm from each end of jambs and one adjacent to each hanging
point of door.
E. Restore finish on edges of shop-finished doors before installation if fitting or machining is required at
the project site.
F. Install wood door sets in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and shop drawings. Adjust for
proper fit and uniform clearance at each edge.
G. Work referred to as pelleted shall describe the process by which the material over the screw head
has previously been removed to a depth of 10mm and tapered in section from a 10mm surface
diameter and after the screw has been driven, the pellet of identical material shall be glued in position
and the surface finished flush. The grain of the work and grain of the pellet shall match in colour,
texture and direction.
H. Site fix glass to vision panels and glazed openings with panes, beads and bedding strip supplied by
door manufacturer.
3.02 PREFORMED STRUCTURAL OPENINGS, RECESSES AND SUPPORTS

The Contractor will be held responsible for coordinating and checking the sizes including
tolerances and fixings between all off-site formed components/equipment and as-built/preformed
openings, recesses and supports.
END OF SECTION 08200

SECTION 08520
ALUMINIUM WINDOWS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. General:
1. Furnish all labour, materials, tools, equipment and services for all Aluminum Windows as
indicated, in accordance with provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere:

1. Section 04200: Masonry.
2. Section 07920: Sealant Work.
3. Section 08800: Glass and Glazing.

As referred to Manufacturers/Vendors’ List
A. Requirements for Work of This Section:
1. Determine interfacing required between systems specified in this Section and the building
structure to ensure adequate anchorage of work and that loads carried by the structure are not
transmitted to windows. Obtain predicted structural deflections at window heads from structural
design engineer.
2. Provide for expansion and contraction of all parts for an exterior temperature range from 10˚C to
65˚C and a building interior temperature range from 10˚C to55˚C. Movement from temperature
fluctuations shall not displace, twist, distort or buckle any part of a system specified in this Section
or the construction with which it is incorporated. Movement shall be absorbed into freely
functioning expansion and contraction joints through a system of moving bearings and supports.
B. Provide glass of composition, thicknesses and heat treatment (annealed, heat strengthened or fully
tempered) for the respective locations as required to meet the performance design criteria and the
following:
1. To limit the statistical probability of failure to four lights per thousand.

2. To resist temperature stress breakage.
3. To ensure that color remains consistent in use.
C. Tolerances
1. Fabricate work of this Section to a tolerance of 1.5mm for vertical, horizontal and diagonal
dimensions of units under 1800mm, and 3mm for dimensions greater than 1800mm.
2. Fabricate mullions to ensure under maximum wind loading a maximum deflection of 1/175 of the
mullion span for sealed insulating glass units and 1/250for single glazing. In no case shall
deflection exceed 20mm.
3. Erect component parts within following tolerances: Variations from plumb and level - 2mm
maximum variation in height or 3mm runs, non-cumulative. Offsets in end-to-end or edge-to-edge
alignment of 0.5mm maximum offset in any alignment.
4. Fabricate and install work of this Section where exposed to view to maintain a surface flatness
which is no greater than 0.5% from the nominal plane of the surface when measured at 25mm
intervals in any direction on flat planes or online normal to longitudinal axis of cylindrical surfaces,
under any combination of performance conditions.
5. Maintain tolerances for glazing as recommended by glass manufacturer.
D. Interface with adjacent systems: Coordinate with other Sections to ensure that provisions are made
for, and that connections are made by this Section, to provide installation and anchorage as specified.

A. General:
Refer to Section 01400 for source quality control requirements.
B. Guarantee:
The Contractor shall provide a ten (10) year written guarantee on materials, workmanship and
performance of work carried out under this Section.
C. Glazing Requirements:
Conform to recommendations of Flat Glass Marketing Association (FGMA), Glazing Manual 1980
(GM) and Glazing Sealing Systems Manual 1970 (GSSM).
D. Qualifications:
Provide windows specified in this Section only by a fabricator and erector who has adequate plant,
equipment and skilled tradesmen to perform it expeditiously, and is known to have been responsible
for satisfactory installations similar to that specified during a period of at least the immediate past five
(5) years.
E. Welder Qualifications:
1. Perform welding of structural components to meet specified requirements of BS5135 for welding
of steel and BS 3571, Part 1, for welding of aluminum; or of AWS D1.1 for steel and AWS D1.2
for aluminum.
2. Test welds in conformance to SSA 39/1977.
F. Mock-up:
1. Deliver to the site as directed a complete full-size, operating, finished sample of typical unit with
specified accessories for approval to provide mock-up as specified in Section 01400 for each
window type.
2. Windows incorporated in the Works shall equal or exceed standards of materials and
workmanship of approved mock-up.
1.04 REFERENCES
Reference Standards:
A. The following reference standards included in this Section shall apply as specified in Section 01420:
B. Saudi Arabian Standards Organization:
1. SSA 39/1977, Mechanical Testing of Welded Joints.
2. SSA 79/1977, Aluminum and Aluminum Alloys Products for Architectural Applications.
Part 1: Sheets, Strips, Plates, Bars and Structural Section.
3. SSA 80/1397H (1977), Testing Method for Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Products for Building
Purposes.
Part 1: Sheets, Strips, Plates, Bars and Structural Sections.
C. Architectural Aluminum Manufactures Association (U.S.A.):

1. AAMA Publication No. 605.2.90, Voluntary Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings
on Architectural Extrusions and Panels.
2. AAMA 1502.7-1981 Voluntary Test Method for Condensation Resistance of Windows, Doors and
Glazed Wall Sections.
D. The American Society for Testing and Materials:

1. ASTM B209M-89a, Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate
(Metric).
2. ASTM B221M-89 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
Wire, Shapes and Tubes (Metric).
E. American Welding Society:

1. AWS D1.2-83, Structural Welding Code- Aluminum.

F. British Standard Specifications:

1. BS 1161: 1977 (1984) Specification for Aluminum Alloy Sections for Structural Purposes.
2. BS 1471: 1972. Specification for Wrought Aluminum and Aluminum Alloys for General
Engineering Purposes-Drawn Tube.
3. BS 1474: 1987, Specification for Wrought Aluminum and Aluminum Alloys for General
Engineering Purposes-Bars, Extruded Round Tubes and Sections.
4. BS 3416:1988, Specification for Bitumen-Based Coatings for Cold Application, Suitable for Use in
Contact with Potable Water.
5. BS 3571: MIG Welding.
Part 1: 1985, Specification for MIG welding of aluminum and aluminum alloys.
6. BS 4315: Methods of Test for Resistance to Air and Water Penetration.
Part 1: 1968, Windows and structural gasket-glazing systems.
7. BS 4871: Specification for Approval Testing of Welders Working to Approved Welding
Procedures.
Part 2: 1982, TIG or MIG Welding of Aluminum and its Alloys.
8. BS 5368: Methods of testing windows.
Part 1: 1976 (1985), Air permeability test.
Part 2: 1980 (1986), Water tightness test under static pressure.
Part 3: 1978 (1985), Wind resistance tests.
Part 4: 1978 (1985), Form of test report.
G. Flat Glass Marketing Association:

Glazing Manual 1980.
Glazing Sealing Systems Manual 1970.
H. Design / system shall conform the United Arab Emirates Codes and standards.
1.05 SUBMITTAL
A. Shop Drawings:
Submit shop drawings showing and describing in detail system assemblies, including:
large-scale details of members and materials, of anchorage devices, and of connection and jointing
details; fully dimension layout for position of anchorage devices to structures; dimensions, gauges,
thicknesses; glazing details, descriptions of materials, including catalogue numbers, products and
manufacturers' names; aluminum alloy and temper designations, metal finishing specifications and
other pertinent data and information.
B. Samples:
1. Submit samples of unit frame profiles and glass, 210mm x 300mm size, prior to fabrication of
units. Sample acceptance will be for profile, appearance and glazing detail only. Compliance with
other requirements is the responsibility of the Contractor.
2. Submit samples for specified finishes. Submit samples finished on the proposed alloy on 300mm
lengths of extrusions or 300mm square of sheet or plate, showing maximum range or variation in
texture, gloss, color and shade. Sample submittal and acceptance shall be for color, texture and
specular gloss.
C. Inspection and Testing Reports:

Submit Contractor's inspection and testing reports specified under Field Quality Control.
D. Performance Verification:
Submit reports of inspection and testing of work of this Section to verify compliance with specified
structural, performance, design and other requirements.

A. Deliver work of this Section to site as required for installation, to meet construction schedule, and to
locations as directed.
B. Cross-brace large units. Package or crate units for shipment and storage before installation.
C. Store products clear of grade, protected from damage and as recommended by manufacturer.
D. Protect finish surfaces by sturdy protective wrappings.

E. Provide methods for handling without causing damage.
F. Do not permit foreign materials such as splashing of concrete, mortar, plaster or paint, which could
damage the finish, to remain on the surface of aluminum work. All materials of this nature must be
immediately removed. Protect exposed surfaces of aluminum exposed to abuse by removable vinyl or
other suitable and approved protection throughout the period that work proceeds on the building.
Remove protective materials carefully on completion of the works, and in such a manner that no
damage occurs to the metal finish.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
As per vendor list.
1.01 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum:
1. Extrusions: To meet specified requirements of SSA 79/1977, of type equivalent to AA 6063-T5,
alloy and temper for framing, and otherwise where not exposed to suit specified and fabricator's
requirements.
2. Exposed surfaces of aluminum shall be free of die marks, scratches, blisters, "leave-off" marks or
other blemishes which are visible.
3. Thickness of Aluminum not less than 2mm.
B. Aluminum Finish: All aluminum works shall be heavy duty and shall be polyester powder coated
finish colour to Engineer’s approval. The powder coating to be used is Ultra Durable powder coating
from Jotun. The raw materials used in the manufacturing of the powder coating shall provide uniform
flow and finish, excellent weathering and corrosion resistance and be able to meet AAMA 2604-98
standard. Color shall match Engineer's sample and as selected by Engineer from the full range of
industry colors and color densities. There shall be 25-year back-to-back warranty from the Applicator
and the Manufacturer.
D. Glass: All glass works shall be heavy duty with low E or low thermal emissivity and thermal break,
color to Engineer’s approval.
As indicated in the drawings and to meet specified requirements of Section08800. Glass type
1: tinted glass unit: two sheets of glass hermetically sealed together at edges with spacers and
sealant forming a 12mm dehydrated air space. Spacer to be filled with hydrophilic material.
1. Outside sheet: grey tinted solar reflective glass, 6mm thick, with low E coating inside surface.
2. Inside sheet: Clear sheet of tinted glass, thickness 6mm.
3. Glass shall be from approved Manufacturer.
E. Glazing Materials:
1. To meet specified requirements of Section 08800, Glass and Glazing.
2. Double glazed shall be reflective, high performance heat strengthened to a thickness 6mm,
12mm, 6mm, 12mm being air gap for all the glasswork in elevation and fixed, movable windows
for all the floors. The outside glass shall be reflective and inside one clear glass.
F. Fly Mesh
The Contractor shall supply and install all the necessary accessories from rubber and brushes and
melamine wheels and fly mesh to all kitchen windows.
F. Sealants and Sealant Materials:

To meet specified requirements of Section 07920, Sealant Work. Sealant specified as per approved
Manufacturer or approved equivalent.
G. Fastenings:
Stainless steel, austenitic AISI type 300 series, selected to prevent galvanic action between fasteners
and components fastened. Where exposed in finished surface, use oval-head countersunk Philips
head screws with shank diameter one screw size smaller than the diameter of holes in fastened
material and color to match adjacent surfaces.
H. Anchors:
Austenitic AISI Type 300 stainless steel.
I. Bituminous Paint:
Black solvent carried bituminous paint, to meet specified requirements of BS 3416,Type 1.
J. Thermal Break: Poured in place polyurethane self-adhering to adjacent aluminum surfaces to provide
a minimum 6mm separation between exterior and interior surfaces of metal frames.
1.02 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate horizontal pivot, hinged and fixed window units as indicated on Drawings.
B. Conceal all fasteners.
C. Ensure that glazing rebate is provided with depth and width to accommodate specified glass in
accordance with glass manufacturer's recommendations. Install glazing gaskets anchored to
aluminum extrusions.
D. Frame Members:
1. Fabricate generally to dimensions and profiles indicated on drawings and to meet specified
requirements. Maintain sight lines indicated and clearances to other construction components.
2. Provide glass setting, supports and stops to minimize possibility of glass breakage caused by
structural inadequacy of frames and as recommended by glass manufacturer.
E. Assembly of Units:
1. Assemble into complete window system including flashing, sills, glass, sealants weather-stripping
and spandrel as required.
2. Join members by welding.
3. Conceal welding where required do not produce any bloom effect on finished surface.
4. Test welds to meet specified requirements of SSA 39/1977.
5. Weld with electrodes and by methods recommended by the base metal manufacturer, and in
accordance with specification requirements, and to avoid distortion or discoloration of exposed
faces. Make welds continuous unless otherwise indicated, grind exposed welds flush, to match
adjacent metal.
6. Accurately fabricate and fit all components in the shop where possible.
7. Join members in shop-fabricated units to fit flush with hairline joints, splined or otherwise backed
up to reinforce.
F. Dissimilar Materials:
1. Protect material from electrolytic action when dissimilar metals are in contact with one another.
2. Protect aluminum concealed in contact with masonry with a heavy coating of bituminous paint.
G. Anchors:
1. Incorporate anchorage to structure to support work adequately when subjected to loads imposed
by use.
2. Allow for complete adjustment in anchorage for levelling and positioning of work during
installation.
H. Organic Coating:
Prepare surfaces and apply organic coating in accordance with coating manufacturer's
recommendations and to meet specified requirements of AAMA 605.2.90 for fluoropolymer coating.
I. Hardware:
Windows unless otherwise stated shall be openable for cleaning. Provide hinges, stays and the like,
concealed or finished to match frame members. Windows shall be lockable.
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Take critical site dimensions before final preparation of shop drawings to ensure that adjustments in
fabrication or installation are provided for, that allowance is made for possible deflection of structure,
and that clearances to other construction have been maintained.
B. Ensure that anchors and inserts, installed by others, are adequate to meet specified requirements.
Make adequate adaptations before installation if required.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Install units plumb, level and in accordance with shop drawings, by qualified experienced
tradesmen and to conform to fabricator's instructions.
2. Do not force units into place, nor superimpose on them loads for which they were not designed.
3. Provide for thermal movement to take place throughout entire specified temperature range
between shop-fabricated assemblies and between assemblies and adjacent construction.
4. Secure units by non-corrosive anchorage materials, use of wood or fibre is not acceptable. Refer
to Division 1 for fastening and anchor requirements.
5. Conceal anchors, clips, blocking and all other attachments.
B. Caulking:
1. Caulk joints between frame members and adjacent construction.
2. Perform caulking incorporated with work of this Section to meet specified requirements of Section
07920, Sealant Work, of the Specifications.
3. Glazing: Install glass in units, as a part of work of this Section and to meet specified requirements
of Section 08800, Glass and Glazing, of the Specifications.

A. Field quality control will be performed by the Employer to ensure that work of this
Section meets specified requirements. Provide the Employer with access for inspection and material
samples to be tested as directed.

A. Remove damaged, dented, defaced, defectively finished or tool marked components and replace with
new.
B. Refinish shop-applied finishes in field only with approval.
C. Cleaning on completion of installation:
1. Remove deposits which affect appearance of units.
2. Remove protective materials.
3. Clean interior and exterior surfaces of aluminum and glass after installation.
Replace if cleaning is impossible.
4. Clean exterior surfaces of glass once every three months during construction.
5. Final cleaning.

SECTION 08710
DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - PART 1 – GENERAL

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SECTION 0 - SECTION INCLUDES

A. Furnish all labor, material, equipment, services and perform all operations necessary to complete all
hardware work for doors as shown on the drawings or inferable there from and/or as specified herein,
in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 08800 - Glass and Glazing.
2. Section 08200 - Wood Doors.
SECTION 1 - DETAIL REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordinate the application of hardware items with door and frame details and with methods of
fastenings.
B. Adaptation of Hardware Items: Where the type of hardware specified is not adaptable to the finished
size of members requiring hardware; submit an item having a similar operation and quality to the
Engineer for review.
C. Templates: Make door hardware to templates, with wood and/or machine screws as applicable to
door and frame details. Furnish templates and schedules to door and frame manufacturers and other
trades requiring same, so that doors and frames can be cut, reinforced and prepared in the shop to
receive the hardware.
D. No names, designs or labels will be permitted on the following items: Face of cylinders, turn pieces or
operating trim of locksets or latch sets, push bar, pull handles, plates, case covers of surface-applied
closing devices and underside of door holder’s arms.
SECTION 2 - REFERENCES
A. ANSI/NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows.
B. AWI - Architectural Woodwork Institute.
C. BHMA - Builders' Hardware Manufactures Association.
D. DHI - Door and Hardware Institute.
E. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code.
F. SDI - Steel Door Institute.
SECTION 3 - REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES

A. Hardware at labeled openings: Furnish hardware in accordance with NFPA standard no. 80for
openings specified, shown or scheduled for a fire-rated opening to receive a UL label. In case of
conflict between type of hardware specified and type required for fire protection, furnish type required
by NFPA and UL.
B. Furnish hardware of type listed by UL/DIN or BS for usage with the types and sizes of fire doors and
frames required. Unless otherwise shown or specified, arrange doors at fire-rated openings to remain
in the normally closed position by furnishing each unit with an automatic closing device. Furnish
active latch bolts of approved throw that cannot be held in retracted position.
C. Wherever panic hardware is required on doors at fire-rated openings comply with above standards for
safety "panic hardware". Furnish hardware to door manufacturer for installation at his factory. Provide
a supplementary label "Fire Exit Hardware" on each exit device to certify that hardware has been
panic load-tested with door.

SECTION 4 - SUBMITTAL
A. Manufacturer’s Literature: Furnish to the Engineer for information only, copies of manufacturer’s
specifications, maintenance and keying manuals and installation instructions (templates to suit each
particular installation) for each item of door hardware. Include photographs, catalogue cuts, marked
templates and other data as may be required to show compliance with these Specifications.
B. Sample Items: In conjunction with the submission of the door hardware schedule, submit to the
Engineer, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, one sample of each
typical item of exposed hardware. Engineer’s review of samples will be for design, pattern, finish
and color only. All other requirements are the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor. Submit
samples of each type of hardware of specified finish.
C. After final review, deliver samples to job site for comparison with hardware delivered for installation.
Unblemished samples may be used in work.
D. Shop Drawings, Door Hardware Schedule: Submit to the Engineer for review, in accordance with the
requirements of the Contract Documents, copies of door hardware schedule covering complete
identification of all items required for the project. Coordinate hardware schedule with door
manufacturer's Door Schedule. Include a separate schedule of key and master key system with final
submittal of schedule. Engineer’s review of schedules shall neither be construed as a complete check
nor shall it relieve the Contractor of responsibility for errors, deviations or omissions from requirement
to provide complete hardware for the project.
E. Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing Employer's final keying
instructions for locks. Include schematic keying diagram and index each key set to unique door
designations.
F. Statement of Application: Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with the requirements of the
Contract Documents, one copy of statement stating that the door hardware work complies with these
specifications, and that the methods of installation were proper and adequate for the condition of
installation and use. The contractor shall sign the Statement of Application.
SECTION 5 - QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed door hardware similar in material,
design and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a
record of successful in-service performance.
B. Supplier Qualifications: Door hardware supplier with warehousing facilities and who is or employs a
qualified Architectural Hardware Engineer, available during the course of the Work to consult with
Contractor, Engineer and Employer about door hardware and keying.
SECTION 6 - PRODUCT HANDLING

A. Package and label each item of hardware separately. Tag each item in accordance with the final
hardware schedule. Each package shall contain appropriate fastenings, instructions and installation
templates. Protect all items from loss or damage in shipment.
SECTION 7 - PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE

A. After delivery of hardware and prior to its installation, meet with the Engineer and manufacturer’s
representatives. Compare final samples with actual hardware delivered to assure acceptability.
Review catalogues, brochures, templates, installation instructions and the final hardware schedule.
Rehearse installation procedures and workmanship with special emphasis on unusual conditions so
as to ensure correct technique of installation and coordination with other work.
B. Finish and color of each hardware item is to match sample furnished to, reviewed and selected by the
Engineer as herein before specified.
SECTION 8 - COORDINATION

A. Coordinate hardware schedule with door manufacturer’s door schedule. The hardware items shall be
checked jointly by the main contractor and hardware supplier to avoid any discrepancies.
SECTION 9 - DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. All items of hardware shall be delivered at the job site completely packaged with all necessary
screws, bolt, miscellaneous parts, instructions and installation templates. Each package shall be
properly labeled, corresponding to the approved hardware schedule’s item numbers.
B. All hardware items shall be stored in a dry, secure area, in a manner to facilitate sorting, checking
and unpacking.
SECTION 10 - WARRANTY
A. All hardware shall be guaranteed in terms of performance and finish for a period of five (5) years
from date of issue of completion certificate.
SECTION 11 - MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS

A. Provide maintenance data, parts lists and manufacturer’s instructions for installation and maintenance
for each type of hardware including door closer, lock case, exit devices, etc.
B. Provide 3 Nos. copies of catalogues for all hardware used for incorporation into maintenance manual.
Only original catalogue shall be used.
PART 2 - PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL
A. Refer to Hardware Set Schedule (to be provided by the manufacturer) for application of individual
hardware items as referenced to each opening or function as indicate in the door drawings.
B. Finish of architectural hardware shall be as indicated in hardware set schedule.
C. The hardware shall be the proper kind of its required use and shall fit its intended location perfectly.
D. Refer below schedule for the wooden door hardware:
Location Hardware
Hinges
Lever Handle
Mortice lock with heavy duty spring mechanism
Entrance Door Euro Profile Knob Cylinder
Door Guard
Door Viewer
Door stopper
Door seal
Hinges
Lever Handle
Bedroom Door / Maid Room Mortice lock with heavy duty spring mechanism
Euro Profile Knob Cylinder
Door stopper
Hinges
Kitchen Door / Store Handle
Door stopper
Locker Room Hinges

Pull Handle
Push Plate
Door Closer
Door stopper
Hinges
Lever Handle
Mortice lock with heavy duty spring mechanism
Toilet & Bath
Euro Profile Knob Cylinder
Door stopper
Tumb turn lock
Hinges
Tumb turn lock
Gym Toilet / Shower
Door stopper
Kick Plate
Hinges
Fire Hose Cabinet
Flush Handle
Hinges
Tel Room / Elec. Room
Handle with door lock set
Hinges
Handle
Ball Catcher
Garbage Room
Door Closer
Pull Handle
Push Plate
Hinges
Water Meter
Handle with door lock set
Hinges
Pull Handle
Fire Stair Push Plate
Push Bar (at GF only)
Overhead Door Closer
Hinges
Laundry (if any) Handle
Ball Catcher
2.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. The hardware supplier shall have extensive experience (minimum 10 years) in supply of contract
hardware to larger projects and must evidence this in form of references from previous jobs.
B. Further the hardware supplier must provide special field service on site to the main contractor in form
of an experienced qualified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC). He must be available at
reasonable times during delivery and installation period.
C. The period availability of AHC to the Main Contractor shall be for as long as period it may show
necessary to the Engineer.
2.2.1 Materials and Acceptable Manufacturers:
Acceptable manufacturers, subject to compliance with specified requirements. Other manufacturers

As per vendor list

2.3 FASTENERS
A. Furnish all finish hardware with all necessary screw bolts and other fasteners as needed for
anchoring the hardware in position, for long life.
B. All fastenings shall harmonies with the hardware with respect to the material and finish.
C. On lead-lined doors no screws shall be used to fix door guard, push plate, kick plate, armour plate,
etc. Use double-sided adhesive tape to fix the protection plates and prevent damage to the lead-
lining.
2.4 MATERIALS
A. Hinges:
Hinges shall be 100mm x 76mm x 3mm ball-bearing stainless steel with stainless steel non-rising pin
as per ANSI A5112. Screws to be of matching finish and to be supplied as woodscrews / metal
screws as per the door scheduled.
B. Door Closers:
The door closers have to be as per EN1154 for conformance to power rating and BS476:
Part22.187 for the fire-resistance. Silver anodized finished.
External Door closers (if any) shall be with back check and full plastic cover (FC). Certified to the
requirements of ANSI A156.4 Grade 1 and to meet the requirements for UL 10C and UBC 7.2 for
positive pressure.
Hold-open facility is not to be used in fire-rated doors. Closers should not be used on the public side
of the doors. Corridors (parallel arm type) and pull side on doors opening from the public areas /
corridors into Car Parking (regular arm type). The door closers should be installed on the push side
of doors opening to exterior. Where specified, use overhead concealed closers, with integrated
electromechanical hold-open and coordinator. The hold open should be released in case of a fire
alarm and alternatively by a wall switch.
C. Floor Closers:
The floor closer should have integral field adjustable hold-open, delayed action and back check
feature. Where floor closers are installed on external doors, or where there is possibility of water
seeping into the closer body, sealing compound to be put into the closer cement box to prevent
rusting.
All floor closers to employ a cam and roller mechanism. The closers shall be capable of controlling
interior and exterior doors up to 1400mm width and 300kg in weight. The closers shall have
selectable multipoint hold-open between approximately 75 degrees and 175degrees, delayed action
to allow delayed closing from 175 degrees to 75 degrees, and have integral mechanical back
check from 80 degrees to prevent damage to the door in case the door is opened with
excessive force. Where single action accessories are used, use 3 degree spindle to
securely close the door in case of heavy wind conditions.
The floor closers should be installed with Terrazo pans and interchangeable spindles to allow
insertion of floor finish material in the pan to avoid cover plates, and also have sealing
compound to prevent water or cleaning solvent from entering the cement case.
The door openings, door leaf weights and location of the openings to be considered in conjunction
with the manufacturer’s recommendations for selecting the right size for the floor closer.
D. Lever Handle Sets:

Lever handle sets for steel doors shall be heavy duty with Roses and Escutcheons in satin stainless
steel, 20mm diameter door lever handles with 8mm spindles; secured by unique non-reversible spring
clips locating into serrations on spindle and preventing lateral movement.
They should also be as per DIN 18273 or BS 476 for fire doors. Collared neck of lever handle pushes
into sprung retaining clips, by providing a 3-pointsecure fixing, with all operating pressures transferred
to the door leaf. The lever handles should be as per EN1906 category 4 for extremely high level
usage, wear and tear.
E. Pull Handles:
Pull handle sets for steel doors 350mm long and 30mm dia. in 630 satin stainless steel finish.
The fixing shall be of type OGRO TG216 single side fixing or TG214 for back to back fixing.
F. Mortise Locks:
Mortise locks for steel doors to be Size 165mm x 85 x 13mm, closed galvanized steel lock case with
night latch function and steel deadbolt, backset should be 55mm, with 24mm square for ends and
suitable for euro profile cylinder at 72mm centers. The locks should be reversible with stainless steel
for ends and strikes. The lock should be as per DIN 18251 class.
G. Cylinders:
Euro profile cylinder with thumb turn, matt nickel-plated brass, keyed under a master key system and
each cylinder to have three (3) change keys.
Cylinders to be euro profile double cylinders as per DIN V18252. The cylinders should have
protection against picking, scanning and manipulation. The cylinder should have a solid steel cam
and special key way.
Master keying to be done in the factory and records maintained. Access to additional keys to be
through authorized representative of Employer only. The master key system should have three(3)
change keys per cylinder and master keys based on key scheduled approved by the Engineer. The
systems should have a capability of expansion of 50% for the future.
The keys to be presented in a suitable key box with relevant formats for recording the key
transactions.
H. Flush Bolts:
All double doors, to have manual flush bolts on the inactive leaf. The bottom bolt should go into dust
proof strike. The finish of the above to be satin stainless steel.
All double doors to have manual flush bolts on the inactive leaf. Lever action Flush Bolts appropriate
to the type of the door (wood/steel/ aluminum) should be used.
I. Exit Devices:
Exit Devices should be in satin stainless steel finish. The touch bar, rail and chassis cover, to be of
true architectural finish.
Exit Devices should be full-length touch bar in satin stainless steel finish. Double doors should have
vertical rod exit device with trim outside on the active leaf, and the inactive leaf should have a vertical
rod exit device without the outside trim.
J. Weather Seals:
All doors to have suitable weather seals to protect against outside dust, wind, heat and cold, UL10B
classified category H listed and air filtration tested to ASTM E283.
All doors to have suitable weather seals to protect against outside dust, wind heat and cold.
Threshold type to be saddle thresholds / panic thresholds UL listed, ADA compliant. Jamb and
header seals to be with pressure sensitive tape 6.4mm in charcoal finish.
K. Armour/Kick Plate:
Armour / Kick plates to be size 850mm high x door width, 1.5mm thick, material stainless steel; satin
finish. The length of the plate is to be the door width, less twice the thickness of the frame stop. Kick
plates to be scheduled on push side of the door.

L. Mop Plate, Kick Plate and Push Plate:

Mop plates to be size 300mm high x door width, 1.5mm thick, material stainless steel; satin finish and
the sizes are as required by the Engineer.
M. Floor Stop:
Floor stops shall be full dome stainless steel floor stop with hard rubber.
PART 3 - PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Receive hardware for doors as shown and scheduled, and as specified in the applicable hardware
portions of these specifications. Store in a locked space to prevent loss.
B. Apply to doors as recommended by hardware manufacturer and as required using proper templates
and instruction sheets. Fit locks and latch sets in their respective doors and remove before painting.
Re-install after painting of doors is completed. Upon completion adjust and lubricate hardware for
proper operation.
C. Maintain mounting heights for doors, from finished floor to center line of hardware item as indicated in
“Recommend Locations for Builders’ Hardware”, published by DHI.
D. After completion of installation, handover complete set of instruction sheets and installation details to
Employer.
E. Instruct Employer's personnel in the proper adjustment and maintenance of hardware.
3.2 FINAL ADJUSTMENTS AND CHECKING

A. The hardware supplier shall assist the Contractor in adjusting and checking the installation of door
hardware. Check test and adjust moving parts to ensure free and smoother operation. Furnish to the
Employer the special tools required to adjust and maintain hardware.
1. After the building is completed and in use, adjust hardware to compensate for air movement and
other conditions, so that it will operate properly at all times.
2. A factory representative of the lock and latch manufacturer shall examine all hardware furnished,
with an Employer's representative, six (6) months after handing over to the Employer, adjust the
hardware for proper operation.
3. Clean and Polish all exposed hardware at the time of handing over to the Employer.
3.3 HARDWARE SET

A. Manufacturers and products herein before are specified for the purpose of establishing minimum
quality standards. Manufacturers which are equal to or better than those specified and with more than
ten (10) year experience in producing products similar to those indicated for the Project with a record
of successful in-service performance may be acceptable subject to submittal of printed products
catalogues and Engineer’s approval.

SECTION 08800
GLASS AND GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. General:
1. Furnish all labour, materials, tools, equipment, and services for glass and glazing in accordance
with provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely co-ordinate with work of other trades.
miscellaneous items, appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a sound, and
complete installation.
4. See Volume 2 for General Requirements.
B. Related work specified elsewhere:

1. Section 08200, Wood doors.
2. Section 08520, Aluminum Windows.
3. Section 08120, Aluminum Door and Frame.
4. Section 07900, SEALANT Work.

A. Glass Performance Requirements:
1. Provide glass of composition, thickness, and heat treatment (annealing, heat strengthening, or full
tempering) if required, for the respective locations to withstand thermal movement, wind loading
and impact loading without failure, as follows:
2. To limit the statistical probability of failure to four lights per thousand.
3. Failure shall include, but shall not be limited to
a. Breakage or loss of glass.
b. Loss of watertight or airtight seal provided by glazing sealants or gaskets.
c. Deterioration or change in colour of glass or glazing materials.
d. Loss of seal at edge binding of sealed insulating units resulting in fogging within the unit,
entry of dirt or moisture into the unit, deterioration of internal glass coating, or other visual or
performance failures.
e. Edge separation or delamination of laminated glass.
f. Peeling, cracking or other deterioration of glass coating.
4. Provide for thermal movement of glass framing members for a temperature range of 10 deg. C to
65 deg. C.
B. Tolerances: refer to section No.01420 reference standard and definitions
1.03 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Glazing Requirements:
Conform to requirements of Flat Glass marketing Association (FGMA), Glazing Manual 1980 (GM)
and Glazing Sealing Systems Manual 1970 (GSSM).
1.04 REFERENCES
A. Reference Standards:
1. The latest issue of the following Reference Standards shall apply as specified in Section 01090:
2. American national Standards Institute:
ANSI Z97.1: Safety performance specifications and methods of test, glazing materials used in
buildings.
3. The American Society for testing and materials:
ASTM C509: Standard specification for cellular elastomeric preformed gasket and sealing material.
ASTM C719: Standard test method for adhesion and cohesion of elastomeric joint sealants under
cyclic movement (Hockman cycle).

ASTM C864: Standard specification for dense elastomeric compression seal gaskets, setting blocks,
and spacers.
ASTM C920: Standard specification for elastomeric joint sealants.

ASTM C1036: Standard specification for flat glass.
ASTM C1048: Standard specification for heat treated flat glass kind HS, kind FT coated and uncoated
glass.
ASTM D412: Standard test methods for rubber properties in tension.

ASTM E774: Standard specification for sealed insulating glass units.
4. British Standard Specification:

BS 952: Glass for glazing.
Part 1, Classification.
Part 2, Terminology for work on glass.
BS 2571: Specification for flexible PVC compounds.
BS 3734: Specification for dimensional tolerances of solid moulded and extruded rubber
products.
BS 4255: Rubber used in preformed gaskets for weather exclusion from buildings.
Part 1: Specification for non-cellular gaskets.
BS 5713: Specification for hermetically sealed flat double glazing units.
BS 5889: Specification for silicone based building sealants.
BS 6206: Specification for impact performance requirements for flat safety glass and safety
plastics for use in buildings.
BS 6262: Code of practice for glazing for buildings.
5. Flat Glass Marketing Association:
Glazing Manual.
Glazing Sealing Systems Manual.
6. Design / system shall conform the United Arab Emirates Codes and standards.
1.05 SUBMITTAL
A. Shop Drawings:
Submit shop drawings of etched glass components and pattern format.
Submit for:
1. Each glass location, with details of glazing condition, showing glass type sand thicknesses,
glazing materials and methods of installation and relation to adjoining construction
B. Samples:
1. Submit 210 mm x 300 mm samples of each specified type of glass and mirror.
2. Submit samples of glass etching.
3. Manufacturer's Literature:
Submit technical descriptive data and installation instruction for each type of glass and glazing
material

A. Store glass in cases in dry ventilated area.
B. Store glass when not in cases vertically, on skids, and with separation between panes and supports
to prevent damage.
C. Handle glass to prevent breakage and damage to edges.
1.07 SITE CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Conditions:
1. Adapt techniques approved by the Employer to ensure that storage, handling and execution
methods suit environmental conditions that are encountered at the site, and cause no damage to
the products specified in this section or to the performance of these products in use.
B. Follow recommendations of the supplier of the products.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Materials and Acceptable Manufacturers: Refer to Vendors/ Manufacturers’ List
As per vendor list
2.01 MATERIALS
2.01.1 General:
a. Refer to specified details and drawings for glass types, sizes and locations and performance
data for glass. All glass shall be of accurate size with clean undamaged edges, ground smooth
when exposed, and surfaces which are not disfigured, free of bubbles, waves, air holes,
scratches and all other defects, and cut to fit the rebates with due allowance for expansion. All
glass of the same type shall be the manufactured product of one company.
b. The entire glass panel shall be supplied and installed by the Main Contractor or Specialist
Contractor who shall further check and verify the specified thickness of glass for installation.
Glass proposed shall withstand impact loads and the wind load for both positive and negative
pressures. The Contractor shall substantiate his proposal by including calculations to confirm or
re-confirm the dimension and glass thickness shown on drawings and details.
c. IF any, all structural glazing shall be done in the factory. Site structural glazing shall not be
accepted.
d. If any, all sealant joints between 2 glass panels shall be in butt joints, and flush both sides.
e. Standardize the glazing beads to be used with block out pieces to take all glass sizes.
f. Provide each type of glass from a Manufacturer and all glazing materials from the same
manufacturer for each glazing condition, to ensure consistent quality.
g. Glazing materials shall be incorporated in a glazing system only if they are compatible with
each other and they are suitable for substrate material and condition as recommended by
sealant manufacturer.
h. Label each piece of glass, and each container of glazing compound or sealant to indicate
manufacturer, type, and quality. Leave labels on glass until final cleaning.
i. Glass:
1. Provide glass to meet specified glass performance requirements.

2. Provide glass types for installations approved by the Employer.
3. Float Glass: To meet specified requirements of ASTM C1036, Type I, Class1, Quality Q3
(transparent flat, clear, glazing select); or equivalent of BS 952, Part 1
4. Clear Wired Glass: Polished Georgian wired plate, 6 mm thick, to meet specified
requirements of ASTM C1036, Type II, Class 1, Form 1, quality Q8(Square); or equivalent
of BS 952, Part 1. (To staircase
5. Tempered Glass: Heat treated, fully tempered, safety glass for performance specified in
ANSI 297.1, and to meet specified requirements of ASTM C1048; or equivalent of BS 952,
Part 1, for performance in accordance with BS 6206.
Main entrance door shall be 12mm thick clear fully tempered glass with stainless steel
frame with heavy duty hardware from approved manufacturer.
6. Laminated Safety Glass: To meet specified requirements of BS 952, Part 1, clear heat
strengthened float glass laminated by heat and pressure to both sides of a clear polyvinyl
butyryl interlayer not less than 0.8 mm thick by specialist manufacturer to ensure that no
bubbling, discoloration or delamination on occurs.

7. Tinted (Heat Absorbing): To meet specified requirements of ASTM C1036, 8. Condition A,

Type 1, Class 2, Quality Q3 float or tempered glass as indicated, and of grey colour
approved by Employer.
9. Reflective glass (Type FG-E) float type, heat strengthened, tempered, bronze coating on
inner surface, light transmittance of 12 percent, shading coefficient of 0.35, 8 mm thick.
j. GLAZING ACCESSORIES:
1. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, of durometer hardness of Shore "A" 70 to 90, and to meet
specified requirements of ASTM C864.
2. Spacer Shims: Neoprene, of durometer hardness of Shore "A" 40 to 50, and to meet
specified requirements of ASTM C864.
k. SEALANT:
1. At Glass-to Metal: Medium modules, one-part, non-acid-curing type silicone, to meet
specified requirements of ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25;Uses NT, G, A, and as
applicable to uses indicated, O; or BS 5889 equivalent. Provide tensile strength of not less
than 965 KPa or more than 1207 KPa at100% elongation when tested in accordance with
ASTM D412 after 14 days at20 deg. C and 50% relative humidity.
2. At Glass-to-Glass: High modules, one-part acid-curing type silicone, to meet specified

requirements of ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25;Uses NT, G, A, and as
applicable to uses indicated O; or BS 5889 equivalent.
3. Sealants shall withstand a 50% increase or decrease when tested in accordance with
ASTM C719, for adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement as measured at
time of application, and shall remain in compliance with other requirements of ASTM C920
l. GLAZING TAPE:
Preformed macropolyisobutylene with continuous integral shim, to meet specified requirements
of ASTM C509, with Shore "A" hardness of 40 to 60, and constructed so that tape compresses
to shim without great force being applied or glass breakage occurring.
Tape type and colour shall be as approved by the Employer.
m. Compression Seal Gaskets:

Preformed neoprene, EPDM or thermoplastic polyolefin rubber of hardness required to maintain
complete seal under conditions of use for each application, and to meet specified requirements
of ASTM C864.
Fully tempered glass (FT):
Interlayer shall be compatible with glass sealants.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's specifications, and specified Flat Glass
Marketing Association manuals, Sigma Glazing Recommendations for Insulating Glass Units, or
BS 952 and BS 6262. Ensure that each material in a glazing system is compatible with the
others.
2. Ensure that projections have been removed from rebates and that sufficient width and depth
clearances are provided for specified glass.
3. Remove stops and store during glazing to avoid damage to them.

4. Remove excess glazing sealants from adjacent surfaces, including glass, during working life of
material, and by methods not harmful to the surfaces.
5. Collect broken glass and cuttings in boxes and remove from site.
6. Do not set any glass without glazing beds or gaskets.
B. Glass:
1. Install glass in thicknesses indicated on drawings or as otherwise required by glass performance
requirements.
2. Cut glass to fit openings and to allow clearances which will ensure that glass is held firmly in
place and is not subjected to stresses.
3. Ensure that glass edges are clean cut, not nipped or seamed.
4. Do not cut or nip tempered glass to fit. Replace oversize or flared lights with entirely new units of
proper dimensions.
C. Glazing Preparation and Methods:

1. Clean glazing rebate surfaces of all traces of dirt, dust, or other contaminants.
2. Use glazing sealants without addition of thinners and from only containers with seals unbroken
until opened for use.
3. Prime all glass rebates except for aluminum unless specified otherwise by the manufacturer of
the sealant utilized. Primer shall be suitable for materials affected.
4. Ensure that glazing sealants and tapes are in full contact with glazing surfaces.
5. Tool gunned sealants with a slight bevel away from glass faces.
D. Positioning Glass:
1. Support glass, in lights of over 2540 mm perimeter, by two setting blocks, one at each quarter
point of each light.
2. Center glass in rebates. Use spacer shims in lights of over 2540 mm perimeter. Setshims of
thickness equal to sealant on all four sides of lights at a maximum of 300mm from the ends and
600 mm on centers in between.
3. Set shims to allow a space of no less than 6 mm between shim edges and sightlines.
4. Spacer shims are not required where glazing tape is used.
E. Tape Bedding at Fixed Stops:

Cut tapes of full depth of stop accurately to length on a work table. Set sill and head tapes first at full
length of rebated opening. Butt jamb tapes into sill and head tapes tightly to weld them together.
Remove protective paper backing only when glass is ready for setting, and ensure that butted joints
of tape are positively filled with applied sealant.
F. Tape Bedding at Stop Beads:

Apply tape to removable stops as specified for fixed stops. Press stops into place and fasten if design
requires.
G. Butted Glass:
Fill joints with sealant with no voids and tool sealant smooth.
H. Glazing Gaskets:
1. Fit gaskets to glass opening at rebates without stretching.
2. Miter and seal gaskets at corners watertight.
I. Mirrors:
1. Verify location and height of mirrors, before mounting, if information is lacking on Drawings.
2. Mount mirrors absolutely plumb and in true planes.
3. Bear unframed mirrors that are supported at bottom on setting blocks at quarter points.
4. Secure mirrors to 10 mm WBP plywood substrate by adhesive as recommended by adhesive
manufacturer and approved by mirror manufacturer.
5. Support wall mounted unframed mirrors by semi-concealed chrome plated clips cushioned by
rubber or plastic tape where support is not otherwise indicated on Drawings.

A. Replace scratched, etched, or defective glazing resulting from manufacture, setting, handling, or
storage before or during installation.

B. Glass accidentally broken or physically damaged, by other than faulty glazing or materials, after
glazing by this Section has been completed shall be replaced.
C. Final cleaning of glass.
D. Remove stains, deposits, marks or blemishes caused by this Section from surfaces of all materials
exposed to view. Replace materials that cannot be cleaned to appear as new.
3.03 PROTECTION
A. Following glazing, mark each light of glass, except heat absorbing, to indicate its presence with a
material, easily removable and harmless to glass. Mark heat absorbing glass by suitable ribbons
secured to frames and kept clear of glass.
B. Provide protection of glass from damage by adjacent welding, windblown materials or objects, and
deposits of construction materials.
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
SECTION - 09200
CEMENT PLASTERING
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Particular Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. SUMMARY
1. This Section includes the following:
2. Portland cement plaster system.
3. Render Plaster.
4. Render accessories.

A. Allowable Tolerances:
1. Generally: Maximum permissible gap between a 3 m straight edge and any point on the
surface shall be 3 mm.
B. Mockups: Prior to installing plaster work, construct panels 3mx3m minimum of finish and application
required to demonstrate aesthetic effects as well as qualities of materials and execution, mock-up
shall not be part of permanent works.

A. Deliver cementitious materials to Project site in original packages, containers, or bundles, labeled
with manufacturer's name, product brand name, and lot number.
B. Store materials inside, under cover, and dry, protected from weather, direct sunlight, surface
contamination, aging, corrosion, and damage from construction traffic and other causes.
C. Cement and lime shall be stored separately, by different types, off the ground in a dry, well ventilated
space.
D. Use cement in rotation within three months of delivery.

A. Environmental Requirements:
1. Maintain continuous adequate ventilation commencing one week before starting plastering and
continuing until plaster is cured to the satisfaction of the Engineer or Engineer's Representative.
2. Illuminate internal surfaces during the work and inspection to closely resemble that provided by the
permanent installation.
B. Protection:
1. Existing work and approaches: protect with boards, dust sheets or the like. Immediately clean off
all droppings onto finished work.
2. Use independent scaffolding to avoid putlog holes and other breaks in surfaces.
C. Sequencing:
1. Do not commence plastering work until:
a. Openings, chases or other apertures required for services are formed.
b. Fixings for pipes, fixing pads and plugs have been fixed.
c. Metal lath, beads and other plaster accessories have been fixed.
d. Making good has been completed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS GENERALLY
A. Portland Cement: To ASTM C150 Type 1.
B. Lime: Special hydrated lime for finishing purposes, ASTM C 206, Type S.
C. Sand: To ASTM C897 Grading:
Sieve size No % Retaining by weight
4 (4.75 mm) 0
8 (2.36 mm) 0
16 (1.18 mm) 40
30 (600 um) 65
50 (300 um) 90
100 (150 um) 100
200 (75 um) 100
D. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 932 and as approved by the Engineer.
E. Water: Quality to be from a potable water supply only.
2.2 MIXES
A. General: All mix proportions are suggestive only, variations to meet local conditions and achieve the
desired finish are permitted within the limits specified in ASTM C926.
B. Interior Plaster (15 mm thick)

1. Scratch Coat:
a. On masonry or concrete: Portland cement, sand and coarse aggregate (3/18”) 1:1:1/4
2. Brown Coat:
a. Portland cement, hydrated lime, sand, 1:1/4: 3.
3. Finish Coat (Skim Coat)
a. Type N hydrated lime in putty as ASTM C 206.
4. Sand:
a. Proportions of mixes given are for damp, loose sand.
C. Exterior Plaster (20 mm thick)

1. Provide galvanized metal lath of heavy duty type weighing 1.84 kg/m2for all plastering area.
2. First coat (scratch coat) consisting of sand and cement, in the ratio of 1:1.
3. Second coat (brown coat) consisting of 350 kgs of Portland cement mixed to 1m3of sand with
adding lime slurry (1:0.25:3 cement, lime, sand).
4. Third coat (final coat) consisting of 300 kgs of Portland cement mixed to 1m3 of sand with adding
lime slurry (1:0.25:3.25 cement, lime, sand).
5. Each coat of plaster to be kept wet with water spray, 3 times a day for 4 days for curing. Final
coat to be left to dry for 30 days after curing period before proceeding with paint application.
D. Render plaster finish coat for application over plastered surfaces shall be as follows for the final coat.
1. Manufacturer’s Standard Factory – Packaged mix consisting of white Portland cement, hydrated
lime, graded marble chips, non-fading iron-oxide colour pigments and chemical agents.
2.3 MIXING
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 926 for base- and finish-coat mixes as applicable to plaster bases,
materials, and other requirements indicated.
B. Gauge Boxes:
1. Measure constituents by volume, using clean gauge boxes made to size to suit volume required.
2. Overfill gauge boxes and strike off excess material with a straight edge.
C. Mix:
1. Before adding water, thoroughly mix materials until uniform in appearance. Add water and mix to
a consistency suitable for the work.

D. Mechanical Mixers:
1. Do not allow batches to remain in mixer longer than 3 minutes.
2. Wash out mixer four times daily if in continuous use, and after each batch if mixer used
intermittently or if a different constituent is used.
E. Initial Set:
1. Do not use plaster after initial set has taken place.
2. Do not retemper or reconstitute mixes.
F. Render Finish Coat: Add water only, comply with manufacturer’s written instructions.
2.4 LATH
A. At intersections of different backing materials.
B. Self-Furring Diamond Mesh (refer to PL walls and SPL ceilings on finish schedules and plaster
exterior wall finish on floor plan legends):
1. Alabama Metal Industries Corp. (AMICO) Self-Furred Diamond Mesh Lath or equal: Expanded
galvanized steel sheets, mesh weight not less than 1.84 kg/m2(3.4 lb/ft2).
2. Others as approved by Engineer.
C. Security Lath (refer to SSPL ceilings on finish schedules):

1. Alabama Metal Industries Corp. (AMICO) Secura Lath or equal.
2. Others as approved by Engineer.
D. Corner Lath:
1. Diamond mesh lath bent to form two 75 mm wide wings.
E. Strip Lath:
1. Diamond mesh minimum 150 mm wide.
F. Tying Wire:
1. 1.16 mm (18 U.S. Std) galvanized mild steel wire.
G. Wire Clips:
1. 4.11 mm (8.U.S.Std) galvanized copper bearing steel hairpin clips.
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. General: Comply with material provisions of ASTM C 1063 and the requirements indicated below;
coordinate depth of accessories with thicknesses and number of plaster coats required.
B. Materials in General:
1. Internal use: galvanized steel.
2. External use: zinc, painted with zinc rich epoxy primer.
C. Corner Beads:
1. 0.45 mm (26 U.S Std.) with maximum 4.8 mm bead and minimum 63 mm wide expanded metal
wings.
D. Edge Beads (Casing/Stop Beads):

1. 0.61 mm (24 U.S Std), depth to suit plaster thickness, with square edge having a minimum 4.8
mm return and a minimum 75 mm wide expanded metal wing.
E. Metal Corner Reinforcement: Expanded, large-mesh, diamond-metal lath fabricated from zinc-alloy or
welded-wire mesh fabricated from 1.2-mm- diameter, zinc-coated(galvanized) wire and specially
formed to reinforce external corners of Portland cement plaster on exterior exposures while allowing
full plaster encasement.
F. Control Joints One-Piece Type: Folded pair of non-perforated screeds in M-shaped configuration,
with expanded flanges.
G. Control Joints Two-Piece Type: Pair of casing beads with back flanges formed to provide slip-joint
action, adjustable for joint widths from 3 to 16 mm.
H. Control Joints for Exterior Plaster: 2-Piece Plaster Control Screed item number PCS-75-75-2-PC as
manufactured by Fry Reglet or approved equal. All other accessories for exterior plaster shall be
type as appropriate for condition and as manufactured by Fry Reglet or approved equal.
I. Lath Attachment Devices: Material and type required by ASTM C 1063 for installations indicated.
J. Tying Wire: 16 mm (18 U.S Std) galvanized mild steel wire.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and the conditions under which the work is to be installed, and do not proceed
until unsatisfactory conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work has been
corrected.
B. Acceptance of Background:
1. Before applying plaster ensure that backgrounds are:
a. Adequately true and level to achieve specified tolerances.
b. Adequately fixed.
c. Free from contamination and loose areas.
d. Adequately prepared to give a good bond.
C. Beads, Lath and Accessories:

1. Ensure that they are properly fixed and accurately located before applying plaster.
2. Ensure any which are rusted, improperly set or otherwise defective are replaced.
3.2 METAL LATH INSTALLATION

A. Manufacturer’s Recommendations:
1. To be strictly followed for all products and materials, and selection of type of lathing suitable for
function indicated.
B. Tension:
1. Fix lathing from the centre outwards so that it is taut.
C. Direction:
1. Fix lath with long dimension and ribs at right angles to support.
D. Same Plane Junctions:

1. Extend lathing not less than 150 mm onto adjacent concrete or masonry surface swhich are to be
plastered.
E. Laps:
1. Do not lap lathing within 100 mm of angles or curves.
2. Diamond mesh/self-furring lathing: lap side edges 13 mm and secure with wire ties at not more
than 150 mm centres.
3. Ribbed lathing: lap side edges by nesting ribs or selvedge and secure with wire ties at not more
than 150 mm centres.
4. End laps: make supports wherever possible. Lap ends 50 mm and secure with wire ties at
a. not more than 150 mm centres for diamond mesh lathing, and
b. each rib for ribbed lathing.
F. Angles:
1. Diamond mesh/self-furring lathing: form by bending into internal angle and lapping at least 150
mm onto adjoining lath, or butt jointing lathing at internal angle and covering with corner lath.
2. Ribbed lathing: butt joint at internal angle and cover with corner lath.
G. Wire Ties:
1. Twist ends tightly together, cut off surplus and bend ends of wire away from face of coating.
H. Concrete and Masonry Backgrounds:
1. Plain lathing: fix with 38 mm clout nails or staples, driven into fixing blocks or plugs at not
exceeding 300 x 300 mm staggered centers.
2. Ribbed lathing: fix with 38 mm clout nails driven through each rib into fixing blocks or plugs at not
exceeding 400 mm centres.
3. Self-furring lathing: fix with 38 mm galvanized self-furring nails at 150 x 150 mm centres.
I. Corner Lath:
1. Fix at internal angles of all surfaces to be plastered, except where otherwise indicated.
2. Fix with wire ties or 38 mm nails, as applicable, at not exceeding 300 mm centres along each
outer edge.
J. Strip Lath:
1. 150 mm wide lath: fix over cracks in concrete or masonry walls and over joints between dissimilar
backgrounds.
2. Fix with galvanized masonry nails at not exceeding 300 mm centres along outer edges.
3.3 ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with referenced lathing and furring installation standards for provision and location
of plaster accessories of type indicated. Miter or cope accessories at corners; install with tight joints
and in alignment. Attach accessories securely to plaster bases to hold accessories in place and in
alignment during plastering.
B. Beads Generally:
1. Fix plumb, square and true to line and level.
2. Concrete/Masonry backgrounds: fix bead on each side of trim with galvanized masonry nails at
not exceeding 300 mm centres.
3. Metal lathing: fix bead with tying wire at not exceeding 600 mm centres.
4. Cut edges of metal beads: paint with black tar-based paint.
C. Corner Beads:
1. Fix at all external angles in plasterwork.
D. Edge Beads:
1. Fix where plasterwork terminates or abuts against dissimilar surfaces other than frames.
E. Control Joint Beads:

1. Fix control joint beads with galvanized nails at not exceeding 300mm centres.
2. Locate Control Joints:
a. Where indicated on approved shop drawings;
b. Where joints or natural breaks occur in backgrounds;
c. At no more than 6m centres.
3.4 PREPARATIONS FOR PLASTERING

A. Generally:
1. Clean plaster bases and substrates for direct application of plaster, removing loose material and
substances that may impair the Work.
2. Cut off projections and concrete fins.
3. Remove efflorescence, laitance, dirt and other loose material by thoroughly dry brushing.
4. Remove all traces of mould oil, paint, grease, dirt and other materials incompatible with coating
by scrubbing with water containing detergent and washing off with plenty of clean water.
B. Ferrous Surfaces:
1. Treat with rust-inhibitive paint where plaster will be in direct contact.
C. Hacking for Key:

1. Roughen concrete surfaces thoroughly and evenly to a depth of 3 mm by sandblasting, bush
hammering or abrasive blasting.
2. Clean surfaces by washing and brushing.
D. Adjust Suction:
1. Wet hacked concrete masonry backgrounds immediately before applying coatings.
3.5 PLASTER APPLICATION

A. Plaster Application Standard: Apply plaster materials, composition, and mixes to comply with ASTM C
926.
B. Do not use excessive water in mixing and applying plaster materials.
C. Flat Surface Tolerances: Do not deviate more than plus or minus 3 mm in 3 m from a true plane in
finished plaster surfaces, as measured by a 3-m straightedge placed at any location on surface.
D. Sequence plaster application with installation and protection of other work so that neither will be
damaged by installation of other.
E. Plaster flush with metal frames and other built-in metal items or accessories that act as a plaster
ground, unless otherwise indicated. Where interior plaster is not terminated at metal frame by casing
beads, cut base coat free from metal frame before plaster sets and groove finish coat at junctures
with metal.
F. Corners: Make internal corners and angles square; finish external corners flush with corner beads on
interior work, square and true with plaster faces on exterior work.
G. Accuracy: Finish surface to a true plane to correct line and level, with all angles and corners to a right
angle unless otherwise specified and with walls and reveals plumb and square.
H. Irregular Surfaces:
1. Curved surfaces, splayed surfaces and other irregular surfaces shall be true to profile.
2. Check with accurate metal forms and templates.
I. Frames:
1. Bring plaster out flush with wood and metal frames and grounds and finish each coat with a small,
neat V joint where plaster finishes against frames.
J. Vertical Surfaces:
1. Plaster shall extend full height from floor to 10 cm above the soffit of ceiling/structural soffit,
unless otherwise indicated.
2. Suspended ceiling: finish plaster flush with system bead or angle, or 75 mm above ceiling soffit
where there is a perimeter bead or angle.
K. Corners: Make internal corners and angles square; finish external corners flush with corner beads on
interior work, square and true with plaster faces on exterior work.
L. Moist-cure plaster base and finish coats to comply with ASTM C 926.
M. Scratch Coat:
1. Apply with sufficient force and cement slurry (1:1) to form a good key, cure for 3days.
N. Brown Coat:
1. Apply the second coat, scratch the surface, cure for 3 days and allow to dry for at least 24 hours.
2. Adjust suction by wetting immediately before applying finish coat.
O. Skim/Finish Coats:
1. Apply the finish coat and finish with a steel trowel to a smooth, hard finish.
2. Cure with a light fog spray of water for 4 days, commencing 12 hours after completion of
application.
3. Protect against rapid drying until thoroughly cured.
4. Final coat to be left to dry for 30 days after curing period before proceeding with paint application.
P. Render Finish Coat:
1. Apply render plaster finish in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations

Q. Making Good:
1. Make good defective or damaged plaster before starting decoration. Cut or rake out defective
work, moisten background and fill with finish coat mix and finish to match adjacent work.
2. Repair, point, cut, and patch plaster around work abutting, setting into or extending into plastered
surfaces on completion of such work.
R. Exposed blockwork to receive paint finish shall be applied with cement mortar slurry, rubbed over
blockwork to fill joints.
3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Cut, patch, replace, repair, and point up plaster as necessary to accommodate other work. Repair
cracks and indented surfaces. Point-up finish plaster surfaces around items that are built into or
penetrate plaster surfaces. Repair or replace work to eliminate blisters, buckles, check cracking, dry
outs, efflorescence, excessive pinholes, and similar defects. Repair or replace work as necessary to
comply with required visual effects.
3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTING

A. Remove temporary covering and other provisions made to minimize spattering of plaster on other
work. Promptly remove plaster from door frames, windows, and other surfaces not to be plastered.
Repair surfaces stained, marred or otherwise damaged during plastering work. When plastering work
is completed, remove unused materials, containers, equipment, and plaster debris.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer
that ensure plaster work is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.

SECTION 09300
TILE
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:

1. Ceramic mosaic tile;
2. Porcelain/ Vitrified Tile.
3. Quarry tile.
4. Paver tile.
5. Glazed wall tile.
6. Special-purpose tile.
7. Waterproof membrane for thin-set tile installations.
8. Stone thresholds installed as part of tile installations.
9. Cementitious backer units.
B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for monolithic slab finishes specified for tile
substrates.
2. Division 7 Section "Cold Fluid-Applied Waterproofing" for waterproofing under thick set mortar
beds.
3. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation
joints in tile surfaces.
4. Division 9 Section "Veneer Plaster" for cementitious backer units installed in veneer plaster
assemblies.
5. Division 9 Section "Portland Cement Plaster" for portland cement scratch coat over metal lath on
wall surfaces.
6. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for cementitious backer units installed in gypsum
wallboard assemblies.
7. Division 9 Section "Dimension Stone Tile."
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Module Size: Actual tile size (minor facial dimension as measured per ASTM C 499) plus joint width
indicated.
B. Facial Dimension: Actual tile size (minor facial dimension as measured per ASTM C 499).
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Static Coefficient of Friction: For tile installed on walkway surfaces, provide products with the
following values as determined by testing identical products per ASTM C 1028:
1. Level Surfaces: Minimum 0.6.
2. Step Treads: Minimum 0.6.
3. Ramp Surfaces: Minimum 0.8.
B. Load-Bearing Performance: For ceramic tile installed on walkway surfaces, provide installations rated
for the following load-bearing performance level based on testing assemblies according to ASTM C
627 that are representative of those indicated for this Project:
1. Moderate: Passes cycles 1 through 10.
2. Light: Passes cycles 1 through 6.
3. Residential: Passes cycles 1 through 3.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of tile, mortar, grout, and other products specified.
B. Shop Drawings: For the following:

1. Tile patterns and locations.
2. Widths, details, and locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile
substrates and finished tile surfaces.
C. Tile Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual tiles or sections of
tiles showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type and composition
of tile indicated. Include Samples of accessories involving color selection.
D. Grout Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual sections of grout
showing the full range of colors available for each type of grout indicated.
E. Samples for Verification: Of each item listed below, prepared on Samples of size and construction
indicated. Where products involve normal color and texture variations, include Sample sets
showing the full range of variations expected.
1. Each type and composition of tile and for each color and texture required, at least (300mm)
square, mounted on braced cementitious backer units, and with grouted joints using product
complying with specified requirements and approved for completed work in color or colors
selected by Engineer.
2. Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory for each color required.
3. Stone thresholds in (150-mm) lengths.
4. Metal edge strips in (150-mm) lengths.
F. Master Grade Certificates: For each shipment, type, and composition of tile, signed by tile
manufacturer and Installer.
G. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that the products furnished comply with
requirements.
H. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names
and addresses, names of Engineer and Employer, and other information specified.
I. Tile Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance of special-purpose tile with
specified requirements.
J. Setting Material Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance of tile-setting and -
grouting products with specified requirements.

A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed tile installations similar in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service
performance.
B. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain each color, grade, finish, type, composition, and variety of tile from
one source with resources to provide products from the same production run for each contiguous
area of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying the Work.
C. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each
mortar, adhesive, and grout component from a single manufacturer and each aggregate from one
source or producer.
D. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this Section
from one source and by a single manufacturer for each product:
1. Stone thresholds.
2. Cementitious backer units.
3. Joint sealants.
4. Waterproofing.
E. Mockups: Before installing tile, construct mockups for each form of construction and finish required to
verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of
materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials
indicated for completed Work.
1. Locate mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by
Engineer.
2. Notify Engineer 7 days in advance of the dates and times when mockups will be constructed.
3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
4. Obtain Engineer's approval of mockups before proceeding with final unit of Work.
5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the
completed Work.
a. When directed, demolish and remove mockups from Project site.

b. Approved mockups in an undisturbed condition at the time of Substantial Completion may
become part of the completed Work.
F. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements of

Division 1 Section "Project Meetings."

A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until
time of use. Comply with requirement of ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealed tile packages.
B. Prevent damage or contamination to materials by water, freezing, foreign matter, and other causes.
C. Handle tile with temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated surfaces from
contacting backs or edges of other units. If coating does contact bonding surfaces of tile, remove
coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile.

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is completed and ambient
temperature and humidity conditions are being maintained to comply with referenced standards and
manufacturer's written instructions.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Deliver extra materials to Employer. Furnish extra materials described below that match
products installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels
describing contents.
1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed, for
each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated in the drawings.
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Tile Products:
As per vendor list.
2. Tile-Setting and -Grouting Materials:
As per vendor list.
2.2 PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1, "Specifications for Ceramic
Tile," for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated.
1. Provide tile complying with Standard Grade requirements, unless otherwise indicated.
2. For facial dimensions of tile, comply with requirements relating to tile sizes specified in
Part 1 "Definitions" Article.

B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI
standards referenced in "Setting Materials" and "Grouting Materials" articles.
C. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Where manufacturer's standard products are indicated for tile, grout,
and other products requiring selection of colors, surface textures, patterns, and other appearance
characteristics, provide specific products or materials complying with the following requirements:
1. Match Engineer's samples.
2. Provide Engineer's selections from manufacturer's full range of colors, textures, and patterns for
products of type indicated.
3. Provide tile trim and accessories that match color and finish of adjoining flat tile.
D. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges selected during Sample
submittals, blend tile in the factory and package so tile units taken from one package show the
same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples.
E. Mounting: Where factory-mounted tile is required, provide back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies as
standard with manufacturer, unless another mounting method is indicated.
1. Where tile is indicated for installation in swimming pools, on exteriors, or in wet areas, do not use
back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies unless tile manufacturer specifies in writing that this type
of mounting is suitable for these kinds of installations and has a record of successful in-service
performance.
F. Factory-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type, protect exposed
surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout by pre-coating them with a continuous film
of petroleum paraffin wax, applied hot. Do not coat unexposed tile surfaces.
2.3 TILE PRODUCTS

A. Unglazed Ceramic Mosaic Tile: Provide factory-mounted flat tile complying with the following
requirements:
1. Composition: Vitreous natural clay with abrasive admixture.
2. Module Size: (25.4 by 25.4 mm) or as approved.
3. Nominal Thickness: (6.35 mm).
4. Face: Plain with cushion edges.
B. Glazed Ceramic Mosaic Tile: Provide factory-mounted flat tile complying with the following
requirements:
1. Composition: Vitreous natural clay.
2. Module Size: (25.4 by 25.4 mm).
3. Thickness: (6.35 mm).
4. Face: Plain with cushion edges.
C. Unglazed Paver Tile: Provide flat tile complying with the following requirements:
1. Composition: Natural clay.
2. Facial Dimensions: (200 by 200 mm).
7. Face: Pattern of design indicated, with square or cushion edges.
8. For latex-portland cement mortared and grouted paver tile, precoat with temporary protective
coating.
D. Glazed Wall Tile: Provide flat tile complying with the following requirements:
1. Module Size: 4-1/4 by 4-1/4 inches (108 by 108 mm) or as approved.
2. Module Size: 200 by 200 mm or as approved.
3. Module Size: 300 by 300 mm or as approved.
4. Thickness: (8 mm).
5. Face: Plain with modified square edges or cushion edges.
6. Mounting: Factory back-mounted.
E. Trim Units: Provide tile trim units to match characteristics of adjoining flat tile and to comply with the
following requirements:
1. Size: As indicated, coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable.
2. Shapes: As follows, selected from manufacturer's standard shapes:
a. Base for Portland Cement Mortar Installations: Coved.
b. Base for Thin-Set Mortar Installations: Straight.
c. Wainscot Cap for Portland Cement Mortar Installations: Bull nose cap.
d. Wainscot Cap for Thin-Set Mortar Installations: Surface bull nose.
e. Wainscot Cap for Flush Conditions: Regular flat tile for conditions where tile wainscot is
shown flush with wall surface above.
f. External Corners for Portland Cement Mortar Installations: Bull nose shape with a radius of at
least (19 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
g. External Corners for Thin-Set Mortar Installations: Surface bull nose.
h. Internal Corners: Field-butted square corners, except with coved base and cap angle pieces
designed to member with stretcher shapes.
i. Tapered Transition Tile: Shape designed to effect transition between thickness of tile floor
and adjoining floor finishes of different thickness, tapered to provide a reduction in thickness
from (12.7 to 6.35 mm) across nominal (100-mm) dimension.
F. Accessories for Glazed Wall Tile: Provide vitreous china accessories of type and size indicated and in
color and finish to match adjoining glazed wall tile.
1. One soap holder for each shower and tub indicated.

2. One roll paper holder at each water closet.
2.4 STONE THRESHOLDS

A. General: Provide stone thresholds that are uniform in color and finish, fabricated to sizes and profiles
indicated to provide transition between tile surfaces and adjoining finished floor surfaces.
1. Fabricate thresholds to heights indicated, but not more than (12.7 mm) above adjoining finished
floor surfaces, with transition edges beveled on a slope of no greater than 1:2.
B. Granite Thresholds: Provide granite thresholds complying with ASTM C 615 requirements.
1. Match Engineer's sample for Type, color and finish.
C. Marble Thresholds: Provide marble thresholds complying with ASTM C 503 requirements for exterior
use and with a minimum abrasive-hardness value of 10 per ASTM C 241.
1. Match Engineer's sample for type, color and finish.
D. Slate Thresholds: Provide nonfading slate thresholds with honed finish complying with ASTM C 629
requirements for interior use and abrasion resistance.
1. Match Engineer's sample for color.
2.5 WATERPROOFING FOR THIN-SET TILE INSTALLATIONS

A. General: Provide products that comply with ANSI A118.10 and the descriptions in this Article.
B. Latex-Rubber Waterproofing: Manufacturer's standard factory-packaged, job-mixed, proprietary, 2-

part formulation consisting of liquid-latex rubber and powder for trowel application and glass-fiber-fabric
reinforcing.
C. Acrylic-Latex Waterproofing: Manufacturer's standard proprietary product consisting of one- part

acrylic-latex additive and flexible cementitious fiber mortar, factory packaged for job-mixing and
trowel application.

D. Urethane Waterproofing and Tile-Setting Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard proprietary product

consisting of 1-part liquid-applied urethane in a consistency suitable for trowel application and
intended for use as both waterproofing and tile-setting adhesive in a 2-step process.
2.6 SETTING MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement Mortar Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI A108.1Aand as
specified below:
1. Cleavage Membrane: Asphalt felt, ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15), or polyethylene sheeting ASTM
D 4397, (0.1 mm) thick.
2. Reinforcing Wire Fabric: Galvanized, welded wire fabric, (50.8 by 50.8 mm) by (1.57-mm)
diameter; comply with ASTM A 185 and ASTM A 82, except for minimum wire size.
3. Expanded Metal Lath: Provide diamond-mesh lath complying with ASTM C 847 for requirements
indicated below:
a. Base Metal and Finish for Interior Applications: Fabricate lath from uncoated or zinc-coated
(galvanized) steel sheet, with uncoated steel sheet painted after fabrication into lath.
b. Base Metal and Finish for Exterior Applications: Fabricate lath from zinc-coated (galvanized)
steel sheet.
c. Configuration over Studs and Furring: Flat.
d. Configuration over Solid Surfaces: Self-furring.
e. Weight: (1.8 kg/sq. m).
4. Latex additive (water emulsion) described below, serving as replacement for part or all of gaging
water, of type specifically recommended by latex additive manufacturer for use with job-mixed
portland cement and aggregate mortar bed.
a. Latex Additive: Manufacturer's standard.
B. Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A118.1.

1. For wall applications, provide nonsagging, latex-portland cement mortar complying with ANSI
A118.4 for mortar of this type defined in Section F-2.1.2.
C. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A118.4, composed as follows:

1. Prepackaged Dry-Mortar Mix: Factory-prepared mixture of portland cement; dry, redispersible,
ethylene vinyl acetate additive; and other ingredients to which only water needs to be added at
Project site.
a. For wall applications, provide non-sagging, latex-portland cement mortar complying with
ANSI A118.4 for mortar of this type defined in Section F-2.1.2.
2. Mixture of Dry-Mortar Mix and Latex Additive: Mixture of prepackaged dry-mortar mix and liquid-
latex additive complying with the following requirements:
a. Latex Additive: Styrene butadiene rubber.
b. For wall applications, provide non sagging, latex-portland cement mortar complying with
ANSI A118.4 for mortar of this type.
D. Medium-Bed, Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: Provide materials composed as follows, with physical
properties equaling or exceeding those required for thin-set mortars based on testing of medium-bed
specimens according to ANSI A118.4:
1. Prepackaged Dry-Mortar Mix: Factory-prepared mixture of portland cement; dry, redispersible,
ethylene vinyl acetate additive; and other ingredients to which only water needs to be added at
Project site.
2. Mixture of Dry-Mortar Mix and Latex Additive: Mixture of prepackaged dry-mortar mix and liquid-
latex additive complying with the following requirements:
a. Latex Additive: Styrene butadiene rubber.
E. Conductive Dry-Set Mortar: ANSI A118.2.

F. Chemical-Resistant, Water-Cleanable, Ceramic Tile-Setting and -Grouting Epoxy:

ANSI A118.3.
1. Provide product capable of resisting continuous and intermittent exposure to temperatures of up to
(60 deg C) and (100 deg C), respectively, as certified by mortar manufacturer for intended use.
G. Water-Cleanable, Tile-Setting Epoxy Adhesive: ANSI A118.3.
H. Chemical-Resistant Furan Mortar: ANSI A118.5, with carbon filler, unless otherwise indicated.
I. Modified-Epoxy Emulsion Mortar: ANSI A118.8.
J. Organic Adhesive: ANSI A136.1, Type I.
2.7 GROUTING MATERIALS

A. Sand-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A108.10, composed of white or gray cement and white orcolored
aggregate as required to produce color indicated.
B. Commercial Portland Cement Grout (Sanded Grout): ANSI A118.6, color as indicated, for joints (3.2
mm) or wider.
C. Dry-Set Grout: ANSI A118.6, color as indicated.
D. Latex-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6 for materials described in Section H-2.4, composed as
follows:
1. Factory-Prepared, Dry-Grout Mixture: Factory-prepared mixture of portland cement; dry,

redispersible, ethylene vinyl acetate additive; and other ingredients to produce the following:
a. Unsanded grout mixture for joints (3.2 mm) and narrower.
b. Sanded grout mixture for joints (3.2 mm) and wider.
2. Mixture of Dry-Grout Mix and Latex Additive: Mixture of factory-prepared, dry-grout mix and latex
additive complying with the following requirements:
a. Unsanded Dry-Grout Mix: Dry-set grout complying with ANSI A118.6 for materials described
in Section H-2.3, for joints 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) and narrower.
b. Sanded Dry-Grout Mix: Commercial portland cement grout complying with ANSI A118.6 for
materials described in Section H-2.1, for joints 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) and wider.
c. Latex Additive: Styrene butadiene rubber.
E. Chemical-Resistant Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3, color as indicated.

1. Provide product capable of resisting continuous and intermittent exposure to temperatures of up
to (60 deg C) and (100 deg C), respectively, as certified by mortar manufacturer for intended use.
F. Chemical-Resistant Furan Grout: ANSI A118.5.
G. Grout for Pregrouted Tile Sheets: Same silicone rubber used in factory to pregrout tile sheets.
2.8 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealants of base polymer
and characteristics indicated that comply with applicable requirements of Division 7 Section" Joint
Sealants."
B. Colors: Provide colors of exposed sealants to match colors of grout in tile adjoining sealed joints,
unless otherwise indicated.
C. One-Part, Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920; Type S; Grade NS; Class 25;Uses NT, G,
A, and, as applicable to nonporous joint substrates indicated, O; formulated with fungicide, intended
for sealing interior ceramic tile joints and other nonporous substrates that are subject to in-service
exposures of high humidity and temperature extremes.

D. Multipart, Pourable Urethane Sealant for Use T: ASTM C 920; Type M; Grade P; Class 25;Uses T, M,
A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.
E. Chemical-Resistant Sealants: For chemical-resistant floors, provide sealants compatible with
chemical-resistant mortars and grouts, approved for use indicated by manufacturers of both
mortar/grout and sealant and with chemical-resistance properties equivalent to mortar/grout.
F. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products which may be incorporated into the
Work include.
2.9 CEMENTITIOUS BACKER UNITS

A. Provide cementitious backer units complying with ANSI A118.9, of thickness and width indicated
below, and in maximum lengths available to minimize end-to-end butt joints.
1. Thickness: Manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less than (11.1 mm), unless otherwise
indicated.
2. Width: Manufacturer's standard width, but not less than 800 mm.
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, cementitious backer units that may be
incorporated into the Work included.
2.10 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland-cement-based
formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations indicated.
B. Metal Edge Strips: White-zinc-alloy terrazzo strips or aluminum, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) wide at top edge
with integral provision for anchorage to mortar bed or substrate, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Corner bead or tile edging trim shall be BSS or approved finish aluminum. Shape shall be as per
Engineer/ Architect’s approval.
D. Temporary Protective Coating: Provide product indicated below that is formulated to protect exposed
surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout; is compatible with tile, mortar, and grout
products; and is easily removable after grouting is completed without damaging grout or tile.
1. Petroleum paraffin wax, fully refined and odorless, containing at least 0.5 percent oil with a
melting point of (49 to 60 deg C) per ASTM D 87.
2. Grout release in form of manufacturer's standard proprietary liquid coating that is specially
formulated and recommended for use as a temporary protective coating for tile.
E. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and grout
surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout
manufacturers.
2.11 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT

A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturers'
written instructions.
B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions.
C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other
procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance
characteristics for installations indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
installed tile.

Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free from oil, waxy films, and curing compounds;
and within flatness tolerances required by referenced ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards for
installations indicated.
Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and
similar items located in or behind tile has been completed before installing tile.
Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if not coordinated,
adjust latter in consultation with Engineer.
B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or
silicone and are incompatible with tile-setting materials by using a terrazzo or concrete grinder, a
drum sander, or a polishing machine equipped with a heavy-duty wire brush.
B. Provide concrete substrates for tile floors installed with dry-set or latex-portland cement mortars that
comply with flatness tolerances specified in referenced ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards
for installations indicated.
1. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds per tile-setting material manufacturer's written
instructions to fill cracks, holes, and depressions.
2. Remove protrusions, bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding.
C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges selected during Sample
submittals, verify that tile has been blended in the factory and packaged so tile units taken from one
package show the same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved
Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before
installing.
D. Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type or needed to prevent
adhesion or staining of exposed tile surfaces by grout, protect exposed surfaces of tile against
adherence of mortar and grout by precoating them with a continuous film of temporary protective
coating indicated below, taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces:
1. Petroleum paraffin wax or grout release.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. ANSI Tile Installation Standards: Comply with parts of ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards
in "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to types of setting and grouting materials
and to methods.
B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form a complete
covering without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions,
edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.
C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible
surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned
joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or
covers overlap tile.
D. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints when adjoining tiles
on floor, base, walls, and trim are the same size. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both
directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform joint
widths, unless otherwise indicated.

1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets the same width as joints within tile
sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work.
E. Lay out tile wainscots to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated.
F. Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control,
contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated during installation of setting materials, mortar beds,
and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles.
1. Locate joints in tile surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates.
2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint
Sealants."
G. Grout tile to comply with the requirements of the following tile installation standards:
1. For ceramic tile grouts (sand-portland cement, dry-set, commercial portland cement, and latex-
portland cement grouts), comply with ANSI A108.10.
2. For chemical-resistant epoxy grouts, comply with ANSI A108.6.
3. For chemical-resistant furan grouts, comply with ANSI A108.8.
H. At showers, tubs, and where indicated, install cementitious backer units and treat joints to comply
with ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's written instructions for type of application indicated.
3.4 WATERPROOFING INSTALLATION

A. Install waterproofing to comply with waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions to produce a
waterproof membrane of uniform thickness bonded securely to substrate.
B. Do not install tile over waterproofing until waterproofing has cured and been tested to determine that
it is watertight.
3.5 EXPANSION JOINT (If any)

Expansion Joints shall have approved metal covering system as per Engineer/ Architect’s approval.
3.6 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION

A. General: Install tile to comply with requirements in the Ceramic Tile Floor Installation, including those
referencing ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards.
B. Joint Widths: Install tile on floors with the following joint widths:
1. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: (1.6 mm).
2. Paver Tile: (3 mm).
C. Back Buttering: For installations indicated, obtain 100 percent mortar coverage by complying with
applicable special requirements for back buttering of tile in referenced ANSI A108 series of tile
installation standards:
1. Exterior tile floors.
2. Tile floors in wet areas, including but not limited to, showers, tub enclosures, and swimming
pools.
3. Tile floors installed with chemical-resistant mortars and grouts.
4. Tile floors composed of tiles (203 by 203 mm) or larger.
5. Tile floors composed of rib-backed tiles.
D. Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds at locations indicated; set in same type of setting bed as
abutting field tile, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Set thresholds in latex-portland cement mortar for locations where mortar bed would otherwise be
exposed above adjacent nontile floor finish.
E. Metal Edge Strips: Install at locations indicated or where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet,
wood, or other flooring that finishes flush with top of tile.
F. Metal beading / edge trim shall be as per Engineer / Architect’s approved profile and finish.
3.7 WALL TILE INSTALLATION

A. Install types of tile designated for wall installations to comply with requirements in the Ceramic Tile
Wall Installation, including those referencing ANSI setting-bed standards.
B. Install metal lath and scratch coat to walls to comply with ANSI A108.1A, Section 4.1.
C. Joint Widths: Install tile on walls with the following joint widths:
1. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: (1.6 mm).
2. Wall Tile: (1.6 mm).
D. Back Buttering: For installations indicated, obtain 100 percent mortar coverage by complying with
applicable special requirements for back buttering of tile in referenced ANSI A108 series of tile
installation standards:
1. Exterior tile wall installations (If any).
2. Tile wall installations in wet areas, including showers, tub enclosures, laundries, and swimming
pools.
3. Tile installed with chemical-resistant mortars and grouts.
4. Tile wall installations composed of tiles (203 by 203 mm) or larger.
3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTING

A. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of
foreign matter.
1. Remove latex-portland cement grout residue from tile as soon as possible.
2. Unglazed tile may be cleaned with acid solutions only when permitted by tile and grout
manufacturer's written instructions, but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Protect metal
surfaces, cast iron, and vitreous plumbing fixtures from effects of acid cleaning.
Flush surface with clean water before and after cleaning.3. Remove temporary protective coating
by method recommended by coating manufacturer that is acceptable to brick and grout
manufacturer. Trap and remove coating to prevent it from clogging drains.
B. Finished Tile Work: Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped, broken, un-
bonded, and otherwise defective tile work.
C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer
that ensure tile is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.
1. When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply a protective coat of neutral protective cleaner to
completed tile walls and floors. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering
during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear.
2. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least 7 days after grouting is completed.
D. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile surfaces.
3.9 CERAMIC TILE FLOOR INSTALLATION SCHEDULE

A. Ceramic Tile Floor Installation: Where exterior floor installations of this designation are indicated,
comply with the following:
1. Tile Type: Unglazed ceramic, Glazed mosaic tile.
As per vendor list
Below is only applicable if ANSI A108.1B or ANSI A108.1C is retained for setting bed.
2. Installation Method: (cement mortar bed bonded to concrete slab) TCA F101 WITH ANSI
A108.1A, ANSI A108.1B, OR ANSI A108.1C.
3. Installation Method: (thin-set mortar bonded to concrete slab) TCA F102 WITH ANSI 108.5.
4. Setting Bed and Grout: ANSI A108.1C with the following mortar and grout: ANSI A108.1C with
TCA F101.
B. Ceramic Tile Floor Installation: Where interior floor installations of this designation are
indicated, comply with the following:
1. Tile Type: Unglazed ceramic tile. Provide products from the following:
As per vendor list

2. Installation Method: TCA F111 (cement mortar bed with cleavage membrane, over concrete
subfloor).
3. Setting Bed and Grout: ANSI A108.1B, ANSI A108.1C with the following mortar and grout:
a. Latex-portland cement mortar.
b. Dry-set grout.
c. Unsanded latex-portland cement grout.
3.10 CERAMIC TILE WALL INSTALLATION SCHEDULE

A. Ceramic Tile Wall Installation: Where interior wall installations of this designation are indicated,
comply with the following:
1. Tile Type: Glazed wall tile. Provide products from the following:
As per vendor list
2. Installation Method: TCA W211, ANSI A108.1A, ANSI A108.1B, OR ANSI A108.1C (cement
mortar bed bonded to clean, sound, dimensionally stable masonry or concrete).
3. Setting Bed and Grout: ANSI A108.1B, ANSI A108.1C with the following mortar and grout:
b. Dry-set grout.
B. Ceramic Tile Wall Installation CTW [#]: Where interior wall and shower-receptor installations of this
designation are indicated, comply with the following:
1. Tile Type: Glazed wall tile. Provide products from the following:
As per vendor list
2. Installation Method: TCA B414 and TCA W221 with ANSI A108.1A, ANSI A108.1B (shower
receptor with cement mortar bed over solid backing on walls).
3. Setting Bed and Grout: ANSI A108.1A, ANSI A108.1B and the following grout:
b. Dry-set grout.

ECTION 09505
GYPSUM BOARD SUSPENDED CEILING
PART 1 - GENERAL
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
volumes, Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

A. Furnish all labour, materials, plant, tools and equipment, and perform all operations and services
necessary for the supply and installation of the following:
1. Gypsum board panels for ceilings.
2. Steel framing systems to receive gypsum board.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 09100 – Metal Furring
2. Section 09900 - Painting.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data for each type of product specified.
B. Shop Drawings showing locations, fabrication, and installation of control and expansion joints
including plans, elevations, sections, locations of access panels, details of components, and
attachments to other units of Work.
C. Samples:
1. Trim Accessories: Full size sample in 300mm long length and suspension system.

A. Applicator: Company specializing in gypsum board systems work with five year experience.
B. Mockups: Prior to commencing gypsum board ceiling, construct mockups of at least 9 sq. m in
surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects of finishes as well as qualities of materials and
execution. The mock-up should indicate fixture of light, supply and return air diffuser, and sprinkler.
Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of in-place unit of Work.

A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and identification
of manufacturer or supplier.
B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather,
direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. Neatly stack
gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
As per vendor list.
2.02 STEEL FRAMING COMPONENTS FOR SUSPENDED AND FURREDCEILINGS

A. Components, General: Comply with ASTM C 754.
B. Wire Ties: ASTM A 641 (ASTM A 641M), Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062 inch (1.6 mm) thick.
C. Hangers: 5mm X 25mm Galvanized steel straps (ASTM A653M, G60) or6mm diameter galvanized
rods (ASTM A510) as approved and height adjustable.
D. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base metal thickness of 1.37mm, a
minimum 12.7mm wide flange with ASTM A653M, hot-dip galvanized zinc coating, 38.1 mm deep,
0.707 kg/m, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Furring Channels: Commercial-steel sheet with ASTM A653M, hot-dip galvanized zinc coating, ASTM
C645, 22 mm deep, 0.45 kg/m unless otherwise indicated.
F. All steel framing/suspension members are to be hot-dip galvanized.
2.03 GYPSUM BOARD PRODUCTS

A. Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and
correspond with support system indicated.
B. Gypsum Board: ASTM C 36 and as follows:

1. Type: Water resistant type in wet areas.
2. Edges: Tapered and featured (rounded or beveled) for prefilling.
3. Thickness: As indicated on drawings.
2.04 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Accessories for Interior Installation: Complying with ASTM C 1047 and requirements indicated below:
1. Material: Steel sheet zinc coated by hot-dip process or rolled zinc.
i. Corner bead on outside corners, unless otherwise indicated.
ii. LC-bead with both face and back flanges; face flange formed to receive joint compound. Use
LC-beads for edge trim, unless otherwise indicated.
iii. One-piece control joint formed with V-shaped slot and removable strip covering slot opening.
iv. Extruded-Aluminum Edge Moldings and Trim: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's
extruded-aluminum edge moldings and trim of profile indicated including splice plates, corner
pieces, and attachment and other clips, complying with the following requirements:
2. Aluminum Alloy: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of
use and finish indicated, and with not less than the strength and durability properties of aluminum
extrusions complying with ASTM B 221/B 221M for alloy and temper 6063-T5, powder coated
finish.
2.05 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475.
B. Joint Tape for Gypsum Board: Paper reinforcing tape, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Drying-Type Joint Compounds for Gypsum Board: Factory-packaged vinyl-based products complying
with the following requirements for formulation and intended use.
1. Ready-Mixed Formulation: Factory-mixed product.
2. Taping compound formulated for embedding tape and for first coat over fasteners and face
flanges of trim accessories.
i. Topping compound formulated for fill (second) and finish (third) coats.
D. Retempering of joint compound will not be permissible, nor will the use of partially set joint compound
be permitted.
2.06 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT

A. Nonsag, paintable, non-staining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834that effectively reduces
airbone sound transmission through perimeter joints as demonstrated by representative assemblies
according to ASTME90.
2.07 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.
B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002 unless otherwise indicated.
C. Expansion (Control) Joints: Provide as indicated or as required.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates to which gypsum board assemblies attach or abut cast-in-anchors, and structural
framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance of assemblies specified in this Section. Do not proceed with
installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Ceiling Anchorages: Coordinate installation of ceiling suspension systems with installation of
overhead structural assemblies to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to
building structure have been installed to receive ceiling hangers that will develop their full strength
and at spacing required to support ceilings.
3.03 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING FOR SUSPENDED AND FURRED CEILINGS

A. Installation Standards: ASTM C 754, and ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing installation.
B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building structural members and as follows:
1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum
that are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. Splay hangers only where
required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, counters playing,
or other equally effective means.
2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that
interfere with the location of hangers required to support standard suspension system members,
install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices.
Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance
limits established by referenced standards.
3. Secure hangers either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and
fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause them
to deteriorate or otherwise fail.
C. Install suspended steel framing components in sizes and at spacings indicated, but not less than that
required by the referenced steel framing installation standard.
1. Hangers: 800mm O.C.
2. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): 800mm O.C.
3. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 400mm O.C.
D. Wire-tie or clip furring members to main runners and to other structural supports as indicated.
E. Provide additional framing and blocking at openings and to support built-in anchorage and attachment
devices for other work.
3.04 APPLYING AND FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL

A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: ASTM C 840 andGA-216.
B. Install ceiling board panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid
abutting end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels
not less than one framing member.
C. Install gypsum panels with face side out. Do not install imperfect, damaged, or damp panels. Butt
panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1.5 mm of open space
between panels. Do not force into place.
D. Locate both edge or end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate
supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges
against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Avoid joints other
than control joints at corners of framed openings where possible.

E. Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts.

F. Form control and expansion joints at locations indicated and as required, with space between edges
of adjoining gypsum panels, as well as supporting framing behind gypsum panels.
G. Fasten gypsum board to furring channels at not more than 300mm O.C.
3.05 GYPSUM BOARD APPLICATION METHODS

A. Single-Layer Application:
1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels prior to wall/partition board application to the greatest extent
possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated.
3.06 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Install corner bead at external corners.
B. Install edge trim where edge of gypsum panels would otherwise be exposed. Provide edge trim type
with face flange formed to receive joint compound, except where other types are indicated.
C. Install control joints at locations required and in specific locations approved by Engineer.
3.07 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener
heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration.
Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.
B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged areas using setting-type joint compound.
C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim accessories having flanges not
requiring tape.
D. Fill openings around cutouts with compound or acoustical sealant as recommended by manufacturer.
E. Reinforce all joints at tapered edges and interior corners with joint reinforcing tape set in joint
compound.
F. Fill all joints, fastener heads, trim recesses, cracks and other depressions with joint compound. Finish
smooth and flush so that joints, screws and other items will not be visible after painting.

A. Above-Ceiling Observation: Engineer will conduct an above-ceiling observation prior to installation of
gypsum board ceilings and report any deficiencies in the Work observed. Do not proceed with
installation of gypsum board to ceiling support framing until deficiencies have been corrected.
B. Tolerances: Finish surface within 3mm in 2.4 meter for plumb, level, warp and bow.
3.09 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Promptly remove any residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to Installer, that ensure
gypsum board assemblies are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.

SECTION 09600
STONE PAVING AND FLOORING
1.1 GENERAL
A. Stone Abrasion Resistance: Minimum abrasive-hardness value of 12, as determined per ASTM C
241.
B. Static Coefficient of Friction: ASTM C 1028, values as follows:

1. Level Surfaces: A minimum of 0.6.
2. Ramp Surfaces: A minimum of 0.8.
C. Submittals: Submit the following:

1. Product Data: For each variety of stone, stone accessory, and other manufactured products
specified.
2. Shop Drawings: Show details of fabrication and installation of stone paving and flooring, including
dimensions and profiles of stone units; arrangement and details of jointing; and details showing
relationship with, attachment to, and reception of related work.
3. Stone Samples: Sets for each color, grade, finish, and variety of stone required; not less than
(300mm) square.
D. Mockups: Before installing stone paving and flooring, construct mockups, in locations and of sizes
indicated, to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects
and qualities of materials and execution.
1.2 PRODUCTS
A. Provide stone from a single quarry for each variety of stone required.
1. Match Engineer's samples for variety, color, finish, and other stone characteristics relating to
aesthetic effects.
2. Match existing stone for variety, color, and finish where stone is indicated to match existing.
3. Provide stone that is free of cracks, seams, and starts impairing structural integrity or function.
4. Provide matched blocks extracted from contiguous locations in a single bed of quarry stratum
unless stone from blocks randomly selected for aesthetic effect is approved by Engineer.
B. Granite: ASTM C 615 and the National Building Granite Quarries Association's (NBGQA)
"Specifications for Architectural Granite."
C. Limestone: ASTM C 568.
D. Marble: ASTM C 503.
E. Quartz-Based Stone: ASTM C 616.
F. Slate: ASTM C 629 with a fine, even grain and with uniform, unfading color from clear, sound stock.
G. Pattern: As follows:
1. Rectangular-grid pattern of (457 by 457 mm).
2. Rectilinear pattern of (305-by-610-mm) units, laid in brickwork pattern.
3. Random, rectangular pattern composed of units not less than (152 mm) nor more than (610 mm)
in nominal dimension.
4. Random, polygonal pattern composed of units not less than (0.09 sq. m) nor more than (0.46
sq.m) in area.
H. Mortar Materials: As follows:
1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II; natural color, white, or a blend to produce mortar
color indicated.
a. Low-Alkali Cement: Not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when tested according to ASTM C
114.
2. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
3. Aggregate: ASTM C 144 and as indicated below:
a. For joints narrower than (6 mm), use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing (1.18-mm)
sieve.

b. For pointing mortar, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing (1.18-mm) sieve.
c. White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural, white sand or ground, white stone.
d. Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural, colored sand or ground marble, granite, or other sound
stone, as required to match Engineer's sample.
4. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in
mortar mixes. Use only pigments with record of satisfactory performance in stone mortars.
5. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A118.4, factory-packaged dry-mortar mix with water
emulsion latex additive added at Project site.
6. Water: Potable.
I. Grout Materials: As follows:

1. Grout Colors: Provide Engineer's selection from manufacturer's full range of colors.
J. Sand-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A108.10.

K. Latex-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6 and as follows:
1. Factory-Prepared Dry-Grout Mixture: Factory-prepared mixture of Portland cement; dry,
redispersible, ethylene vinyl acetate additive; and other ingredients to produce the following:
a. Un-sanded grout mixture for joints (3 mm) and narrower.
b. Sanded grout mixture for joints (3 mm) and wider.
2. Mixture of Dry-Grout Mix and Latex Additive: Mixture of factory-prepared dry-grout mix and latex
additive to comply with the following requirements:
a. Un-sanded Dry-Grout Mix: Dry-set grout complying with ANSI A118.6, for joints (3 mm) and
narrower.
b. Sanded Dry-Grout Mix: Commercial portland cement grout complying with ANSI A118.6, for
joints (3 mm) and wider.
c. Latex Additive: Styrene butadiene rubber.
d. Latex Additive: Acrylic resin.
L. Accessories: As follows:
1. Cleavage Membrane: Polyethylene sheeting, ASTM D 4397, (0.1 mm) thick.

2. Reinforcing Wire Fabric: Galvanized, welded-wire fabric, (50.8 by 50.8 mm) by (1.6-mm-)
diameter wire, complying with ASTM A 185 and ASTM A 82, except for minimum wire size.
3. Divider Strips and Edging: Metallic or combination of metal and PVC or neoprene base, designed
specifically for flooring applications consisting of the following:
a. Exposed-Edge Material: As follows:
1) Material: Half-hard brass.
2) Material: Stainless steel; ASTM A 666, Type 302.
b. Cross-Section Profile and Size: As indicated; height to match stone thickness.

1) Width: (1.6 mm).
2) Width: (3.2 mm).
3) Width: (6.4 mm).
c.Control-Joint Filler: Neoprene, in color selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range of
colors.
4. Cork Joint Filler: Preformed strips complying with ASTM D 1752, Type II.
5. Cleaner: Specifically formulated for stone types, finishes, and applications indicated. Do not use
cleaning compounds containing acids, caustics, harsh fillers, or abrasives.
6. Floor Sealer: Colorless, slip- and stain-resistant sealer not affecting color or physical properties of
stone surfaces, as recommended by stone producer for application indicated.
M. Stone Fabrication: Fabricate stone paving and flooring in sizes and shapes required to comply with
requirements indicated, including details on Drawings and Shop Drawings.
1. For granite, comply with recommendations of National Building Granite Quarries Association's
(NBGQA) "Specifications for Architectural Granite."
2. For marble, comply with recommendations of Marble Institute of America's (MIA) "Dimensional
Stone--Design Manual IV."
3. For limestone, comply with recommendations of Indiana Limestone Institute of America's
(ILI)"Indiana Limestone Handbook."
N. Pattern Arrangement: Fabricate stone from one block or contiguous, matched blocks, and arrange
units with veining and other natural markings to comply with the following requirements:
1. Arrange units with veining horizontal.
2. Arrange units with veining vertical.
3. Arrange units with veining as indicated on Drawings.
O. Mortar and Grout Mixes: Comply with referenced standards and with manufacturers' written
instructions. Do not use admixtures.
1. Mortar: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification, Type N for interior applications and
Type S for exterior applications.
2. Latex-Modified-Portland Cement Mortar: Proportion and mix portland cement, aggregate, and
latex additive to comply with latex additive manufacturer's written instructions.
3. Cement-Paste Slush Coat: Mix to consistency of thick cream and consisting of either cement and
water or cement, sand, and water.
a. For latex-modified-portland cement mortar, substitute latex admixture for part or all of water
according to latex additive manufacturer's written instructions.
b. Pigmented Pointing Mortar: Select and proportion pigments with other ingredients to
producecolor required. Do not exceed pigment-to-cement ratio of 1:10, by weight.
c. Colored-Aggregate Pointing Mortar: Produce color required by combining colored aggregates
with portland cement of selected color.
4. Joint Grout: Comply with mixing requirements of referenced ANSI standards and manufacturer's
written instructions.
1.3 EXECUTION
A. Vacuum clean substrates to remove dirt, dust, debris, and loose particles.
B. Remove substances from substrates that could impair mortar bond.
C. Clean stone surfaces before setting by thoroughly scrubbing with fiber brushes and then drenching
with clear water.
D. Execute stone paving and flooring installation by skilled mechanics and employ skilled stone fitters at
the site to do necessary field cutting as stone is set.
1. Use power saws to cut stone.
E. Set stone to comply with Drawings and Shop Drawings. Match for color and pattern by using units
numbered in sequence as indicated on Shop Drawings.
F. Scribe and field-cut stone as necessary to fit at obstructions. Produce tight and neat joints.
G. Stone Paving over Waterproofing: Carefully place stone and setting materials over waterproofing so
protection materials are not displaced and waterproofing is not punctured or otherwise damaged.
1. Provide cork joint filler, where indicated, at waterproofing that is turned up on vertical surfaces or,
if not indicated, provide temporary filler or protection until stone paving installation is complete.
H. Expansion- and Control-Joint Installation: Locate and install according to Drawings and Shop
Drawings.
Joint-sealant materials and installation are specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
I. Installing Stone Directly over Concrete: Install as follows:
1. Saturate concrete with clean water before placing setting bed. Remove surface water before
placing setting bed.

2. Apply cement-paste slush coat before placing setting bed. Limit area of slush coat to avoid its
drying out. Do not exceed (1.5-mm) thickness for cement-paste slush coat.
3. Apply mortar setting bed over cement-paste slush coat. Spread and screed setting bed to uniform
thickness at elevations required for accurate setting of stone.
4. Mix and place only as much mortar as can be covered with stone before initial set. Cut back,
bevel edge, and discard setting-bed material that has reached initial set before placing stone.
5. Place stone before initial set of cement occurs. Apply uniform (1.5-mm-) thick, slurry bond coatto
bed or to back of each stone unit.
6. Tamp and beat stone to obtain full contact with setting bed. Set each unit in a single operation
before initial set of mortar; do not disturb stone for purposes of realigning.
7. Point joints after setting. Tool joints flat, uniform, and smooth, without visible voids.
J. Installing Stone over Cleavage Membrane or Waterproofing: Install as follows:

1. Place cleavage membrane over subfloor surfaces indicated to receive stone flooring, lapped at
least (100 mm) at joints.
2. Place reinforcing wire fabric, lapped at joints by at least one full mesh and supported so mesh
becomes embedded in middle of setting bed. Do not butt edges against vertical surfaces.
3. Place mortar setting bed with reinforcing wire fabric fully embedded in middle of setting bed.
Spread and screed setting bed to uniform thickness at elevations required for accurate setting of
stone.
4. Mix and place only as much mortar as can be covered with stone before initial set. Cut back,
bevel edge, and discard setting-bed material that has reached initial set before placing stone.
5. Place stone before initial set of cement occurs. Apply uniform (1.5-mm-) thick, slurry bond coat to
bed or to back of each stone unit.
6. Tamp and beat stone to obtain full contact with setting bed. Set each unit in a single operation
before initial set of mortar; do not disturb stone for purposes of realigning.
7. Point joints after setting. Tool joints flat, uniform, and smooth, without visible voids.
K. Grout stone joints to comply with ANSI A108.10 and manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Do not use sanded grout for polished stone.
2. Grout joints as soon as possible after initial set of setting bed. After initial set of grout, finish joints
by tooling to produce a slightly concave polished joint.
3. Cure grout by maintaining in a damp condition for 7 days, except as otherwise recommended by
latex additive manufacturer.
L. Remove and replace damaged and defective stone paving and flooring in a manner that results in
stone paving and flooring's matching approved samples and mockups, complying with other
requirements, and showing no evidence of replacement.
M. Clean stone paving and flooring after setting and grouting are complete. Use procedures
recommended by stone fabricator for types of application.
N. Apply sealer to cleaned stone flooring according to sealer manufacturer's written instructions.
O. Prohibit traffic from installed stone for a minimum of 72 hours.
P. Protect stone paving and flooring during construction. Where adjoining areas require construction
work access, cover stone paving and flooring with a minimum of (19-mm) untreated plywood over
non-staining kraft paper.

SECTION 09900
PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Particular Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of exposed items and surfaces.
B. Paint exposed surfaces, except where these Specifications indicate that the surface or material is not
to be painted or is to remain natural. If an item or a surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the
item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces.
C. Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including color coding),
hangers, exposed steel and iron supports, and surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment that
do not have a factory-applied final finish.
D. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and
labels. Do not paint over UL or other code-required labels or equipment name, identification,
performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
E. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 2 Section Cement Concrete Pavement for traffic marking paint.
2. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel" for shop priming structural steel.
3. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for shop priming ferrous metal.
4. Division 8 Section Steel Doors & Frames for factory priming steel doors & frames.
5. Division 9 Section Gypsum Board Assemblies for surface preparation of gypsum board.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each paint system indicated. Include block fillers and primers.
B. Samples for Verification: For each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual
conditions, on representative Samples of the actual substrate.
1. Provide stepped Samples, defining each separate coat, including block fillers and primers. Use
representative colors when preparing Samples for review. Resubmit until required sheen, color,
and texture are achieved.
2. Provide a list of materials and applications for each coat of each Sample. Label each Sample for
location and application.
a. Concrete: Provide two 100mm square samples for each color and finish.
b. Concrete Unit Masonry: 100x200mm samples of masonry, with mortar joint in the center, for
each finish and color.
c. Wood: 300 mm square samples for each color and material on hardboard.
d. Stained or Natural Wood: 100x200mm samples of natural- or stained-wood finish on
representative surfaces.
e. Ferrous Metal: Two 100mm square samples of flat metal and two 200 mm long samples of
solid metal for each color and finish.
f. Submit a detailed "Painting Schedule" for review by the Engineer. Prepare this schedule on
the basis of surfaces, types of paint materials, types of primers and sealers, number of coats
and list the brand name of the products/manufacture for each use.


A. Applicator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in applying paints and coatings similar in
material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in
applications with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers and primers for each coating system from the same
manufacturer as the finish coats.
C. Field Samples: On wall surfaces and other exterior and interior components, duplicate finishes of
prepared samples. Provide full-coat finish samples on at least 30 sq.m. of surface until required
sheen, color, and texture are obtained; simulate finished lighting conditions for review of in-place
work.
D. The Engineer will select one room or surface to represent surfaces and conditions for each type of
coating and substrate to be painted. Apply coatings in this room or surface according to the schedule
or as specified. After finishes are accepted, this room or surface will be used to evaluate coating
systems of a similar nature.

A. Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers
bearing manufacturer's name and label and the following information:
1. Product name or title of material.
2. Product description (generic classification or binder type).
3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture.
4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents.
5. Thinning instructions.
6. Application instructions.
7. Color name and number.
8. VOC content.
B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient
temperature of 45 deg. F (7 deg. C). Maintain storage containers in a clean condition, free of foreign
materials and residue.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS (GENERAL)

A. Apply waterborne paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are
between 10 and 32 deg. C.
B. Apply solvent thinned paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air
are between 7 and 35 deg. C.
C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain. fog, or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent: or at
temperatures less than 3 deg. C above the dew point: or to damp or wet surfaces.
1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed
and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during application and drying
periods
D. Interior Painting
1. Provide continuous ventilation during and after application of paint Run ventilation system 24
hours per day during installation: provide continuous ventilation for 4 days after completion of
application of paint
2. Apply paint finishes only when temperature at location of installation can be satisfactorily
maintained within manufacturer's recommendations
3. Substrate and ambient temperature must be within limits prescribed by manufacturer to the
approval of the Engineer.
4. Apply paint finish only in areas where dust is no longer being generated by related construction
operations such that airborne particles will not affect the quality of the finished surface.
5. Apply paint only when surface to be painted is dry properly cured and adequately prepared.
E. Exterior Painting
1. Apply paint finishes only when conditions forecast for entire period of application fall within
manufacturer’s recommendations
2. Where surface to be painted is not under cover, do not apply paint when:
a. Substrate and ambient temperature are expected to fall outside limits prescribed by
manufacturer.
b. Temperature of surface is over 50C unless paint is specifically formulated for application at
high temperatures
c. Rain or sand storms are forecast to occur before paint has thoroughly cured: it is foggy,
misty, raining at site: relative humidity is above 85%
d. Surface to be painted is wet, clamp or frosted.
e. Previous coat is not dry.
3. Apply paint finish only when dust is no longer being generated by related construction operations
or when wind conditions are such that airborne particles will not affect the quality of the finished
surface4. Schedule painting operations such that surfaces exposed to direct intense sunlight are
scheduled for completion during early morning
5. Remove paint from areas which have been exposed to freezing, excess humidity, rain, snow or
condensation. Prepare surface again and repaint
6. Painting of occupied facilities to be carried out in accordance with approved schedule only.
Schedule operations to approval of the Engineer such that painted surfaces will have clued and
cured sufficiently before occupants are affected.
1.7 WARRANTIES AND GUARANTIES

A. Based on the routine inspection at a time of completion of the painting works main Contractor must
submit a product performance guarantee from the paint manufacturer along with a separate
guarantee from the painting sub-contractor for paint application.
These guaranties will be for the period of three years for interior painting works and five years for
extend painting works
B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Include component list with manufacturer’s reference numbers,
descriptions of materials and procedures for repairing and cleaning of finishes and cleaning
frequency.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
As per Manufacturers’ / vendor list
2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, and finish-coat materials that are compatible with
one another and with the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality paint material of the various coating types
specified that are factory formulated and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated.
Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable.
C. Colors: Match Engineer’s sample.
2.3 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY BLOCK FILLERS

A. Concrete Unit Masonry Block Filler: Factory-formulated high-performance latex blockfillers.

\PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements
for paint application.
1. Proceed with paint application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and
surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry.
2. Start of painting will be construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within a
particular area.
B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of
the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish
materials to ensure use of compatible primers.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures,
and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible
because of size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation
and painting. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed
using workers skilled in the trades involved.
B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean substrates of substances that
could impair bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning. Schedule cleaning
and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly
painted surfaces.
C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written
instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified.
1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime.

2. Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, concrete unit masonry and cement plaster surfaces to
be painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as
required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use
mechanical methods of surface preparation.
3. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and
sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off.
a. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other
recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming, fill holes and imperfections
in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.
b. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately on delivery. Prime edges, ends, faces,
undersides, and back sides of wood, including cabinets, counters, cases, and paneling.
c. If transparent finish is required, backprime with spar varnish.
d. Backprime paneling on interior partitions where masonry, plaster, or other wet wall
construction occurs on back side.
e. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of varnish or
sealer immediately on delivery.
4. Ferrous Metals: Clean un-galvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop coated;
remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or
mechanical cleaning methods that comply with SSPC's recommendations.
a. Blast steel surfaces clean as recommended by paint system manufacturer.

b. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat before
priming.
c. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire-brush,
clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touchup with same primer as
the shop coat.
5. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with non-petroleum-based solvents so surface is
free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal
fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods.
D. Material Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign
materials and residue.
2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during
application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain
material before using.
3. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and techniques
best suited for substrate and type of material being applied.
1. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to
formation of a durable paint film.
2. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used.
3. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, grilles,
convector covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, and similar components are in place. Extend
coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain system integrity and provide desired protection.
4. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces.
Before final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or
furniture with prime coat only.
5. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, non-specular black paint where visible through registers
or grilles.
6. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces.
7. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.
B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise
prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface
deterioration.
1. The number of coats and film thickness required are the same regardless of application method.
Do not apply succeeding coats until previous coat has cured as recommended by manufacturer.
If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to manufacturer's written
instructions, sand between applications.
2. Omit primer over metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted.
3. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional coats
until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure that
edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to
that of flat surfaces.
4. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not re-coat surfaces
until paint has dried to where it feels firm, and does not deform or feel sticky under moderate
thumb pressure, and until application of another coat of paint does not cause undercoat to lift or
lose adhesion.

C. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate size for
surface or item being painted.
2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet-back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by
manufacturer for material and texture required.
3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by
manufacturer for material and texture required.
D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended
spreading rate to achieve dry film thickness indicated. Provide total dry film thickness of the entire
system as recommended by manufacturer.
E. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items
exposed in equipment rooms and occupied spaces.
1. Refer to Division 15 and Division 16 for Schedule of color-coding and identification banding of
equipment, ductwork, piping, and conduit.
2. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical
components and paint separately.
3. Prime and paint insulated and exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, insulated and exposed ducts,
hangers, brackets, collars and supports, except where items are prefinished.
4. Replace identification markings on mechanical or electrical equipment when painted accidentally.
5. Paint exposed conduit and electrical equipment occurring in finished areas.
6. Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telephone equipment before
installing equipment.
7. Replace electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, and fittings removed prior to finishing.
8. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts that are visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat
black paint, to limit of sight line. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers, grilles.
F. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete coverage with
pores filled.
G. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat, as recommended by manufacturer, to
material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by others.
Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat
appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn-through or other defects due to insufficient sealing.
H. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or
repaint work not complying with requirements.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint
materials from Project site.
B. After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by
washing and scraping without scratching or damaging adjacent finished surfaces.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage from painting. Correct
damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Engineer.
B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. After completing painting operations,
remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work. After work of other
trades is complete, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

3.6 PAINT SCHEDULE
A. Pure Acrylic Paint System: Water based, heat reflective, crack bridging, breathable and UV resistant
coating with long lasting colours in matt finish to external elevation.
Initial Coat/Primer: One coat water based Alkali Resistant Primer, vol. solids> 37% as per
ISO 3233: 1998 (E), VOC in gms/ltr: 0 as per ISO 11890
Intermediate
Smooth Coat: One coat, Texo Compound, acrylic co-polymer based co-polymer based
intermediate coat specially formulated to be applied by trowel to
achieve a smooth finish covering minor surface undulations with vol.
solids > 62 % as per ISO 3233: 1998 (E).
Finishing Coats: 2 full coats of Jotashield Colorextreme Matt (or approved equivalent),
heat reflective, high quality pure acrylic water based product, vol.
Solids> 38% as per ISO 3233: 1998 (E), VOC in gms/ltr: 1 as per ISO
11890
Resistance to UV: Effect after 2500 hours of QUV weathering (BS
EN 1062-11)
No significant colour change or appearance
Water Vapour Transmission Ability (VINCI Technology Centre
method)
Water vapour transmission rate (avg): 74.64 g/m 2/24 hrs
Equivalent Air Layer Thickness (avg): 0.775 m @ 90 microns DFT
Liquid Water Transmission Rate (BS EN 1602-3)
LW Transmission Rate (avg): 0.027 kg/m 2.h0.5 @ 90 microns DFT
Water Permeability: Depth of water penetration @ 7 bar pressure
(BS EN 12390)
Nil penetration
Reduction in water penetration 100%
Crack bridging ability (BS EN 1062-7, Method A)
Up to 0.4 mm @ 90 microns DFT
Surface Burning Characteristics (ASTM E 84)
Class A (ASTM E84-09)
Flame Spread Index (FSI) 5
Smoke Developed Index (SDI) 0
B. Heavy Textured Heritage Traditional Paint (Jotun or approved equivalent) shall be applied on external
grooved plastered wall.
Pure acrylic water based, crack bridging, breathable, anti-carbonation coating with long lasting
colours)
The application shall be in accordance to Manufacturer’s method of application and the color shall
be as per Architect/Engineer’s approval.
Initial Coat/Primer: One coat of Jotashield Penetrating Primer or equivalent, an acrylic co-
polymer based, alkali resistant emulsion primer with Vol. Solids: 34±2
%
Two coats of Jotashield Décor (Heritage) Traditional Tex or equivalent,
Mid-Coats: a superior quality, exterior, water based textured paint. Based on pure
acrylic emulsion and contains rock hard aggregates with Vol. solids 52
±2 %
Finishing Coats : Two Coats of Jotashield Colourxtreme Matt or equivalent, a superior
quality, UV resistant, heat-reflective exterior, 100% pure acrylic water

based topcoat with Vol. solids 38 ±2 %

Properties:
Resistance to UV: Effect after 2500 hours of QUV weathering (BS

EN 1062-11)
No significant colour change or appearance
Water Vapour Transmission Ability (VINCI Technology Centre
method)
Water vapour transmission rate (avg): 74.64 g/m 2/24 hrs
Equivalent Air Layer Thickness (avg): 0.775 m @ 90 microns DFT
Liquid Water Transmission Rate (BS EN 1602-3)
LW Transmission Rate (avg): 0.027 kg/m 2.h0.5 @ 90 microns DFT
Water Permeability: Depth of water penetration @ 7 bar pressure
(BS EN 12390)
Nil penetration
Reduction in water penetration 100%
Crack bridging ability (BS EN 1062-7, Method A)
Up to 0.4 mm @ 90 microns DFT
Surface Burning Characteristics (ASTM E 84)
Class A (ASTM E84-09)
C. Washable Acrylic Co-Polymer Silk Emulsion Paint to internal walls (Dry areas)
Initial Coat/Primer: One coat: Jotun Fenomastic Emulsion
Primer: Acrylic copolymer based alkali resistance
primer
Vol. solids: 25±2 %, VOC 0 g/L (Theoretical as per ISO
11890-EU)
Smoothening Coats Two coats: Jotun Stucco: Acrylic copolymer

based putty
Vol. solids: 50±2%, VOC: 0 g/L (Theoretical as per ISO
11890-EU)
Finishing Coats : Two coats of Jotun Fenomastic My

Home Smooth Silk or equivalent, a high
quality silk emulsion paint, designed for
interior surfaces. Based on acrylic co-
polymer emulsion. Vol. solids: 40±2 % -
Silk VOC: 0g/L (Theoretical as per ISO
11890)
Properties:
VOC content
0 g/l (ISO 11890)
Washability/Scrub Resistance
>10,000 scrubs (DIN 53778)
Contrast Ratio/whiteness
94.00/94.88 (ASTM D2805-88)
Practical Washability
Rating 0-2: (ASTM D4828:94)
(0 = All stains removed & 2 = No stains removed)
Colour rub off
Class A

(Class A = Best & Class E = Worst)
D. Interior Anti-Fungal and Anti-Bacterial Emulsion For Walls And Ceilings (Wet Areas)
Pure acrylic water borne highly washable emulsion to concrete, cement plaster, block
work, gypsum boards, partition boards and Acrylic Spray Plaster.
Primer Coat: One coat of Jotun Fenomastic Emulsion Primer or equivalent, an acrylic co-
polymer based, alkali-resistant emulsion primer with Vol. solids: 25±2 %
Midcoats: Two coats of Jotun Stucco or equivalent, an acrylic co-polymer based putty with Vol.
solids: 50±2%
Topcoats: Two coats of Jotun Fenomastic Hygiene or equivalent, a superior quality anti-fungal,
anti-bacterial emulsion paint, designed for interior surfaces. Based on 100% pure acrylic emulsion
giving an eggshell finish: Vol. solids: 36±2 % -Silk
Properties
VOC content 24 g/l (ISO 11890)

Crack Bridging ability Up to 1mm (Vinci method.)
Resistance to household chemicals/Alkali Resistance No change observed (ASTM D543)
Washability/Scrub Resistance >20,000 scrubs (DIN 53778)
Hazardous Chemicals
Anti-fungal/Anti-bacterial Anti-fungal Rating
Rating=1-2 after on average 56 days at exposure on 3 different substrates (BS 3900: Part G6)
Anti-microbial activity Value = 4.8 to 6.3 (JIS Z 2801:2000)
(Value should not be less than 2)
Surface spread of Flame as per ASTM E 84

E. Interior Epoxy Paint For Walls And Ceilings (Chemical Resistant

Required Area)
Solvent free Epoxy paint with low VOC for concrete, cement plaster, block work, gypsum
boards, partition boards.
Primer : One coat of Penguard WF or equivalent, a two-pack water borne epoxy coating with
Volume Solids 51±2% as per ISO 3233: 1998 E with low VOC 65 gm/ltr as per ISO 11890-2
Finishing Coats: Two Coats of Tankguard 412 or equivalent, two pack, solvent free high
performance epoxy coating applied at a thickness 180 - 200 microns each, Solid(%) Volume 98
±2 as per ISO 3233, with low VOC 130gm/ltr. as per US EPA Method 24. Non-toxic tested in
accordance with AS/NZS 4020:2005.
F. Anti-Carbonation, Smooth Protective Coating For Carpark Walls, Soffit, And Column
Coatings
Primer Coat One coat: Jotashield Alkali Resistant Primer or equivalent, an acrylic co-polymer
based, alkali-resistant emulsion primer with Vol. solids: 37±2 %

Filler Coat (Optional) One/Two coats: Jotashield UltraBond filler or equivalent, an acrylic-
copolymer based, exterior grade filler used to minimize surface imperfections. Vol. Solids: 58 ±2
%
Top Coat Two coats: Jotashield Carbo Silk or equivalent, a superior quality, Water-based
polymeric acrylic Anti-carbonation coating in silk finish with Vol. solids: 36±2 %
Properties:
Carbon dioxide permeability according to ISO 1062-6:

With solvent/water-based primer
Equivalent air layer thickness, R: 231m
Equivalent concrete layer thickness, Sc: 58cm
Water vapour transmission rate according to EN ISO 7783-2:
microns180 g/m2.d
Crack-bridging according to ISO 1062-7:
0.7 mm
Reduction in water penetration at 5 bars pressure according to BS EN
12390-8:
100%
Light reflectance value: (ASTM E308)
92%
Scrubbability as per ISO 11998: Mean loss in DFT-
4.1 µm loss after 250 cycles. (Class-1)
Easy clean/stain removal as per ASTM D 4829-94:
0-1 Rating
Specular Gloss according to EN ISO 2813:
G3: 6-8
Dry Film Thickness according to ISO 3233:
E2: 50 microns per coat
D. Decorative Paint As per material specifications
E. Two component Epoxy Paint Spray applied for Galvanized Steel.

1. One coat two-component polyamide cured epoxy primer.
2. Two coats two-component polyurethane, isocyanite cured acrylic finish.
F. Wood - Paint Finish

1. One Coat - Wood Filler
2. One Coat - Wood Primer
3. One Coat - Undercoat (thinned 5%)
4. Two Coats - Alkyd Paint, semi-gloss.
G. Lacquer Finish Spray applied for Wood.

1. Polish finished substrates to eliminate marks and sander scratches and wipe clean and apply
sealer prior to application of undercoater.
2. 1st Coat: Alkyd resin, nitrocellulose lacquer base, 65% solids, under coater, colour best suited to
achieve final colour appearance of subsequent coats.
3. 2nd Coat: Lacquer, nitrocellulose plasticizer base, 45% solids, colour and gloss as selected by
Engineer.
H. Enamel Paint Spray applied for Steel - Primed (including exposed sprinkler pipes).
1. Touch-up with original primer.
2. Two coats alkyd enamel, semi-gloss.

J. Fireproof paint for Steel work (if any): Fire proof paints.
K. Pavement Marking: Solvent- borne coating based on alkyd resin and chlorinated rubber, pigmented
with a high quality light and weather fast pigment, with a total dry film thickness of125-150 microns or
as required.
L. Concrete Slab Sealer (“SLR” on Finish Schedules)
1. First Coat: Sherwin-Williams Concrete Drive Sealer. Or equal approved.
2. Second Coat: Sherwin-Williams Concrete Drive Sealer. Or equal approved.
M. Epoxy Floor Coating System For All, Non UV Exposed Back Of House Areas
Location: All, non exposed back of house areas

Manufacturer. Jotun Paints or equal and approved.
Surface(s): Cast in-situ concrete slabs with steel trowel or power floated finish.
Preparation: In strict accordance with manufacturers recommendations. Joints, cracks,holes and
other depressions to be filled with stoppers/ fillers. Work well in and finish flush with surface.
Abrade to a smooth finish. Remove dirt, grease, oil and efflorescent salts prior to application.
Initial Coats: One coat of Jotafloor SF PR 150 or equivalent at 200 microns dft, a two component
amine cured solvent free epoxy coating with Vol. Solids: 98±2%
Finishing Coats. Two coats of Jotafloor EPC 300 or equivalent, a two component amine cured
solvent free epoxy coating at 200 microns dft each with Vol. Solids: 98±2%.
Properties:
Compressive Strength 64.4 N/mm2 (ASTM C579)

Tensile Strength 22.9 N/mm2 (ASTM C307)
Flexural Strength 41 N/mm2 (ASTM C580)
Shore “A” Hardness 97 (ASTM D2240)
Shore “D” Hardness 76 (ASTM D2240)
Taber Abrasion 0.03% after 1000 cycles (ASTM D4060)
Crack bridging ability1.95 mm (ASTM C836)
Water Absorption NIL (ASTM C413)
Resistance to Mold growth No Mold growth after 4 weeks (Scale 10 as per
ASTM D3273)
N. Epoxy Floor Coating System For Internal, Non UV Exposed, Back Of House Skirtings And
Staircases
Location: All back of house area staircases

Preparation: In strict accordance with manufacturers recommendations. Joints, cracks,holes and
other depressions to be filled with stoppers/ fillers. Work well in and finish flush with surface.
Abrade to a smooth finish. Remove dirt, grease, oil and efflorescent salts prior to application.
Initial Coats: One coat of Jotafloor Sealer HS or equivalent, a two component amine cured
solvent free epoxy coating at 80 microns dft with Vol. Solids of 90±2.
Finishing Coats. Two coats of Jotafloor Topcoat E or equivalent, a two component amine cured
solvent free epoxy coating at 200 microns dft each with Vol. Solids 90±2
Properties
Compressive Strength
99.3 N/mm2 (ASTM C579)
Tensile Strength
8.5 N/mm2 (ASTM C307)

Shore “A” Hardness
92 (ASTM D2240)
Taber Abrasion
66 mg after 1000 cycles/CS-17 wheel (ASTM D4060)
Crack bridging ability
1.62 m (ASTM C836)
Resistance to Mold growth
No Mold growth after 4 weeks (Scale 10 as per ASTM D3273)
Water Absorption
NIL (ASTM C413)
O. Polyurethane Traffic Deck Floor Coating System For All Parking Areas
Location: All car park areas

Preparation: In strict accordance with manufacturers recommendations. Joints, cracks,
holes and other depressions to be filled with approved stoppers/ fillers. Work well in and finish
flush with surface. Abrade to a smooth finish. Remove dirt, grease, oil and salts prior to
application.
Initial Coats: One coat of Jotafloor SF PR 150 or equivalent, a two component amine cured
solvent free epoxy coating at 200 microns dft with Vol. Solids: 98±2%, spreading rate: 80-
90m2/drum/Coat
Midcoat: Broadcast Non-Slip Aggregate – broadcast aggregates over wet primer to achieve a
non-slip surface. Excess aggregates can be removed once primer is cured
Midcoat: One coat of Jotafloor PU Universal or equivalent, a two component aromatic isocyanate
cured polyurethane coating at 500 microns dft with Vol. solids at 98±2%, spreading rate:
2m2/Liter/Coat
Finishing Coats. Two coats of Jotaflooor PU Topcoat or equivalent, a two component isocyanate
cured polyurethane coating at 80 microns dft each with Vol. solids 63±2%, spreading rate: 70 to
80m2/Drum – 2 coats
Properties: In compliance to ASTM C957
Compressive Strength 89 N/mm2 (ASTM C579)

Tensile Strength >8 N/mm2 (ASTM C307)
Taber Abrasion 21.3 mg after 1000/CS-17 wheel cycles (ASTM D4060)
Crack bridging ability >2.00 mm (ASTM C836)
Impact resistance
No sign of crack or delamination (80”/2p-ASTM D2794)
Slip Resistance (Pendulum Friction Test) Dry 72 (extremely Low)-Wet 35 (Low) (BS
7976)
Water Penetration
100% resistant as per BS EN 12390
Resistance to Mold growth
No Mold growth after 4 weeks (Scale 10 as per ASTM D3273)
P. Epoxy Traffic Deck System For Internal, Non-UV Exposed, Parking Areas
Location: All car park areas

Preparation: In strict accordance with manufacturers recommendations. Joints, cracks,

holes and other depressions to be filled with stoppers/ fillers. Work well in and finish flush
with surface. Abrade to a smooth finish. Remove dirt, grease, oil and efflorescent salts
prior to application.
Initial Coats: One coat of Jotafloor SF PR 150 or equivalent, a two component amine
cured solvent free epoxy coating at 200 microns dft with Vol. Solids: 98±2, spreading
rate:
Midcoat: Broadcast Non-Slip Aggregate or equivalent, broadcast aggregates over wet
primer to achieve a non-slip surface. Excess aggregates can be removed once primer is
cured
Finishing Coats. Two coats of Jotafloor EPC 300 or equivalent, a two component amine
cured solvent free epoxy coating at 200 microns dft each with Vol. Solids: 98±2
Properties:
Compressive Strength 64.4 N/mm2 (ASTM C579)

Tensile Strength 22.9 N/mm2 (ASTM C307)
Shore “A” Hardness 97 (ASTM D2240)
Taber Abrasion 0.03% after 1000 cycles (ASTM D4060)
Crack bridging ability1.95 mm (ASTM C836)
Water Absorption NIL (ASTM C413)
Resistance to Mold growth No Mold growth after 4 weeks (Scale
10 as per ASTM D3273)
Note:
Types of paints shall be as specified in this section. In case of any conflict, the Engineer will decide on the
type of paint to be used.

DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
SECTION 10100
SIGNAGES
PART 1 GENERAL
a) Wall mounted signs designating permanent rooms and spaces such as, room numbers and
restroom, department, office, and fire exit identifications.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3. Materials, fabrication, finishing, fastenings, hardware, and accessories.
4. Mounting details and installation methods.
B. Shop Drawings: Provide project specific, scaled, shop drawings including:

1. Extents of installation, room sizes, layouts, profiles, signage dimensions, penetrations if any,
control dimensions and architectural alignments.
2. Interface with building services and adjacent construction.
3. Material thicknesses and joints, anchorage, trim, hardware and locks, finishes, substrate
materials, and accessories.
4. Base building requirements, and installation procedures.
5. Identify typography, artwork, finishes, message locations and similar.
6. Coordinate nomenclature and terminology with sign drawings, message schedule, and location
plan.
C. Qualifications: For manufacturer and installer.
D. Certificates: Product certificates signed by the manufacturer certifying materials comply with specified
performance characteristics, physical requirements, and project specific requirements.
E. Manufacturers Field Reports: Submit no later than 2 business days after each site visit.
F. Samples:
1. Selection Samples: Provide manufacturers standard samples for selection of finishes, colors, and
textures.
2. Verification Samples: Provide two samples for each product to be installed, minimum size 6 by 6
inch (150 by 150 mm).
a. Interior Signs: Submit one full size sample of each type, style, and color including method of
attachment. Accepted samples may be incorporated into finished work.
G. Closeout Submittals:
1. Operations and maintenance data.
2. Warranty.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: As per Vendors’ list

B. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01 60 00 -

Product Requirements.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. 1.5mm thick anodized aluminum; engraving & color filling.
B. Sizes, height and font to Engineer’ approval
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
1. Verify areas are finished and ready to receive signage
2. Verify location of cast-in anchors, mounting hardware, concrete foundations or similar supports
are properly installed, in the proper locations, and of the type and size required for each type of
sign.
B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory
preparation before proceeding.
C. Do not begin installation until unacceptable conditions are corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result
for the substrate under the project conditions.
C. Protect adjacent work and finished surfaces from damage during installation.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, including product technical bulletins, product
catalog installation instructions, and product carton installation instructions.
B. Locate as indicated on the drawings, sign location plan, and in accordance with approved shop
drawings.
C. Avoid warps, buckles, distortion, opening joints, or overstressing welds or fasteners.
D. Interior Signs:
1. Mount signs in proper alignment, level and plumb according to the sign location plan and the
dimensions given on elevation and sign location drawings.
2. Where otherwise not dimensioned, signs shall be installed where best suited to provide a
consistent appearance throughout the project.
3. Clarify exact placements and alignments with the architect if required.
E. Make final adjustments to components to ensure proper alignment, fit, and smooth operation of any
removable or moveable parts.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Remove temporary coverings and protection of adjacent work areas.
B. Clean installed products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions prior to owner's acceptance.
Wipe clean with water-dampened cloth. Do not use chemicals or solvents.
C. Remove construction debris from project site and legally dispose of debris.
D. Clean all exposed surfaces in accordance with the manufacturer instructions.

3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products until completion of project.
B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 10260
WALL AND CORNER GUARDS
1. Wall / Column Protection, Wheel Stoppers and Speed Guards
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Wall guards.
2. Column guards.
3. Speed guards.
4. Wheel Stoppers
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: For each impact-resistant wall protection unit showing locations and extent.
Include sections, details, and attachments to other work.

A. Store protection units in original undamaged packages and containers, laid horizontally inside
well-ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, and
humidity.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of impact-resistant wall protection units that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures.
b. Deterioration of materials beyond normal use.
2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless-steel, or other noncorrosive metal screws, bolts,
and other fasteners compatible with items being fastened.
2.2 WALL GUARDS

A. Wall Guard: Heavy-duty assembly consisting of a high impact resistant extruded rubber profile
fixed vertically or horizontally onto flat or curved surfaces using appropriate expanding or
chemical anchors.
2.3 COLUMN GUARDS

A. Surface-Mounted, Resilient, Column Guards: Heavy-duty assembly consisting of a high impact
resistant extruded rubber profile with yellow reflective strips which can be mounted onto clips
bolted to the columns or fixed with the appropriate epoxy adhesive from the same Manufacturer.

2.4 SPEED GUARDS

A. Floor-Mounted, Resilient, Speed Guards: Heavy-duty assemblies consisting of a high impact
resistant extruded rubber modules in alternating black and yellow with reflective eyes on both
sides. Intermediate and end units are fixed in position with appropriate expanding or chemical
anchors.
2.5 WHEEL STOPPER

A. Floor-Mounted, Resilient, Wheel Stopper: Precast wheel stopper as per drawing detail which is
fixed with appropriate expanding or chemical anchors which are subsequently hidden under a
yellow reflective strip.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate impact-resistant wall and column protection units to comply with requirements
indicated for design, dimensions, and member sizes, including thicknesses of components.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and wall areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B. Examine walls to which impact-resistant wall protection will be attached for blocking, grounds,
and other solid backing that have been installed in the locations required for secure attachment
of support fasteners.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Complete finishing operations, including painting, before installing impact-resistant wall
protection system components.
B. Before installation, clean substrate to remove dust, debris, and loose particles.
C.
3.3 INSTALLATION
General: Install impact-resistant wall protection unit level, plumb, and true to line without
distortions. Do not use materials with chips, cracks, voids, stains, or other defects that might be
visible in the finished Work.
1. Install impact-resistant wall protection units in locations and at mounting heights indicated
on Drawings or, if not indicated in accordance with Manufacturer’s recommendations.
2. Provide splices, mounting hardware, anchors, and other accessories required for a
complete installation.
a. Provide anchoring devices to withstand imposed loads.
2. Kerbstone
Precast concrete kerbs hydraulically pressed on and including necessary anchors and painting shall
be provided and executed to complement the pavement (interlock or stamped concrete) works.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 10670
KITCHEN CABINET
1.1 GENERAL
A. Submittals: In addition to Product Data, submit the following:
1. Shop Drawings: For cabinets and countertops. Show materials, finishes, filler panels,
hardware, edge and backsplash profiles, cutouts for plumbing fixtures, and methods of joining
countertops.
2. Samples showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of
material exposed to view.
B. Quality Assurance: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the following standards:
1. Cabinets: KCMA A161.1.

a. KCMA Certification: Provide cabinets with KCMA's "Certified Cabinet" seal affixed in a semi-
exposed location of each unit and showing compliance with the above standard.
C. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of existing construction by field measurements before

fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Provide fillers and scribes if
necessary.
D. Field Measurements for Countertops: Verify dimensions of countertops by field measurements

after base cabinets are installed but before countertop fabrication is complete.
E. Coordinate layout and installation of blocking and reinforcement in partitions for support of kitchen
casework.
1.2 PRODUCTS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

(As per vendor list)
B. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Cherryvale"
C. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Match Architect's samples.
D. Colors, Textures, and Patterns in plastic laminates in Walnut wood texture finish.
E. Cabinet Materials: Comply with the following:
1. Carcasses : Powder coated aluminum profile frame in Walnut veneer laminates
2. Shutters : Aluminum profile; Walnut veneer finish on the outer side and inner
side with 0.4mm thick thermoplastic PVC;
3. Shelves : Aluminum profile Walnut veneer laminate
4. Drawers : Number of drawers as per approved drawings. Self-closing height
85mm load capacity is 30kg heavy duty (to Client’s approval).
5. Hinges : 165/180º chrome plated Hinges (Blum or Hettich)
6. Granite top : 3cm thick Paradiso India Granite top, scratch, stain and wear
resistant.
7. Granite : 2cm, thick 10cm high granite splash back with rounded edges.

splash back
8. Handles : As per approved sample. (Blum or Hettich)
9. Cooker Hood : Either 90cm cooker hood with aluminum Filter (brand as per
approved sample).
10. Sink : Double sink including waste basket with overflow, bottle trap and
dual space saving siphon; polished SS finish; 10 year warranty.
11. Sink mixer : Single Lever Kitchen Mixer: sink mixer 1-hole quarter turn single
lever single flow, at least 210mm from center base to spout;
including compatible and recommended 2 Nos. angle valves; 5 year
warranty.
12. Colour : Subject to Engineer's approval.
13. Accessories : Make – Europe
All open sides shall have the same finished faces (colour & thickness, etc.) i.e. oven sides, corners, etc.
1.3 EXECUTION
A. Install casework with no variations in flushness of adjoining surfaces; use concealed shims.
Where casework abuts other finished work, scribe and cut for accurate fit. Provide filler strips,
scribe strips, and moldings in finish to match casework face.
B. Install casework and countertop level and plumb to a tolerance of (3 mm in 2.4 m).
C. Fasten cabinets to adjacent units and to backing.
E. Fasten solid-surface countertops by screwing through corner blocks of base units into underside
of countertop. Align adjacent surfaces, and form seams to comply with manufacturer's written
instructions using adhesive in color to match countertop. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove
surface scratches, and clean entire surface.
F. Adjust casework and hardware so doors and drawers are centered in openings and operate
smoothly without warp or bind. Lubricate operating hardware as recommended by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 10800
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product data: Include catalog cuts and data sheets indicating size, material and finish, complete
parts list and installation procedures for each accessory.
B. Samples: Submit one actual sample of each accessory, if requested by Engineer. Upon
acceptance, samples will be returned for incorporation into project.
C. Deliver accessory schedule, keys and parts manual as part of contract close-out documents.
1.02 JOB CONDITIONS:

A. Protection: Maintain manufacturer's protective covering on accessories until final clean-up of
installation.
B. Coordinate this work with work of other trades for setting built-in anchoring devices and to insure
correct opening sizes for recessed accessories.
1.03 QUALITY CRITERIA:

A. All accessories except security items shall be the products of one manufacturer. Keyed
accessories shall be keyed alike.
1.04 WARRANTY:
A. Mirrors: Warrant mirrors for five years against silver spoilage.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: As per approved list of manufacturers.
2.02 TOILET ACCESSORY / MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT LEGEND

A. All sanitary wares and mixers shall be complying the Green Building Regulations.
B. The following toilet accessories and miscellaneous equipment listed shall be installed where
indicated on the Drawings:
a) Surface Mounted Toilet Paper Holder (ABS) with cover.
b) Double robe hook, chrome finish mounted on toilet door.
c) Towel Rail: 60cm single rail.
d) Wall mounted water closet with dual flushing capacity at 3/6L per flush conforming to Green
Building specifications. 10 year warranty.
e) Wash Basin: 10 year warranty.
a) Full pedestal with chrome finish trap with PVC bottle trap; b) Under-counter Wash Basin with
one tophole with overflow.
f) Hand Spray: Metal Trigger spray Set with ABS fixed wall bracket; 1250mm double clenched
brass hose; 1 No. angle valve; 5 year warranty.
g) Mirror: ASI 0600 B: 6mm thick clear mirror, 25mm beveled edges.
h) Mixers: Single lever basin mixer S-size with pop up waste set, chrome finish trap, 2 Nos.
angle valves with escutcheon plates; 5 year warranty.

i) Bath Tub: Rectangular with integrated acrylic, slip-preventing pattern including bathtub legs
with overflow kit (11/2” combination bath waste & trap with overflow and domed clicker); 10
year warranty.
j) Bath Tub Mixer: Metal handle with red and blue colour indication; 35 mm ceramic cartridge,
automatic diverter, cascade aerator, S-connectors and integrated check valve; 5 year
warranty.
k) Shower Mixer single lever Shower mixer; Metal handle with red and blue colour indication –
printed on handle; 5 year warranty.
l) Shower Kit: Shower kit with a 600 mm slide rail Ø21 mm, handspray holder, 3F handspray
(minimum 3 function) with 80 mm diameter and 8lt/min flow regulator, 1750 mm metal double
clenched hose, transparent SD; 5 year warranty.
m) Shower Tray: 15cm height Acrylic white shower tray including legset; 10 year warranty.
n) Vanity counter: 20mm thick black granite.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION:
A. Verify openings scheduled to receive recessed or semi-recessed accessories for correct
dimensions, depth, plumbness of blocking or frames, and preparations that would affect
installation of accessories.
3.2 INSTALLATION:
A. Install accessories level, plumb and in indicated location. Installation methods shall be as
indicated in manufacturer's product data for substrates encountered.
B. Mounting heights: Except as otherwise indicated, heights are given above finish floor (A.F.F.) to
top of accessory.
1. Mirrors: 40 cm to bottom; 100 cm to bottom (over lavatory).
2. Mixers as per Green Building Regulations
C. Conceal evidence of drilling, cutting and fitting to adjacent finishes.
D. Install ceiling mounted break-a-way privacy curtain as shown in manufacturer’s written

instructions for installation required.
1. Follow manufacturer’s written instructions for installation in a security facility.
2. Install ceiling track using non-removable security fasteners.
3.3 ADJUST AND CLEAN:

A. Adjust operating components of accessories for proper operation.
B. Clean and polish exposed surfaces just prior to Date of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 10900
WARDROBE AND CLOSET SPECIALTIES
1.1 GENERAL
A. Submittals: In addition to Product Data, submit the following:

1. Shop Drawings: Wardrobes and Closets. Show materials, finishes, filler panels and
hardware.
2. Samples showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of
material exposed to view.
B. Quality Assurance: Unless otherwise indicated, comply applicable standards.
C. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of existing construction by field measurements before

fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Provide fillers and scribes if
necessary.
1.2 PRODUCTS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

(As per vendor list)
B. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements.
C. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Walnut wood veneer or as selected by Engineer / Employer from
manufacturer's full range for these characteristics.
E. Materials shall be the following:
1. Carcasses : 18mm thick white melamine MDF and 4mm back panel (rear side
hardboard) same as carcass colour with 2mm thick PVC edge
lipping; Must be scratch resistant in Walnut wood veneer finish.
2. Door Shutter : 18mm thick MDF white melamine on both sides; scratch resistant
in Walnut wood veneer finished finger pull as per approved
sample. Filler to be with white colour.
3. Shelves 18mm MDF in laminated melamine finish with 2mm PVC lipping.
(Adjustable)
5. Drawers 3 Drawers in each cupboard with one drawer only with lock (or as
Client’s requirements) (6 Nos.); soft close drawer rails.
6. Hinges : 180 blum and 110º metal hinges (clip on type) with flassure
screw; soft close hinges. (Blum or Hettich)
7. Hanging Rod : Chrome hanger rods, Ellipse type.
8. Handles/Knobs : SS handles, for door shutters and white knobs for drawers as per
approved sample.
9. Mirror : 4mm thick, clear mirror fixed to the inner face.
10. Skirting : As per approved ID works
11. Colour Subject to Engineer's approval
12. Accessories : Stainless Steel; Make - Europe or to Engineer’s approval.
An architrave shall be providing for the cupboards all around (4 side).
The upstand shall be 10cm above the finishing level.

1.3 EXECUTION
A. Install casework with no variations. Where casework abuts other finished work, scribe and cut for
accurate fit. Provide filler strips, scribe strips, and moldings in finish to match casework face.
B. Adjust casework and hardware so doors and drawers are centered in openings and operate
smoothly without warp or bind. Lubricate operating hardware as recommended by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION

LIST OF MANUFACTURERS
Item Description Manufacturer

Unimix - UAE
1. Concrete Conmix - UAE
S.S. Lootah – UAE
Emirate Steel - UAE
2. Reinforcing Steel Saudi Steel - KSA
Turkish Steel - Turkey
Apex - UAE
Hussain Abbas - UAE
Bin La Hej - UAE
3. Blocks Ducon – UAE
Emcon – UAE
Al Jazeera – UAE
Juma Al Majid - UAE
National Cement Factory
Jebel Ali Cement Factory
4. Cement
OR other products approved by Dubai
Municipality
Terraco – UAE
5. Plaster Conmix – UAE
Hitek – UAE
Unimix - UAE
National Rak - UAE
Apex – UAE
6. Kerbstone
Ducon – UAE
Jazeera – UAE
Juma Al Majid - UAE
Cosmo Plast - UAE

7. Polythene Sheet (1000 Gauge) Kangaroo Plastics - UAE
Al Ain Plastic - UAE
Gulf Extrusions - UAE
8. Aluminum Section Emirates Extrusions – UAE
Al Jaber Extrusions - UAE
Multi Tech Engineering – UAE
9. Stainless Steel Works Khansaheb Metals – UAE
Precision Steel Fabrication Industries – UAE
OR Equal & approved
Tek n Coat - UAE
Mapei - UAE
10. Water Proofing (wet areas) Henkel Polybit – UAE
BASF – UAE
Al Mayas - UAE
Henkel Polybit (Roof Care) - UAE
Tek n Coat - UAE
11. Water Proofing (for roof)
Imperbit (IMI) – UAE
BASF – UAE
BASF – UAE
Water Proofing membrane/ Bitumen Fosroc Mac Al Gurg - UK
12.
emulsion coating Sika – UAE
SOPREMA

Fosroc Mac Al Gurg - UK

Henkel Polybit – UAE
13. Joint Sealant/wall/slab BASF – UAE
Mapei - Italy
Laticrete – UAE
Jotun - UAE
Henkel Poly bit – UAE
BASF – UAE
14. Epoxy Floor Coating
Conmix – UAE
Laticrete – UAE
Berger - UAE
Henkel Poly bit – UAE
BASF – UAE
Fosroc Mac Al Gurg - UK
15. PU Traffic Coating Jotun - UAE
Conmix – UAE
Laticrete – UAE
Berger - UAE
Devon - UK
Hardware/Ironmongeries and Union - UK
16.
Accessories for Wooden Doors Dorma - Germany
Hafele – Germany
Hardware/Ironmongeries and Giesse - Italy
17. Accessories for Glass Doors & Iseo – Italy
windows Hafele - UK
Tremco – Europe
Hilti - Germany
18. Fire-Stop Sealants
Pyroplex – UK
3M - US
Henkel Polybit - UAE
Mapei – Italy
19. Tile Adhesive / Grout Conmix – UAE
BASF – UAE
Laticrete - UAE
Jotun – UAE
Berger –UAE
20. Paint (all types as to specifications)
National –UAE
Caparol - UAE
Jotun – UAE
21. Powder Coating OR other products approved by Dubai
Municipality
Saint-Gobain – France
AGC – Belgium
22. Glass and Mirrors
Glaverbel - Belgium
Ford – USA
Gypsemna - UAE
23. Gypsum Board Knauf - Austria
Boral – Uribe
RAK - UAE
Al Khaleej - UAE
Porcelanosa - Spain
24. Ceramic / Porcelain
Al Shamsi - UAE
German Home - International
Or as approved by Employer/ Engineer
Starwood - UAE
25. Wooden Doors Royal Wood Factory - UAE
Wood Style – UAE

Al Karnak – UAE
MERINT
Wood Pecker – UAE
Arcitec - UAE
Bin Dasmal - UAE
Arabian Engineering – UAE
26. Metal Doors
Prometal Metal Ind. – UAE
GSG Metal Ind. – UAE
Naffco - UAE
Starwood - UAE
Royal Wood Factory - UAE
Wood Style – UAE
27. Wardrobe and Accessories
Al Karnak – UAE
Astra – UAE
Wood Pecker – UAE
Starwood - UAE
Royal Wood Factory - UAE
Wood Style – UAE
28. Kitchen Cabinet & Accessories
Al Karnak – UAE
Astra – UAE
Wood Pecker – UAE
Hafele – International
Kitchen and Wardrobe Simplex – International
29.
Accessories Hettich – International
Blum -– International
Granite Stone – Spain
Granite Stone – India
30. Kitchen / Vanity Countertop
Granite Stone – Portugal
Granite Stone – Italy
Steel Line - UAE
Al Hashimi Metal - UAE
31. Metal Handrail
Al Malik Industries – UAE
Multi Tech Engineering – UAE
Ostermeier FZE - UAE
32. Garbage Chute System Chab - UAE
SFSP - UAE
Alucobond – UAE
Aluminum Composite Cladding Alucopanel – UAE
33.
(ACP) Alubond - UAE
Alupex – UAE
Faraidooni
Sultaco
34. Sanitary Wares
Jaquar
OR Equal & approved
35. Faucets and Mixers Grohe – Germany
36. Kitchen Sink Teka or equivalent

GREEN BUILDING REGULATIONS
All applicable Green Building Regulations and Specifications of Dubai Municipality shall be complied
which are not limited to the following:
1. External roof surfaces shall have minimum Solar Reflective Index (SRI) of 78 of 75% of the roof
area as referred to Section 304.01.
2. The thermal transmittance (U value) of the roof shall not exceed 0.3W/m 2K as per 501.01A green
regulation.
3. All water fixtures and fittings shall comply Section 601.01 for Water Efficient Fittings.
4. All timber materials shall comply Section 701.02: Certified / Accredited Timber.
5. All glass elements shall comply Section 501.01, B.1 for the U value, shading coefficient and light
transmittance;
6. All materials shall be complying Section 404.01 for paints and coatings and Section 404.02 for
Adhesive and Sealants.
7. No asbestos containing materials shall be used in the works as stipulated in Section 701.03.
8. Materials containing lead or heavy metals with percentage more than the D.M. approved
specifications shall not be used as referred to Section 701.04.
9. Recycled content must account for at least five percent (5%) of the total volume of materials used
in the construction of building as referred to Section 701.06;
10. Building materials available regionally must comprise at least five percent (5%) of the total volume
of materials used in the construction of building as referred to Section 701.07;
11. Section 702.01: Construction and Demolition Waste;
12. Section 702.05: Recyclable Waste Management Facilities.
13. The Contractor shall strictly comply the green regulation, 305.01 for the Impact of Construction,
Demolition and Operational Activities.
END OF SPECIFICATIONS

Volume 2 Part 1 Civil &amp; Architectural Specifications

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Volume 2 Part 1 Civil &amp; Architectural Specifications

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PROJECT: 11-583

PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL SAFA 2, DUBAI,

FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

PROPOSED G+ 4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ON PLOT NO. 6439671, WADI AL

FOR MR. FADI AHMAD MOHAMMAD ODEH

Volume 1 : Tender and Contract Conditions

Volume 3 : Bill of Quantities

Volume 4 : Soil Investigation Report

CIVIL AND ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS

Design Center 1/1

ARCHITECTURAL AND CIVIL WORK SPECIFICATIONS

ITEM PARTICULARS PAGE

10800 Toilet and Bath Accessories 165-166

List of Manufacturers 169-171

Design Center 2/2

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Design Center 1 / 172 Civil & Architectural Specifications

INTENT AND MEANING

DISCREPANCIES, ERRORS OR OMISSIONS

Design Center 2 / 172 Civil & Architectural Specifications

Design Center 3 / 172 Civil & Architectural Specifications

2. Statutory Approvals, Charges and Connections

5. Construction Safety Health and Welfare

Design Center 4 / 172 Civil & Architectural Specifications

9. Traffic and Police Regulations

10. Control of Noise and Pollution

11. Provision of Maintenance Manuals

12. Final Payment

13. Site Management

14. Water for the Works

15. Electricity for the Works

16. Watching and Lighting

17. Artificial Lighting

18. Access to Site

19. Notice Boards and Signboards

3. Refer below requirements of Dubai Development Authority’s Building Department for

20. Setting of Offices, etc.

22. Temporary Fences and Hoarding

25. Builder’s Work in connection

Design Center 7 / 172 Civil & Architectural Specifications

26. Cart away rubbish

27. Offloading and Moving Materials

29. Setting Out

30. Welfare Facilities

31. Compliance and Regulations

32. Boycott of Israel

34. English Language

35. Special Conditions relating to Securing ‘No Objection Certificate’

36. Latest Regulation

37. Site Survey

38. Contractor to Verify Site Measurements

39. Cutting and Patching

Design Center 9 / 172 Civil & Architectural Specifications

41.1 Workshop Drawings

Design Center 10 / 172 Civil & Architectural Specifications

41.2 As-Built Drawings

42. Contractor’s Responsibilities

Design Center 11 / 172 Civil & Architectural Specifications

43. Programme of Work

Design Center 12 / 172 Civil & Architectural Specifications

43.1 Updated Programme

Design Center 13 / 172 Civil & Architectural Specifications

45. Progress Meetings

46. Progress Photographs

Volume 2 Part 1 Civil & Architectural Specifications

Volume 2 Part 1 Civil & Architectural Specifications